Home

Flex.View V3.1 Help Manual

1. Page 180 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Passwords can be case sensitive so if you vary the capitalization when you assign the password users must type the same capitalization when they enter the password The complexity of the password e minimum number of characters the use of case sensitive characters etc is defined in the Security Settings dialog box 4 Click on the Apply button Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to change the User password in the RealFlex database Your new password will now be active Note When the User cannot change password option is active in the Security User Maintenance dialog box the user will not be able to change their own password If the user attempts to change their password after clicking on the Apply button the following message will be displayed ES server reports write error To set change user access level This option allows you to set or change user access levels for a group and all its assigned users 1 Click on and highlight required group then click on the Q button The Security Group Maintenance dialog box will appear Security Group Maintenance Database builder Access disabled CAT related utilities Access disabled Send controls Access disabled amp Server exit Access disabled User functions Access disabled Demand reports Access disabled Edit scratch pad Access disabled Edit pa
2. Archive operation log Restore 3 Inthe File name field click on the EN button on the right of this field The Open dialog box will appear 4 Locate the file to be restored then click on the Open button The Files of type will always be Flex Win Backup Files fwa You will be returned to the Restore Project window where the path and file name will now be entered in the File name field 5 Inthe Restore path field the destination path for the restored file based on the location entered in the Path to restore field in the Backup Project window when it was backed up will have been automatically entered If you want to change the destination path and restore the Project to a different directory on your hard drive a floppy disc or CD click on the button on the right of this field The Browse for Folder dialog box will be displayed to enable you to select a different restore path 6 Click on the OK button You will be returned to the Restore Project window where the path will now be entered in the Restore path field If you changed the restore path in step 5 above and wanted to reset the path to the default restore path click on the Default restore path button Page 146 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 7 Click on the Restore button Details of the operation will be displayed in the Archive operation log area After successfully restoring the projec
3. gt To delete a Presets report 1 Click on the hd button to the right of the Presets field and select required report for deletion from the drop down list 2 With the required report displayed in the Presets field click on the Delete button The Reset button is used to return the Selective Alarm Print window back to the default settings i e current date and time and all options selected Output to section You can choose where to send the report Options are Display The output is displayed on the Flex View screen using the WordPad application or whichever application the user configures as the Report Viewer in the Application window of the Configuration Options menu You can view the report and if required print the report using the standard File Print option in WordPad Printer The output will be sent directly to the printer defined in the Printer Config option of the Configuration menu Running the report Click on the Execute button to generate the report The Status field will display in plain language the current status of the application or error messages when the report is running Depending on your selection for the Output to option the report will be displayed on the Flex View screen or sent direct to the printer The Selective Alarm Print window will automatically close unless the tick is removed from the Close this dialog after successful operation check box 4 1 4 User
4. Address i Type in the IP address for the RealFlex server Double click on the Data port field The field will become active with a flashing cursor Type in the number for the data port Double click on the Dial up field click on the El button which appears to the right of this field and from the drop down list select a Dial Up Networking connection to required Internet Service Provider ISP online service or remote computer To edit an existing network connection Select Node 1 or Node 2 as required To edit the IP Address double click on the Address field and type in the new address To edit the Data port double click on the Data port field and type in the new number for the data port To edit the Dial Up connection double click on the Dial up field click on the x button which appears to the right of this field and from the drop down list select a Dial Up Networking connection to required Internet Service Provider ISP online service or remote computer To delete a network connection Select Node 1 or Node 2 as required In the Network interface configuration section click on and highlight the network connection to be deleted Click on the x button The network connection will be deleted The lt enter new gt and any other connections which were listed below will be moved up one position in the list To sort the order for network connections In the Network interface configuratio
5. The Display Poke selection will display the values of meter point sub fields as shown below E METER POINT 6 MA ES Bf METER POINT 6 e Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel A Page 64 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 3 1 6 Edit Database Providing a user has the appropriate user level access the Edit Database option will allow the user to access and edit certain fields available in the Database Editor Fields that cannot be edited are grayed out For description of fields in the Edit Database window please refer to Section 3 3 2 3 1 7 Information Tagging The Information Tagging provides the system operator a method to attach information associated with a particular point When Information Tag is selected from the Poke Point Menu the following window will appear amp Information Tagging Hid Tag Description RTO_1 TANK 2 CAPACITY Date Tagged 16 Dec 2003 15 17 51 Operator Name dema replake sensor Microsoft Windows look and feel af INFORMATION TAGGING SAVE CLEAR ROI TANE 1 LEVEL Date Tagged 15 Zap 23 desley Operator Name BETT replace sensor RealFlex4 look and feel The Information tagging window will display the PCU name tag name the date accessed and the operator login To enter information and apply tagging begin typing When the message is complete click on the Add button Page 65 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex Vi
6. The values in the Analog control window can be changed three ways 1 Click on the buttons to change the value in 1 increments 2 Click in the NEW field and type in the new value Page 70 of 249 MD 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 Click on and hold down the p slider button and slide left or right to adjust value Analog controls are available from both graphic displays and System PCU Summary screens Tag Control for Meters E METER CONTROL R METER POINT 1 The Meter Control window is similar in operation to the Analog Control window The values in the Meter Control window can be changed by clicking in the NEW field and typing in the new value Meter controls are available from both graphic displays and System PCU Summary screens Tag Control for Statuses m STATUS CONTROL ITU 4 LOS ZZ DIGITAL QUIPIT ZZ OFF ON The Status Control window facilitates sending control signals to the device associated with the status database point linked to the dynamic display To cause a value to be sent click on the on screen button for that value then click on the EXECUTE button After a field device control is issued the operator is notified either through an alarm or an event notification whether the device changes to the commanded state before control time out occurs Status controls are available from both graphic displays and System PCU Summary screens Page 71 of 249 A 500
7. gt Setting Output to You can choose where to send the report Options are Display The output is displayed on the Flex View screen using the WordPad application or whichever application the user configures as the Report Viewer in the Application window of the Configuration Options menu You can view the report and if required print the report using the Print option of your chosen Report Viewer After the report has been displayed on the Flex View screen you can save the report using the Save option of your chosen Report Viewer For a User defined report you can use the default file format as used by the Report Viewer or as a CSV format file by clicking on the Create report in CSV format check box A tick will appear when active A file saved in the CSV format can be opened in Microsoft Excel In Excel the information can be analysed more easily Printer The output will be sent directly to the printer defined in the Printer Config option of the Configuration menu Running the report Click on the Execute button to generate the report The Running Report window will appear providing you with details of the report execution in the Status field Running Report Mame D ally F lows ealFlex is executing the quer Elapsed time D min sec Depending on your selection for the Output to option the report will be displayed on the Flex View screen or sent direct to the p
8. z Main Menu z User Functions ce one Settings ha Zone Editor Advanced cancel toy Note You must be connected and logged onto the RealFlex server before you can set these options Restoring the last user Desktop Layout at logon For the Use the last user desktop layout at logon option click on the hd button and select required option from the drop down list Options are Disable When logging on you will need to open displays or Desktop Layout as required Enable When logging on and providing you saved your user profile when you last logged off your layout at the time of logging off will be recovered automatically Ask When logging on Flex View will ask you if you want to restore the Desktop layouts from your previous session Click on the Yes button to recover the layouts If you do not want to recover the saved layouts click on the No button gt Saving the user profile at logoff For the Save the user profile at logoff option click on the x button and select required option from the drop down list Options are Disable When logging off your user profile will not be saved Enable When logging off Flex View will save your user profile Page 221 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Ask When logging off Flex View will ask you if you want to save your user profile for the next session Click on the Yes button to save your user profile If you do not want to sa
9. 2 From the LOG MENU select LOGON or press F1 The USER ID pop up is displayed a USER ID ENTER USER ID ENTER PASSWORD Page 39 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 Enter your user ID in the ENTER USER ID field and your password in the ENTER PASSWORD field and press Return User ID s and passwords are not echoed to the screen while being entered Flex View will make contact with the RealFlex server to retrieve your User Profile If no error message appears the logon was successful The password associated with the logged on user remains active until that user logs off changes their password or another user logs on Notes 1 When a user is logging on for first time and the User must change password at next login option has been activated in their Security User Maintenance dialog box See Section 4 3 9 2 he she will be forced to change their password 2 When a users password has a lifetime period set a message will be displayed to give them a warning that their password will shortly expire If the user allows their password to expire they will not be allowed to logon The user will need to ask a member of the Administrators group to reset their password before they are allowed to log onto the system 3 Depending on the settings in the Security Settings dialog box See Section 4 3 9 2 a user may be restricted to the number of times and or have a defined time period
10. Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Tag name status 1 Units status 2 otatus 3 Setpoint Measured value Output setpoint Measured value Output In general a PID faceplate is used to monitor a controlled process and the elements of the subsystem controlling it For example the temperature of a boiler might be controlled by a thermostat which regulates the flow of fuel to the burners The PID display element affords operator control of the setpoint SP and output OU values as well as the mode of operation of the actual controller local remote manual auto panel workstation 2 2 6 7 Free Text Free text is a way of placing text on a display while in the Dynamic Builder Free text is not a dynamic and does not represent any defined database point 2 2 6 8 Gauge The Gauge Dynamic object represents a Analog Meter or Tank tag state in the form of a Gauge An example is shown below volts solar Panel Voltage The purpose of this dynamic display type is to reflect the current value of the datapoint indicated by the position of a pointer on a gauge The gauge may be scaled or unscaled as the implementor desires Limit sectors may also be displayed as a bar around the scale The bar is divided into colored segments that reflect the colors defined in the Database Editor A Page 55 of 249 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 2 6 9 Web page The Web Page Dynamic object links you to a predefined WEB pag
11. Main Menu Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can create a new zone or edit and delete an existing zone In the example shown below we have a Railway track that needs to be divided into three zones A B and C Page 215 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual fone A fone B fone Using the Zone Editor window three different zones will need to be created and defined For each zone you will need to select PCU s Tags and Displays associated with that zone using the Enable filtering and Enable zoning functions To create a new zone 1 Click on the Create button The Create Zone window will appear Create one Please type a title of new zone NewZond Cancel Bl A x Type in the title for the new zone maximum of thirty 30 alphanumeric characters including spaces then click on the OK button or exit by clicking on the Cancel button or the x in the upper right corner of the window The Connecting To Server pop up will appear for a short period while the new zone is being added to the RealFlex server Select and define the PCU s Tags and Displays to be associated with the new zone see To edit an existing zone below To edit an existing zone Click on the x button of the Edit zone field and select required zone from the drop down list The Enable filtering and Enable zoning fields may already be activated Enable Filt
12. RealFlex4 look and feel FAILED On ONLINE wart 3 Use the pop up window to perform the overwrite While manual overwrite is in effect applicable numeric value and digital state representations will be displayed in the color CYAN with a sign appended Digital symbol window dynamics as well as analog meter bar and tank symbol representations will merely reflect the CYAN coloration In all instances of points that have been manually overwritten updates reflecting field conditions will be suppressed Upon subsequent selection of a currently overwritten point the operator will be prompted for either a change of the current overwrite state value or for removal of the manual overwrite mode If removal is chosen the sign and cyan coloration will be removed and dynamic data point updates will once again reflect field conditions Page 63 of 249 M0 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Note Manual overwrite for any field concerning meters other than CURRENT NET or CURRENT GROSS will not appear to have the same characteristics as other database points The field s value will momentarily reflect the overwritten value and then if applicable begin to count changes as new delta counts are scanned Manual Overwrites of Tank Product Data Manual Overwrites can be performed on Tank Dynamic data in a System PCU Summary to provide Product Information as defined in the Product Editor or via L amp J Tank Gauging Interface A pr
13. enter new Automatically restore a connection trying every A seconds Back Cancel When you initially enter this window Network parameter settings are normally displayed for Node 1 Main To set Node 2 Standby settings click on the x button of the Edit settings for field and select Node 2 from the drop down list In the Network interface configuration fields enter the Address details Address Data Port and Dial up for the connection to the RealFlex QNX machine as shown below Double click on lt enter news or click on the se button The Address field will become active with a flashing cursor as shown below Type in the IP address for the RealFlex server Double click on the Data port field The field will become active with a flashing cursor Type in the number for the data port Double click on the Dial up field click on the El button which appears to the right of this field and from the drop down list select a Dial Up Networking connection to required Internet Service Provider ISP online service or remote computer 10 Click on the check box to the left of Automatically restore a connection A tick will appear when activated Enter a time interval in the trying every XX seconds field Either double click on and highlight the existing time and type in the new one or use the spinner buttons i to change the time May be set from 0 to 999 seconds default 5 seconds Page 14
14. gt To enable disable cursor control by the keyboard This option when activated allows the user to move the cursor by means of the keyboard If for some reason the mouse has become non operational a user may manipulate the cursor by means of the keyboard Click on the Enable cursor control by keyboard check box A tick will appear when activated A Page 194 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To move the cursor press and hold down the Ctrl key and press any of the arrow keys To play sound when a user massage is received This option when activated allows you to configure a pre recorded Wave sound which will be played whenever a user message is received 1 Click on the Play sound when a user massage received check box A tick will appear when activated and the Browse button to the right will become active 2 Click on the Browse button The Open dialog box appears 3 Look through the directories on your PC and select the required sound file files with a wav extension After all changes have been made to the Miscellaneous window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes 4 3 12 5 Environment window Configuration Options menu The Environment window as shown below allows you to choose and specify the language settings and to set up the User Interface look and feel for the Flex View Ma
15. menu Open Project option Project updating section There are two choices available 1 To automatically check for updates on the system click on the Check for update automatically check box A tick will appear when activated If this box is not checked you will have to manually check for updates via the Configuration menu Check for Updates option 2 If you want to update all components silently click on the Update all components silently check box A tick will appear when activated When this option is selected the user is not required to interact with the update process If this option is not selected normally used for diagnostic purposes then the user is presented with a window containing a list of updated components The user can then select required components for updating Page 187 of 249 MD l 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Main Window section There are two choices available 1 To allow the operator to minimize the main window click on the Allow to minimize check box A tick will appear when activated If this box is not checked the minimize button lor al will be disabled or removed from the Flex View Toolbar 2 To allow the operator to resize and move the main window click on the Allow to resize and move check box A tick will appear when activated To resize and move the Main Window please refer to Section 1 7 2 Tooltips section Tooltips can be display
16. 1 281 348 1038 Fax 1 201 346 2340 E mail salestecatactechnologies com Web www datactechnologies cam YI Page 12 of 249 f 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 2 Flex View Application window By default the Flex View Application window and its displays take on the appearance look and feel of any other Microsoft Windows program Users connected to a RealFlex4 server may switch to the RealFlex4 QNX look and feel as used in previous versions of Flex View by activating the Enable RealFlex4 look and feel for main window and displays check box in the Environment window from the Configuration Options menu See Section 4 3 12 5 1 2 1 For Microsoft Windows look and feel Along the top of the Flex View application window a Title Bar is displayed Below that Toolbar s are displayed 1 2 1 1 Title Bar b Flex iew DemoDublin3 El The Title Bar contains the name of the application and the name of the currently open Project On the right hand side of the Title Bar there are the following buttons El Minimize button If this button is grayed out then the Allow to minimize check box in the Main Window section of the Application window has not been activated and the operator will not be able to minimize the main Flex View window See Note below Al Restore button or ol Maximize button If these buttons are grayed out then the Allow to resize and move check box in the Main Window section
17. 5 METER_PRODUCT PROPANE_CMF PROPANE_SMF TP16 001 PROPANE_TEMP 0 0 Page 108 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 5 4 Status Point Definition 3 5 4 1 Status Tag properties Adding or deleting Tags can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Status Tag Properties window is used to provide RealFlex with the information it needs to monitor and display status digital input output scan points Status scan points typically represent two or four state indicators e g on off run stop invalid open closed travel etc Alarm states and alarm actions may also be defined for each status point as well as the colors and textual descriptions for displaying the point for each condition To access the Status Tag properties window Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window is displayed listing all PCU s on the system 2 From the Database Editor List of project PCU window double click on the required PCU The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 From the Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU wind
18. Allows a user to manually check for updates on the RealFlex system For details please refer to Section 4 3 4 Database Editor Allows a user to access and edit certain fields in the Database For details please refer to Section 3 3 Configuration File Editor Allows a Flex View user to access the Flex CFE program allowing them to create or edit RealFlex System configuration files You can also restart RealFlex on Node 1 or Node 2 and restart a CSL process For details please refer to Section 4 3 5 Historical Editor Allows for the addition modification and deletion of database points for historical recording as well as providing a summary of points currently in the historical record mode For details please refer to Section 4 3 6 Report Generator Allows a user to create a new report or edit an existing report file using the Flex Report application program For details please refer to Section 4 3 7 Send Flex Report File to the Server Allows a user to register new and edited Flex Report files on the RealFlex server For details please refer to Section 4 3 8 Password Maintenance Allows a user to add remove user ID s and control the password access to menu options For details please refer to Section 4 3 9 Desktop Layouts Allows a user to store a number of different desktop layouts and recall them as and when required For details please refer to Section 1 4 Printer Config Allows a user to configure the local prin
19. Click on the Insert Submenu Please enter a caption for the item Jew Cancel Type in the caption for the sub menu item This name will appear in the sub menu Click on the OK button You will be returned to the Main Menu window where the name of the sub menu will be displayed in the Edit menu button name field To return to the parent menu click on the Return to Parent Menu button To the right of a Menu button in the parent menu a F is displayed to show that a sub menu exists Add commands to a button or sub menu Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Page 206 of 249 MD 7 5000 0001 0040 E 2 3 4 de Flex View V3 1 Help Manual Click on the Insert Command button The Command Properties window will appear Command Properties Command A Description Menu tem caption w In the Command field click on the El button and select required command from the drop down list For details on how to set the commands available please refer to Section 4 3 12 16 Command Properties window After you have selected and set up required command click on the OK button You will be returned to the Main Menu where the name of the command will be displayed in the Edit menu button sub menu name field If required repeat steps 2 to 4 above to add additional commands
20. Event messages are generated in the Historical Alarm Event Summary and EVENT YYYYMMDD logs to document the issuance of all operator initiated control requests Page 68 of 249 y A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 3 2 1 For Microsoft Windows look and feel Tag Control for Analogs Tag Control Tag RTU_1 Al00 08 Description OUTFLOW TANK 2 Please enter new value for the point lts current value iz 2 16136 2 16136 ree The Tag Control window is used to transmit a numeric value to the remote unit associated with the analog database point There is no special alarm notification associated with controls sent to analog points however numerical displays of the value being controlled are displayed in white and a gt is appended to the display field until the associated control executed failed indication is confirmed by the I O driver The values in the Tag Control window can be changed three ways 1 Click on the l spinner buttons to change the value in 1 increments 2 Click in the value field and type in the new value 3 Click on and hold down the J slider button and slide left or right to adjust value Analog controls are available from both graphic displays and System PCU Summary screens Tag Control for Meters Tag Control A Tag RTU 1 MT_ 00 00 Description Please enter new value for subtype Gross lts current value is 40 cae The Tag Control window is sim
21. gadministrator Realflex Admininistrators 1 Group name administrator Description Realfles Admininistratars wt This window displays a list of user groups with an expandable collapsible hierarchy of users assigned to the group Group names with a symbol to the left of them can be expanded to show all users assigned to that group Clicking the symbol next to a Group name will collapse the item and hide the list of users If you are signed on as a member of any User group and access to this option has been disabled the following Password Maintenance window will be displayed Password Maintenance Mal Ea User ID User 1 User Mame Dave Wicks A This window will only display your assigned user group and your own User ID From this window you will only be able to view the access rights for your group or to change your own password By default the first time this window is accessed the Administrator group and the RF Administrator user is already configured It is recommended that this built in Administrator group and account should not be removed or disabled Page 174 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To select a user 1 Click on the symbol to the left of the group name to show the list of users assigned to that group 2 Move the pointer over the list of user names in the hierarchy The pointer will change to a hand and the selected user name will be underlined and c
22. 2 Select required option by clicking on its option box Choices are Use language setting for all products Allows you to choose the Flex Win default language The language shown grayed out in this field is as specified in the Default language used for all products field of the Translation Language Settings window within the Flex Language program If this option is not active the default language has not been defined in the Flex Language program Use product specific language Allows you to select a language setting for use with Flex View that has been produced using the Flex Language program and saved on your Windows PC To select a language click on the x button to the right of this field and choose required language from the drop down list The character set on your PC will change to the selected language For example if you have Spanish and English character sets installed on your PC you will be able to choose Spanish from the drop down list Now the character set used will be Spanish You are then able to construct a new menu or edit an existing menu in Spanish The same applies to all other aspects e g a new text box in a display will be in the Spanish character set Note The Flex Language program can be used to remotely set or override the Enable Flex Language support settings Advanced settings 1 Clicking on the i button will reveal the Apply the settings for current Windows user only ch
23. 2 667567 gt 97 34916 61 974 56 KBBBA 41 442 Microsoft Windows look and feel A Page 46 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual PAGE 1 OF 7 4 ANALOGS p TAG NAME POINT DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS a 515151515 A 39554686 gt 97 34916 61 974 RealFlex4 look and feel In the System Summary display database points are grouped by data type Analog Status Meter and Tank Alarmed points identified by a flashing state or value representation can be acknowledged while viewing the System PCU Summary screen the Ack Page button When the System PCU Summary for the selected PCU requires more than one page on screen Page Up and Page Down buttons provide circular scrolling through the pages Also on screen buttons are provided for stepping through the various PCUs the Next PCU and Prev PCU buttons or switching directly to another PCU of interest the Index button In this fashion all PCUs points defined in the RealFlex system can be expediently monitored See also Section 2 3 1 Dynamic Display Control Poke Points 2 2 2 Communications A facility for tracking the communications performance between the control software and the PLC RTU hardware is provided via the Communications Summary display RealFlex records and displays statistics for each PLC RTU defined in the system The Communications Summary display may be requested for viewing by clicking on the Main menu button selecting Re
24. BA Select Level When selected one of the following dialog boxes will appear Select Level Select Level Meter E Centimeter o Foot E Inch o Fraction o Millinneter o Cancel Cancel This allows the user to move anywhere in the table using the level to determine position English Metric lel Save Table Allows you to save any changes or additions to the current table X Delete Table Will delete the current table A Page 116 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual El Allows you to exit the Strap Table and return you to the Tank Tag Properties window Click on the fia Select Level button the Select Level dialog box will appear Select required Foot Inch and Fraction English or Meter Centimeter and Millimeter Metric then click on the Apply button This will allow you to move to the required level in the Strap Table window Click on the A Edit Level button When this button is pressed the entry will appear as Strap Table TEST 1 O00 O1 strp f Edit Level Bh Select Level Inches Fractions 0 0 16 0 1 16 0 0 El 0 ef lb 0 0 0 3416 0 0 Enter the volume information The Volume field can contain up to eight characters and one decimal place Once the volume information has been entered click on the ll Save Table button The strapping table will be saved and a message Table Tag name strp successfully saved will appear To edi
25. Click on the Enable Alarm printing check box A tick will appear when activated and the Print Alarm Page option in the Utilities menu becomes active With alarm printing enabled the Alarm printer section expands to display the following fields and buttons Alarm printer Type filtering M Acknowledge one filtering I Alarm f No zone filtering If Event C Apply active zone 4 Critical if Urgent C Apply selected zone Built in zone F The Alarm printer section of the Alarms window is divided into two areas Zone filtering and Type filtering M Returned to Normal If System events gt To configure the printer Click on the Printer config button The Alarm Printer Properties window will appear Alarm Printer Properties Al x Choose printer Browse Printer Printer name Samsung ML 1 200 Series Printer port LPT Printer diver painspool Print mode C Line by line printing f Page printing Font OF Lancel Apply The Alarm Printer Properties window is divided into two sections General and Print mode Page 202 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Alarm Printer Properties window General section 1 Select the printer where alarm reports are to be sent to by either clicking on the Use default printer option button this is the printer that is normally connected to your PC OR Clicking on the Choose pri
26. Click on the Yes button to remove the button or command or click on the No button to abort the operation Apply User buttons After all user buttons menus and sub menus have been defined 1 On the Main Menu window click on the Apply button to save your changes or Cancel to close window and not save changes The new button s will appear in the toolbar of the Flex View Base window Test your buttons and applications as required Page 208 of 249 y A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 11 User Functions Configuration Options menu Configuration of User Functions can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The User Functions window as shown below allows a user to write QNX applications and run them from within Flex View on a Windows PC For further details about creating User Functions QNX applications please refer to additional documentation User Functions API supplied on the Flex View installation CD Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For details on user level access please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance User Functions are executed via the Poke Points drop down menu See Section 2 3 1 Flex iew Options E Application User Functions H Sounds Colors Editing menu buttons Miscellaneous ba Environment Product Info ey aE A A gt e o Execu
27. Database types supported by the RealFlex system include Analog Status digital Meter accumulator and Tank Other points found in the database include pseudopoints which are points that are defined to act as accumulators for calculations on other points etc The SYSTEM PCU is used by RealFlex to control and report the status of CSLs optional Control Sequence Language processor Superkeys a Display Format dynamic type printers and hard drive utilization information The SYSTEM PCU should not be removed 3 2 Database Point Definition Overview Each database type has a customized screenform used for definition of unique tag names point descriptions and other pertinent information describing the operational characteristics of the database point The database types supported by RealFlex are Analog Meter Status and Tank Analog Scan points that record floating point data converted from a device reporting for example a range of 4 to 20 milliamps in raw counts Analog value ranges are defined for individual points by defining the appropriate engineering units being read from the field The maximum number of analog points supported is 32 000 Meter Used to track and report any type of cumulative measurement or quantity that can be expressed as an integer The maximum number of points supported is 32 000 Status Represent two or four state indicators e g on off high low set reset invalid open closed travel etc also called
28. Every month the Archive function adds your historical data to your new oldhdata file This file will always have a time span of three months or less This is very useful if you have large historical archives You can store all but the most recent historical data on the network and still have complete access to this data When a user does a historical request of two years on a particular point the data is retrieved from the smaller files that have been created and stored on the network as well as the information in the new oldhdata file To archive Historical data 1 From the Historical Data Point Maintenance window click on the a button The Historical Data Archiving dialog box will appear Page 163 of 249 MD 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Historical Data Archiving M Historical Archiving Time to Archive an 15 25 Archive Directory on the Server ane vrealflew data hist nea 2 Click on the Historical Archiving check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick 3 Inthe Time to Archive field set the time of day that you want to archive Either click on and highlight the portion of the time and type in the required time Shown in the format HH MM or click on and highlight the portion of the time and use the spinner buttons to select the required time 4 The default archive directory name on the RealFlex server is displayed in the field at
29. JOUKMal OT WAI ONG Errors adds 137 STC OU A A A A 204 208 A e 142 Oher users cureniy logged MIO a E as 23 ROMOVIN nia 142 A a a a auceniaad 142 FACSIOMING sonei a a a 142 Bes a aa A 151 UBT oe H a neem erste rece N N V E T ee era 186 Project Journal Utilities MON a A A A 137 Project window Configuration Options MeNU cccccccccncccnncccncnonnccnnnnnononononnnnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnonnnannnnnninns 198 Froperies DISplayS ai A A AA AAA AAA A cuuetiens 231 Scheduled Tepos nrnna A A E AS A eS 130 A A 68 79 A o deem sennenienebugcddael ideusacuueeantadedies maces caucecenaeiuonaestoeunt 96 Q ONX POC CIS ect curso o or O a a a tint one 221 WV ICO WV INA Gs iesene a a a a lada 28 QUIERAS VIC Wy rta 126 R o cig othe eta asa gee uaa A A alyeaceaecde lt teneeee 57 Raw value Analog tags ccccssssccccssseecceseeeccesseecseaseeecsaeeecsuseeeseasesecsaeeecseaseeessaseeessageeessaeeeeessaseeenes 96 RealFlex Database initiate procedure oocccccccccocccnccconcconcnononnnnnononannnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnns 221 A A A a eft idee ed a iecatadtles 139 Historical data MAINtENANCE ccccceeeccceccaeeeeeeeecaeeseeeecaueeseeeeeaeeeeeeesaeseeeesssaaeeeeesaaeeeesssaaeeeeeeessaaaes 154 Importing RealFlex6 project files ocoooconconccccconcnnnccnoncnncononancnnnonnnnnconnnnnnnncnnnnnnnancnnnonannnnnnnnss 146 RealFlex server Connected tO eee eecceeccecceeeceeceecueececeeececaeeceeca
30. Point descriptions may be entered in capital or lower case letters EU value Current value of scanned analog point This field cannot be edited from this screen it is only provided for informational purposes Units Ten character units of measure which describe the analog point in terms such as DegF PSI Lbs hour etc Unit descriptions may be entered in capital or lower case letters Point offset The value in this field tells the I O driver which item of data received from the PLC RTU is to be placed in this record Because the precise requirements depend upon the particular I O driver used to access the data for this point a general description of how to determine the point offset is not possible If this is a pseudopoint an unscanned point then 1 is entered in this field to tell the l O driver to ignore this datapoint A 2 value represents an output only value and is only updated when a control is issued for that database point Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Page 97 of 249 MA 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Aux address This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Subtype This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet
31. The user can then delete the original PCU Once the PCU has been added 3 Click on the Description field and enter a description for the PCU Can be a maximum of 20 characters including periods dashes and underscores 4 Click on the Address field and enter the PCU address 5 Click on the Channel field and enter the applicable channel number The PCU may be left inactive until the entire configuration process is complete The active state of the PCU may be changed at any time using the Edit PCU function 6 Click on the OK button The RealFlex database will be updated and you will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window where the new PCU will now be included in the list of PCU s 7 Create and define associated analog status meter and tank database points Page 85 of 249 y A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To Duplicate a PCU record The Duplicate PCU function is used to make a copy of an existing PCU and its associated tag points If you want to make multiple copies or overwrite existing PCU s with a copy of an existing PCU use the Replicate PCU function Prior to using this function ensure that all applicable data points to be copied have been defined and that all PCU records to which these are to be copied have also been defined 1 Click on and highlight the PCU to be copied ga 2 Click on the l button The Duplicate PCU dialog box will appear Duplicate
32. View V3 1 Helo Manual Set Time Span The Set Time Span option opens a time span window which allows the user to set both the start time and time span of the trend data Set Time Span Presets End Time 17 01 03 10 30 00 Span 0 days 1 hours po mir cos Microsoft Windows look and feel cf SET TIME SPAN PRESETS S END TIME 17 81 03 fi 00 0e SPAN a pays 1 Hours e MIN APPLY CANCEL RealFlex4 look and feel These values can be set by moving through the appropriate field with either the mouse or the Tab key and then changing the numbers by clicking on the spinner buttons using the Up and Down keys on the keypad or by entering the new number manually The Presets field El button will open a list of user definable time spans Current Hour Last Hour Yesterday Last Month and Year already set up By selecting an item from this list the user can change quickly between time spans without having to enter items by hand Reset Trend To return to the latest time interval right click within the trend axes and select Reset Trend from the Trend Mode menu that appears 2 2 7 2 Other Trend handling functions available Trend Display Panning To pan backward to examine a previous time span period place the cursor on the rightmost time label and click the select button Repeating this procedure will pan backward through the historical data until the point s life cycle st
33. at approximately 90 degrees west longitude hence local time lags UTC time by 6 hours 90 15 assuming Central Standard Time 5 hours in Central Daylight Time So if the universal time is 14 30 UTC United States Central Standard Time would be 8 30 am CST Page 225 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When a user selects the Set Server Time Date command from the Utilities menu in the Flex View application window they are presented with the Set Server Time Date dialog box Display field The Display field becomes active when selecting the Open Display command 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Display field The Select Display window will appear 2 Select the desired Display from the Select Display window which will list all defined graphic displays available for the project sorted alphabetically by name If all selections are not shown and the window is full use the or EIA buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the desired name Help file field The Help file field becomes active when selecting the Remote Modules Help command 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Help file field The Remote Modules Help window will appear 2 Select the desired Help file from the Remote Modules Help window which will list all help files available on the RealFlex QNX server sorted alphabetically by name If all selections are not s
34. button Shortcut Keypad F1 See also Section 4 2 6 Remote Modules Help from the Utilities menu Page 233 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Index csv files Microsoft Excel Comma delimited files ooooononnnnnnnnnnnncnonincnnnnnnnnnanananananano 89 120 130 154 twa tiles Flex Win Backup files iii adds 142 A PDOUU FIEX VIC W 2 O e 126 ACCESSING Address BOOK WINdOWiesittarinai ireland 134 Password control to Flex View features cooccoccoccoccocconcnncnncnnnnnnoncnnnoncnnnnnnonnnnnonconnnnnnnnnnnss 41 167 172 A Neem eit rice gr rR ere Oe te eer ee ee renee ere 137 ACAI AS 9 Restrictions to Flex VIEW features cece ceeceeceececceceeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeaeseeeeeeeeesenseeaeseesenaeeeesenness 167 172 PICK MOWICCG A IALIINS eiii 62 All unacknowledged alai mrien acces 49 UnackNOwledged NS coca cs 74 Action Processor data file records Analog lagS ooocccccccconcconcnononccnnononnconnnonnnnnnnnnononncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnns 96 AcliVate NOS ondaa lit 198 ACUSA INS ticas 44 49 109 ACUSE Alarms SUM Micra A aa a teas 74 Add Analog tad POIS css li 96 Commands to mMenu BUON Sinai dicas 204 208 Historical archive datan dsd 154 MERA o AAA A ORS neo OP Re Oe ee 204 208 Meter tag DOMNIS cani 100 POUS Database Eqn ia ad 83 84 O a a 142 nn ee a a eee 95 Scene dle Tepos a ias 129 Stat s tag A agence setantecsBestaabactansaduneevacs Act sasbassatennadeseesgantetearcauteawe
35. click on the Apply button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation If you selected Apply a message Point PCU name Tag name changed successfully will appear Click on the OK button to return to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window 4 3 6 4 To import export data points to a CSV file You can export and import lists of Historical data points to from a Microsoft Excel CSV file This is used by the system administrator to create a number of different data point groups for the collection of historical information Page 159 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual For example you may have a number of water treatment plants where you want to monitor the chlorine levels You would build up a list of the data points associated with the first plant then save the list to a CSV file You can then delete the first list of data points add the data points associated with the second plant then save this new list to a second CSV file Once you have built up a library of CSV files you can then imported each list of data points into the Historical Data Point Maintenance window as and when required Note When a point is exported all associated historical information is lost except for the last record If you want to save the recorded historical information before you export the point s copy retrieved data to the Clipboard then paste it into another application See To copy retrieved d
36. gt To change the Start End date or time Please refer to Section 1 7 13 Setting Date and Time fields Page 123 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Events section You may choose to print all events for a particular day or you may choose to print selected events Click on each check box to select option a tick will appear when selected Options are Acknowledge Prints all acknowledged alarms Alarm Prints all alarms Event Prints all events Critical Prints all critical alarms Urgent Prints all urgent alarms Returned to Normal Prints all alarms returned to normal System events Prints all system events List of PCU s section This field lists all defined PCU s You may select to print all PCU s or a selected set of PCU s A tick in the check box to the left of the PCU indicates that it has been selected To select All click on the button Conversely to de select all click on the E button To choose individual PCU s click on the check box to the left of the required PCU s to toggle between selected and unselected To invert the selection e change all selected to unselected and all unselected to selected click on the button Point Description section You can choose to print all points or you can choose to print a single point or range of points To print all points simply type an asterisk in the Point Description field To print details for a single point
37. is significant Zoom Both utilizes both the height and length of the rectangular area in its calculation of the trend Upon selection of a zoom option and zoom area a new time span will be calculated and the trend will be adjusted to reflect the data recorded during the interval identified The numerical value s on the description line under the graph is the current value of the data point being trended Note Trend display zooming is not possible for database points where historical data collection is not in place If historical data collection is in place for one or more of the data points in the graph zooming will be possible when the scale label for one of these traces is displayed When zooming is invoked the trace is lost for all points in the trend for which historical data collection is not in place Because each plotted point in a non zoomed trend may be an average of several points taken during a subinterval Zooming in on a smaller area may increase the precision of the plot It is possible to zoom in several times expanding the time scale or reducing the time until the best possible precision of one sample per second is obtained It is also possible to use panning with the scale expanded To zoom back out to full scale select the Undo Zoom option from the Trend Mode Menu Note Trends which are defined to utilize automatic scaling for all defined points cannot be zoomed Trend Options Depending upon the operator s preference y
38. pa Font 3 for dynamic layer Change heehee Font 4 for dynamic layer Change one Eaton Font 5 for dynamic l t i Advanced User Options a fia ni Menu Reset to Default Im mn OF Cancel Apply Font 1 controls the fonts used for the picture text objects Fonts 2 to 7 control the Font 0 5 levels used in all dynamic displays Dyn layer To change a font 1 Select the font option to be changed by clicking on its Change button The Font dialog box will appear 2 Choose required font and its properties then click on the OK button You will be returned to the Fonts options window where the new font will now be displayed 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to change any other fonts 4 Click on the Apply button gt To reset all fonts back to their default settings 1 Click on the Reset to Default button The default fonts will now be displayed 2 Click on the Apply button After all changes have been made to the Fonts window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes Page 204 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 10 Main Menu window Configuration Options menu Configuration of the Main Menu window can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Main menu window as shown below allows
39. times as you want You can also use this option to overwrite existing PCU s with a copy of the PCU being replicated Prior to using this function ensure that all applicable data points for the PCU to be replicated have been defined and that all PCU records to which these are to be copied have also been defined 1 Click on and highlight the PCU to be replicated 2 Click on the c button The PCU Replication PCU name dialog box will appear Page 86 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual PCU Replication RTU_ 1 PEU name MEE ATU 10 Use Y as wildcard to mark position where digits to be insert From o To jo Digits Active ON OFF Channel f Auto increment f ON State Address f Auto increment OFF State Settings i Overaite existing PCUs rea The top section of this window is used to set the names for the PCU s being created There are two other sections Settings and Active ON OF and an Overwrite existing PCU s check box 3 Inthe PCU name field the name of the PCU being replicated has been entered with a added to it Type in required name for the first PCU adding a at the end A preview for the first PCU is displayed to the right of this field Depending on what you set in the From To and Digits fields the is used as a wildcard to mark the position where digits are to be inserted Note A PCU name must be no longer than 12 chara
40. win xls If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the El buttons located in the upper left corner of the window will scroll the list one page up or down to the desired report gt To locate a specific report Click on the asterisk button and enter a text string to search for lIl kill For example if you wanted to locate all reports with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and press Enter The Select Flex Report File window will change to list only those reports containing xyz in the name You may also choose to simply type the name or first letters of a name from the keyboard A box will appear around the closest matching name gt To create a new report or edit an existing report To create a new report click on lt Create New Report gt To edit an existing report click on the required report name The Microsoft Excel application will automatically open A new menu option called Datac will be added to the Microsoft Excel menu bar The title bar will also change to display Microsoft Excel NewReport for a new report or Microsoft Excel report name for an existing report When creating a new report Flex Report initially starts in Edit mode When editing an existing report Flex Report initially starts in Work mode the Connecting To RealFlex Server dialog box will appear and Flex Report will attempt to connect to the Node 1 IP address for the Project When th
41. 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Import Project Wizard Project Information Enter project name path and specify project locale here Project settings Project name Project path C Program Files DATACProjects m Locale settings Project codepage Default 437 OEM United States Back Lancel 4 Inthe Project path field click on the En button to the right of this field The Browse for Folder dialog box will appear 5 Choose the directory path you wish to store the new project files By default all Project files are store in the C Program Files DATAC Projects directory You will be returned to the Import Project Wizard window where the project path for the new project will now be displayed on the Project path field 6 Inthe Project name field enter a name for the Project As you enter the project name the name will be added to the directory path in the Project path field 7 Inthe Project codepage field click on the x button to the right of this field and select required language from the drop down list 8 Click on the Next gt button The Import Project Wizard Remote Server IP window will appear Page 148 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E 9 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Import Project Wizard Remote Server IP Configure server nodes address es and port here Edit settings hor e Enable Node Network interface configuration
42. 13320 fad Taos 13 37 29 269 13 37 31 1109 13 37 32 9993 13 37 34 593 13 37 36 5195 laa Zo 13340 703 1341 306 Tada 65 Tada oe Tard arD Page 161 of 249 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Across the top of this window you have the following fields and buttons Start The Start entry consists of two fields The first field specifies the date and the second field specifies the time These two fields are used to designate the time span of the records to be viewed beginning with the date and time designated in these fields and ending with the current time When opening this window the current time is displayed in these fields Execute Used to extract historical data values collected over the time span defined for the point Edit Add Used when there is a malfunction in the system or a genuine misrepresentation of data For example if you have an RTU monitoring a reservoir level over a period of a week and for some reason it was turned off for one day you would get a reading of zero for the level on that day When a graph for the week is produced you can see that there is an obvious error The average is also severely effected To correct the graph and average reading you can edit the value of zero or enter a correct reading average reading in its place Close This will exit the View utility and return you to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window gt To view data values 1 In the Start Date and Tim
43. 190 Sn A E ee eee 190 Username Danner nrsiskdsroin e gels 191 BaCk p Pro isa 142 Jo A A 112 Sutton ARO command S dai 204 208 C Change Commands to MENU buttons occccccccccncnnccccnnnnnnncnancnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnos 204 208 GOMMUNICATONS scan Status in 47 Dale MS ol cd 28 35 MentDU TON Sci a 204 208 POUS Database Edi da 84 Ollie yate red Ss aa 57 TanistapbingiablO in ia 115 meme Sandia 28 35 os a 219 User ID amd aCCeSS IG Ss 167 172 USC DAS SOS o a date a 172 dE A 212 Page 235 of 249 ii 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Change password OnlOG Mi ds 39 Channels Configuration file driver chN file co ooooconnncnoncccnonononnnnnnnccnonononccnnnnnononanncnnnnnnnononananennnns 92 Gheck tor proJectupld ales asin did 151 Seea a ually eehesas seen a tecteetuaates 186 GlipbOard GODVING DIS play S aenn a a a a a 50 Copying Summary INfOrMatiON coooccnnccnnncccncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnnnnss 72 119 Close button Flex View application WINdOW cccccccccccccncccnnnccncnnonnncnnnonononanncnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnnannnennnoss 13 ClOSING WINGOW AN 28 31 SOAS Tani tl O36 ae O IP E ET 153 Colors window Configuration Options MeNU ooonccnnncccccccconncnnnnccnnononnncnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 190 Column width AdjUSIMENT ooocccccccccnnnnnnccconncnnnnononncnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
44. 5 6 7 8 9 Symbols all printable characters not 1 amp _ H Ehl J i s lt gt defined as letters or numerals Have at least one symbol character in the second through sixth positions Be significantly different from prior passwords Not contain your name or user name Not be a common word or name Passwords can be the weakest link in a systems security scheme Strong passwords are important because password cracking tools continue to improve and the computers used to crack passwords are more powerful Network passwords that once took weeks to break can now be broken in hours Page 184 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Password cracking software uses one of three approaches intelligent guessing dictionary attacks and automation that tries every possible combination of characters Given enough time the automated method can crack any password However it still can take months to crack a strong password RealFlex passwords can be up to 10 characters long Standard security or 25 characters long Enhanced security 4 3 10 Printer Config The Print Config option from the Configuration menu allows you to configure your printer This command presents a Print Setup dialog box where you may specify the destination printer the range of pages to be printed the number of copies and other printer setup options 4 3 11 Desktop Layouts For details on Desktop Layouts please refer to Sec
45. 5000 000 1 0040 E Feet Meterz Inches Centi Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 When adding a new Tag enter a Tag name Tag description and values for each parameter as required When editing an existing Tag edit fields as required by overwriting the existing value for each parameter The Tag Properties window may also be accessed for editing via the Edit Database option of the Dynamic Display Control Poke Points menu Tag properties can only be edited by Flex View users with appropriate user level access The significance of each field in the display is Tag description Twenty character Short and forty five character Extended free format description of the tank point Point descriptions may be entered in capital or lower case letters Units Ten character units of measure which describes the tank point in terms such as BBLS GALS etc Point offset The value in this field tells the I O driver which item of data received from the PLC RTU is to be placed in this record Because the precise requirements depend upon the particular I O driver used to access the data a general description of how to determine the point offset is not possible If this is a pseudopoint an unscanned point then 1 is entered in this field to tell the I O driver to ignore this datapoint A 2 value represents an output only value and is only updated when a control is issued for that database point Refer to I O driver document
46. AA AAA AAA 100 Z Zone Editor window Configuration Options MENU ooooocccnnccccnccnnncnnnnncnonnnnannnnnnnnnnonanennnnnnnonnnannennns 214 Zone Settings window Configuration Options MeNU cccccnccccccconnccnnnncnonononnnnnnnnnnnononennnnnononnnannennnnnss 212 Zones shared with other logged ON users oocccccccccnccccccnnccconnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnonannnnonancnnonannnnnnnos 23 41 191 ZOOMIN E eee ahaa 28 30 ZOOMING Tacto ro ral DIV Sra tn 231 Page 249 of 249 MD 5000 000 1 0040 E
47. Clicking on this button will display the Microsoft Outlook Express Properties window allowing you to add new contacts to the currently selected Identity folder For information on how to use this window please refer to the Microsoft Outlook Express Help documentation Properties button Clicking on this button will display the Microsoft Outlook Express Contact name Properties window allowing you to edit details for the selected contact name For information on how to use this window please refer to the Microsoft Outlook Express Help documentation The Message Recipients field on the right hand side of this window list all contact names selected to receive the report gt To select recipients for the report 1 Select required Identity folder and from the list of contact names click on and highlight required contact name OR Find required contact name via the Find field Page 136 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Click on the button The selected contact name will be added to the Message Recipients field 3 If required repeat Steps 1 and 2 above to add additional contact names to the Message Recipients field gt To remove a contact name from the Message Recipients field 1 Inthe Message Recipients field click on and highlight the name to be removed 2 Press the Delete key After you have selected your recipients click on the OK button You will be returned to the E Mail S
48. Ctrl X When deleting buttons commands or separators a window is displayed asking you for confirmation Click on the Yes button to remove the button or command or click on the No button to abort the operation Apply User Functions After all user menus and sub menus have been defined 1 On the User Functions window click on the Apply button to save your changes or Cancel to close window and not save changes An Execute User Functions option will be added to the Poke Points drop down menu allowing the Flex View user to execute configured User Functions 2 Test your menu items and commands as required 4 3 12 12 Zone Settings window Configuration Options menu Configuration of the Zone Settings window can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Zone Settings window as shown below is used to define the zone accessing and control rights for each user Zones are defined via the Configuration Options Zone Editor window Flex iew Options E Application Zone settings H Sounds BN Colors Edit settings for user Default a Pak sele els aar locally and used when no Miscellaneous one logged on a a Assigned zones U ptions f Product Info l Project Fone name ogo amp To Select as Control Zone be Alarms ilt i pe PONES elect only one zone at a time Font Select onl tat 3 Main Menu Mem 2ane from Main Me
49. E 16 FOSIZING ANG MOVING WINDOWS canini A LAND AA AAA 28 29 Restat Reale Procedu Enica A eds iets ees 221 RESO DUO Na A AA EA AAC ACA ES ALA EE IA AS 13 Detaultdesktop layout alo O Mimo a DA A A Ree ee 220 Display Desktop layoutoOn Orsini lirio ironia 220 A na aceucenn sed ea a aa aaa 198 OIE E PE EE EEE tia disparo A E 142 Ret m to norma alarn COMM OMS ssri r a a ici lion Tea 49 A a E a a a sdkatcoatausemsicesiankeaes 172 Rmax AMMAN AGS enee EEN AE loli ea 96 A a a agar tages sateen 44 96 MADEC PNT alg LAGS eoe N 96 NUT CAM ALOG NAGS ro ri Eo O OO 96 TYDE AN lOO AGS ks nae OPe E TE 96 E Ro A A 100 Rows Gount WMirtual OCreenS rss oe soeccousteysduatenens 16 RRA AMANO GAG S ura a 96 RUNNING oae eB arava tebarigerneGaam nen su uaduire ba taciair 16 2ataeatdoecaulen cena E E mead e ENE 9 FIEX RODOM Si iii 120 LOCO AM adi s 221 MICTOSO MM VVIMGOWS Pri tdo 9 Predelned TE DONS dadas 120 Remote Procedure siii ti die 221 Reports on a timed basis usd diria rd llorado 129 User defined repo erona a a E AA Ea Aa AE 120 S Sd A E A E 20 Display Desktop lay Out om NOG OM icenen dia 220 scheduled reposo Milica alee es ama Pees one 130 User Repos in Cvs TOMA od 120 Page 245 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual gave S CSV Tle CiglOG DO ida 89 Schedule Reports on a timed DaSIS snis a a 129 Scheduled Report Properties WINdOW ccccccsssssecccceeeeeeesseeceeeeeeeaeesseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeaeeeee
50. Editor Advanced El User Options Main Menu Color palette mode for 256 calore video model f Best quality for top display may be flickering when switching displays f Average quality for all displays no flickering OF Cancel Apply The Colors window is divided into two sections Color preferences and Color palette mode Note The Color palette mode section is grayed out and cannot be edited from this window Color preferences section The default colors used for display backgrounds are as shown in the table below Summaries Dark Gray You can change the background color for each type of display gt To change the background color 1 Click on required button A pop up pallet of standard colors will be displayed 2 Click on the required color The selected color will now be displayed on the button top OR Page 191 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual If you do not want to use any of the standard colors you may choose a custom color 1 Click on required button A pop up palette of standard colors will be displayed 2 Click on Other at the bottom of the pop up palette The Microsoft Windows Color dialog box will be displayed where you can now define your custom color 3 After you have defined the color required click on OK The selected color will now be displayed on the button top gt To return the colors to the default settings Click on the Reset to Default but
51. Enter a password in the Password field then re enter the password in the Confirm password field Passwords are not echoed to the screen while being entered See also Section 4 3 9 4 Creating Strong Passwords Passwords can be case sensitive so if you vary the capitalization when you assign the password users must type the same capitalization when they enter the password Note The complexity of the password i e minimum number of characters the use of case sensitive characters etc is defined in the Security Settings dialog box In the bottom half of this dialog box select required user security options For details please refer to Section 4 3 9 3 Click on the Apply button Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to add the new user account in the RealFlex database You will be returned to the Password Maintenance window where the new user ID and name will have been added to the selected group Page 178 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To remove a user account Click on and highlight the user name to be deleted then click on the EJ button A message Are you sure you want to permanently delete user User ID and name will appear Click on the OK button to confirm deletion of the User ID or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation The built in Administrator account should not be removed gt To change a user ID 1 Click on and highlight the user nam
52. Logon Logoff For details on User Logon Logoff please refer to Section 1 8 Page 125 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 1 5 About Flex View Selecting About Flex View from the Main menu will display Flex View program information similar to the display below Use this command to display information about the Flex View software you are using such as software version number and build number licence type Development or Runtime registration ID and copyright This information can be given to the support engineer in the event of a problem with Flex View Flex view 3 1 Build 6 1 1 43 Development Reg ID 356F BLOT F56B Y Bx Copyright 1999 004 DATAC Technologies Ltd 2001 North Park Drive Suite 200 Kingwood TEMAS 22339 LISA Tel 1 281 348 1038 Fax 1 281 348 2340 E mail salestodatactechnologies com Web www datactechnologqles corm From the About Flex View window you can visit the Datac WEB site or send an e mail to the Datac Sales department to enquire about other Datac or Flex Win products To send our Sales department an e mail 1 Click on the sales datac technologies com hyperlink Your e mail application will be opened where the Datac contact address will be entered automatically 2 Type in your query or request and send the e mail to us in the normal way gt To visit the Datac Technologies Limited WEB site Click on the www datac technologies com hyperlink
53. Maintenance window contains all points currently designated for historical data collection listed by PCU name database type Analog Meter or Status and tag name To access the Historical Data Point Maintenance window Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance From the Configuration menu click on the Historical Editor option The Historical Data Point Maintenance window will be displayed Historical Data Point Maintenance JO E List of historical points ag E o 1 ANALOG Al OO _O1 ON TETE 1 Q0000 RTU 1 ANALOG AI oo 02 ON 1 Week s 1 00000 RTU_1 ANALOG 41 OO_US Cat 1 Day s 100000 RTU 1 ANALOG AI oo 04 ON 1 Dais 1 00000 RTU_1 AMALE Al 00_05 Cah 1 Dayts 1 00000 RTU 4 Meter Year NEXT SCAN ON 1 Week s 1 00000 RTU_1 Meter Month ME T_5CAN Ch 1 Weekls 1 00000 RTU_1 Meter Day NEXT SCAN ON 1 Week s 1 00000 RTU_1 Meter Hour NEST SCah OM 1 weekis 1 00000 RTU_1 Meter Met WEST SCAN Cah 1 Weekls 1 00000 hd Total points count 29 wt When this window is first opened there are no data points displayed Data points must be added or imported to this window before historical recording can take place When opening this window after data points have been added in the left hand field of the Status bar a message Receiving list of historical points will be displayed as
54. Manual 1 7 Using Flex View Windows Flex View uses both the standard Microsoft Windows and the RealFlex4 QNX open look standard In general the operator will not need to Know more than the basics of the Microsoft Windows and QNX open look standards and will need to know very little concerning the characteristics of the windows themselves However the operator should be aware of a few capabilities that the Microsoft and QNX windowing software affords within the Flex View operator environment 1 7 1 Displays Flex View displays are dynamic representations developed by the system implementor to depict the system s application parameters and or station schematics As many of these displays may be built as are needed limited only by hard disk space and user friendly techniques are provided for accessing the displays and switching from one display to another While in realtime display mode user defined graphic displays may be recalled for viewing by four mechanisms 1 Via the Select Displays window which is accessible through the Displays menu 2 Via Display Links 3 Via the Virtual Screens window 4 Viathe Desktop Layouts window If you wish to send a particular display to the back of the workspace to uncover other windows that may be behind it click on the To Back on screen button Note Although you may have more than one display opened at a time there is a maximum memory allocation set for Displays When the maximum
55. PCU Please toe a name of new PCU LE ATU 1 Cancel 3 The name of the PCU being copied will appear in the Please type a name of new PCU field Type over this name entering a name for the new PCU maximum of 12 characters including periods dashes and underscores then click on the OK button You will be prompted to confirm the duplication of the PCU with a Yes No selection If you entered a PCU name that already exists a message will appear This PCU already exists if so click on the OK button and enter new name once more The RealFlex database will be updated and you will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window where the new PCU will now be included in the list of PCU s Note If you have elected to use the Duplicate PCU function to rename a PCU all dynamics placed in graphic displays and any historical recording in effect for the copied deleted database points will be removed and are not recoverable To Replicate a PCU record The Replicate PCU function is an advance version of the Duplicate PCU function and is used to make multiple copies of an existing PCU and its associated tag points You may have many identical PCU s RTU s where the only difference is the address of the units This function allows you to create your database with the minimum of effort For example you would create the database for one PCU and then using the Replicate PCU function to copy it as many
56. RealFlex with the information it needs to monitor and display tank scan points Tank points listed on this window are described by unique tag name description units conversions alarms and current values gt To access the Tank Tag properties window Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window is displayed listing all PCU s on the system 2 From the Database Editor List of project PCU window double click on the required PCU The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 From the Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window either double click on the required tank point or click on and highlight required tank point then click on the button The Tag Properties window will appear Type TANK cu TEST Tag name TN_0O0_00 44 4 a E Tag description Short TANK 1 Extended Ue BARRELS eye Feet Meters E Point offset lnches Cent E Subtype Level conversion type E Max volume 78500 00 Fractions per inch le Edit strapping table Limits o fm o Mm o Mm oo o fm o Mm o fm oo Alarm Color ul m Page 112 of 249 A 7
57. Report Generator option from the Configuration menu Manual overwrite To manually correct the value or state of the database point associated with the poke point Alarm disable To disable alarming for a selected point Exit FlexView The Exit Flex View option from the Main menu To exit the Password Maintenance window click on the x button in the top right hand corner of the window 4 3 9 3 Security User Maintenance options When using the Password Maintenance window and you choose to add or change a User account you are presented with a Security User Maintenance dialog box In the bottom half of this dialog box there are a number of user security options that can be selected as shown below User must change password at nest logon User cannot change password Password never expires User is disabled User is locked out Cancel To select an option Click on required check box es to toggle between active and non active A tick will appear when active Page 183 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Choices are User must change password at next login When active the user is forced to change the password the first time they logon When the administrator adds a new user account to a group a temporary password is assigned for that user When the user logs on for the first time he she will be forced to change the password User cannot change password When active the use
58. Tagged and Information Tagged data summary reports See Section 2 4 1 Print Alarm Page Used to print the contents of the Alarm page See Section 4 2 3 Page 77 of 249 he f 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Page 78 of 249 A 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 Database Implementation 3 1 Database Implementation Overview The Flex View Database Editor allows the user to define the information necessary for polling points which have been defined in a physical Remote Terminal Unit RTU or Programmable Logic Controller PLC device A PCU Process Control Unit in the Flex View Database Editor represents the user s logical breakdown of the items which are being monitored or controlled in the field by each individual PLC or RTU The user can define any number of PCUs necessary It is possible for one PLC or RTU to report information to multiple PCUs If a point in a PCU has been configured to communicate with different PLCs or RTUs the communication with these devices cannot occur simultaneously The points defined in the physical device PLC RTU may include pressure values status of valves open closed status of generators or meter accumulation points The database consists primarily of points identified by tag name and textual description that are scanned from the user s field devices PLC RTU These scan points are categorized in the database by data type RealFlex supports 32 000 points per database type
59. User ID is the label that identifies you to RealFlex and it is used publicly in many places in the system RealFlex employs two different systems of applying user and password security Standard security Default allows User IDs to be added changed or removed from the system and to allow certain Flex View options to be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password for each user Enhanced security allows User Groups and User IDs to be added changed or removed from the system and to allow certain Flex View options to be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password at a user group level Note The Enhanced security system was introduced as an option for systems using the RealFlex4 31l software in combination with the Flex Serv V8 23 application software User logon logoff activities are recorded as events in the Historical Alarm Event Summary These events in turn can be used for retracing problems and or responsibilities Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can log on 1 8 1 User Logon Logoff Standard security System operators completing their work shift or otherwise leaving their console unattended should Log off from the RealFlex server Similarly operators just starting a work shift or returning to an unattended console should Log on 1 8 1 1 To log onto the RealFlex server For Microsoft Windows look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Logon Logoff option The User L
60. Virtual Screens For details on how this window is used please refer to Section 1 3 Virtual Screens gt To enable disable Desktop Layouts Click on the Enable Desktop Layouts check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick This option allows each user to define the way their display layouts are saved and restored between sessions See Section 4 3 12 15 User Options topic for details Enabling the Enable Desktop Layouts option activates the Desktop Layouts menu option in the Configuration menu It will also activate the Show Desktop Layouts window option displayed below the Enable Desktop Layouts option Clicking on this check box and then the Apply button will display the Desktop Layout window as shown below in the Flex View application window Desktop Layout x This window allows you to store a number of different desktop layouts and recall them as and when required For details on how this window is used please refer to Section 1 4 Desktop Layouts To hide unavailable commands in the menus lf a user has been denied access to a Flex View option in the Password Maintenance window you can choose to hide the command in the menu list Click on the Hide unavailable commands in the main menu check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick If this option is disabled any Access disabled option will be grayed out in the appropriate menu list
61. Your WEB browser will be opened and the Datac WEB site will be dialled 4 1 6 Exit Flex View The Exit Flex View option from the Main menu allows the user to make a graceful exit from Flex View shutting down all associated tasks Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance To exit Flex View For Microsoft Windows look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the Exit Flex View option The Quit Flex View pop up is displayed A Page 126 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Flex View E4 CP Quit Flex View 2 To cancel the exit process select No to proceed and exit select Yes Note Alternative methods of exiting the Flex View program are Right click on the application s Control menu button y or on the Les view icon in the Taskbar and select Close from the pop up menu Double click the application s Control menu button Click the x button on the right hand side of the title bar With the Flex View application window active key Alt F4 For RealFlex4 look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the Exit Flex View option The Quit Flex View pop up is displayed Quit Flex Vieu E TES NO 2 To cancel the exit process select NO to proceed and exit select YES Note Alternative methods of exiting the Flex View program are Right click
62. a predefined period of time 1 Click on the Automatically lock application after this period in minutes check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick Page 192 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual a 2 Set the time period by clicking on the i spinner buttons in the field to the right May be set from 1 to 1 000 minutes When this option is enabled the message Application was locked as defined time interval elapsed will appear after the set time has elapsed To unlock the application click on the OK button Depending on the setting of the Allow logging off to unlock application option the user will be presented with one of two dialog boxes With Allow logging off to unlock application disabled User ID USER ID Enter User ID ENTER USER ID Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel Here only the currently logged on user can unlock the application by entering their User ID With Allow logging off to unlock application enabled Unlock Application Unlock Application Enter User ID ENTER USER ID Ok LOGOFF OK LOGOFF Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel This allows the system to be accessible to any user even if the application has been locked A user is given two choices they can unlock the application by entering their User ID then clicking on the OK button or a different user may log off the user
63. and highlight required user name then click on the a button The following Change Password dialog box will appear Hew Password Confirm Hew Password 2 Enter a new password in the New Password field then re enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field Passwords are not echoed to the screen while being entered See also Section 4 3 9 4 Creating Strong Passwords Passwords can be case sensitive so if you vary the capitalization when you assign the password users must type the same capitalization when they enter the password The complexity of the password i e minimum number of characters the use of case sensitive characters etc is defined in the Security Settings dialog box 3 Click on the Apply button Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to change the User password in the RealFlex database The new password will now be active for the selected user To change your own user password 1 Click on and highlight your own user name then click on the es button The following Change Password dialog box will appear Old Password Mew Password Contirm New Password 2 Inthe Old Password field enter your existing password 3 Enter a new password in the New Password field then re enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field Passwords are not echoed to the screen while being entered See also Section 4 3 9 4 Creating Strong Passwords
64. and select the required application command batch file etc After all changes have been made to the Application window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes Page 188 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 2 Sounds window Configuration Options menu The Sounds window as shown below allows you to enable disable audible alarms enable disable audible alarm until all alarms have been acknowledged and choose the sound used for the Critical Urgent Ordinary and RealFlex unavailable alarms Flex iew Options E Application Sounds Sounds Colors W Enable alarm sound M Audible alarm until all alarms acknowledged Miscellaneous E Environment Edit sound settings for los erver Unavailable alarm Product Info El Project Take sound from the following file Alarms o Fonts i Main Menu Generatetone oftempe 150 msec and freg 900 Hz User Functions done Settings Don t play sound for the alarm Zone Editor oo Advanced l User Options Main Menu caos em gt To enable disable audible alarms Click on the Enable alarm sound check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick Note that once disabled the audible alarm is no longer generated when a new alarm occurs Normally the audible alarm is disabled
65. button For RealFlex4 look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Login Logoff option The LOG MENU pop up is displayed il LOG MENU Fi LOGON F2 LOGOFF Page 38 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 From the LOG MENU select LOGOFF or press F2 Flex View will make contact with the RealFlex server to save your User Profile and log you off the system 1 8 2 User Logon Logoff Enhanced security System operators completing their work shift or otherwise leaving their console unattended should Log off from the RealFlex server Similarly operators just starting a work shift or returning to an unattended console should Log on 1 8 2 1 To log onto the RealFlex server For Microsoft Windows look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Logon Logoff option The User Logon Logoff dialog box is displayed User Logon Logoff E No one curently logged on for this node E Eog wti Close 2 Click on the Log On button The User ID pop up is displayed Enter user ID Enter password 3 Enter your user ID in the Enter user ID field and your password in the Enter password field and press Return User ID s and password are not echoed to the screen while being entered For RealFlex4 look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Logon Logoff option The LOG MENU pop up is displayed E LOG MENU Fi LOGON F2 LOGOFF
66. capturing data values or information at a specific point in time The Configuration Menu This menu contains the Open Project Connect to Server Disconnect Check for Updates Database Editor Configuration File Editor Historical Editor Report Generator Send Flex Report File to the Server Password Maintenance Desktop Layouts and Printer Configuration functions From this menu you can also access the Flex View Application program start up and system configuration options The Displays Menu This menu provides access to graphic representations of plant processes or field data as designed by the system implementor using the Bitmap or Flex Builder display builders Page 11 of 249 he f 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 1 Starting the Flex View program To start Flex View Double click on the Flex View icon on your Desktop OR Open a specific Project in Flex View using the Flex Start program For details please refer to the Flex Start Help documentation OR 1 Click on the Astar button 2 Select Programs then Flex View then click on Flex View OR From Windows Explorer double click on the Flexview exe file in the C Program Files Datac Flex View directory The welcome screen will appear for an instant Flex View 3 1 Build 8 1 1 43 Development Reg ID 3S56F BLOT F56B YBx2 Copyright 1999 004 DATAL Technologies Ltd 2001 North Park Orire Suite 200 Kingwood TEXAS 22339 USA Tel
67. desired size then release the button 3 Move the window by clicking on an open area of the Title Bar and drag the window to the required position in the screen Once you have changed the size or location of a window you may want that window to always appear as you have set it Right click on the open window and select Properties from the pop up menu When the Display Properties or Summary Properties window appears select Save Page 29 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Method 2 Resize or move a display via the Display Properties window see Section 4 4 2 or resize or move a summary window via the Summary Properties window see Section 2 4 4 1 7 4 Panning and Zooming within displays Zooming gt To zoom in on a display There are three ways in which you can zoom in 1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key the pointer turns into a magnifying glass Drag a box around the area you want to zoom in to see The larger the box the more you see of the page so the less you are zoomed in The smaller the box the less you see of the page so the more you are zoomed in 2 Position the pointer in the centre of the area you want to zoom into right click and select Zoom In from the pop up menu 3 Press and hold down the Ctrl key the pointer turns into a magnifying glass Clicking the left mouse button reduces the view The new view is centered wherever you click With methods 2 and 3 abov
68. digital I O points The maximum number of status points supported is 32 000 Page 79 of 249 h 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Tank Used to store a variety of information regarding the contents of tanks Current data is not available on database edit screens as is the case with other database point types but appears in standard reports and can be used in custom reports and Display Format dynamic displays The information supplied by the user during database implementation relates to the level of the product in the tank and alarming for low and high levels The maximum number of tank points supported is 32 000 Pseudopoints By placing the appropriate entries in Analog Meter Status or Tank database records pseudopoints can be created One type of pseudopoint is created by placing 1 in the POINT OFFSET field This causes the I O driver associated with the PCU to which the point belongs to ignore the point for input purposes This point can be used to store and display calculated or operator supplied values Some pseudopoints contain a 99 in the EU TYPE or CONTROL TYPE field An EU TYPE of 99 will disable the scaling option of MIN MAX EU A CONTROL TYPE of 99 when used in conjunction with a 2 point offset identified to the I O driver that there is no hardware associated with the point and that when a control is sent to the point only the database value is changed A 2 value is an unscanned control point which represen
69. disabled the user will not be able to see this function or it may be grayed out in the Flex View menus When a Dynamic Display Control function is disabled the following message will be displayed when the user tries to access the function 1 Unauthorized operation In order to maintain system security the System Administrator will need to disable access to the Edit password file function for all users If you want to use the same user access control for all the Flex View functions click on the For All button If you select Need password the Password and Confirm password fields will become active as shown below Page 172 of 249 M0 l 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Change Access for Database builder Access without password Password Confirm password Access disabled Click For All button if you want apply one access type For All for all functions Enter a password in the Password field then re enter the password in the Confirm password field Maximum of ten 10 alphanumeric characters without spaces The password will not be echoed to the screen while being entered When you enter or change a password write it down and keep it in a secure place and tell only the designated user the password 3 After selecting required access option click on the Apply button or click on the Close button if you do not want to make any changes You will be returned
70. falls to 10 and no alarm is generated Value rises to 30 1 and a Return to Normal alarm is generated Value falls to 18 and another alarm is generated Controllable The user can left click on the analog value on the System Summary window or any display showing this analog and set a new value for this analog i e it becomes an analog control In the Limits section of the window HIHI Decimal value 999999 0 gt 9999999 0 in engineering units which represents a high high alarm limit for the referenced analog data point When the actual value reaches or exceeds the high high limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm HI Decimal value 999999 0 gt 9999999 0 in engineering units which represents a high alarm limit for the referenced analog data point When the actual value reaches or exceeds the high limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm LO Decimal value 999999 0 gt 9999999 0 in engineering units which represents a low alarm limit for the referenced analog data point When the actual value reaches or falls below the low limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm LOLO Decimal value 999999 0 gt 9999999 0 in engineering units which represents a low low alarm limit for the referenced analog data point When the actual value reaches or falls below the low low limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Page 99 of 249 he I 5
71. for your hardware EU type Engineering units EU conversion type 0 No Conversion Required 1 Linear Extrapolation General y ax b RealFlex E Emax Emin Rmax Rmin R Rmin Emin where E is the engineering unit value and R is the raw value input 2 Square root extrapolation General y2 ax E R Rmin Emax Emin Emin Fmax Amin RealFlex 99 Internal pseudopoint Other 0 1 2 and 99 are generally applicable however other values are required by specific I O drivers under certain circumstances Please consult your I O Driver documentation for further details Raw value The raw count value accepted from the field device Decimal value 32768 gt 32767 Min raw Minimum valid raw count value accepted from the field device Decimal value 32768 gt 32767 Not applicable for EU TYPE 0 10 20 30 or 99 For example if 16 bit positive values are passed this value would typically be 0 Max raw Maximum valid raw count value accepted from the field device Decimal value 32768 gt 32767 Not applicable for EU TYPE 0 10 or 99 For example if 12 bit positive values are passed this value would typically be 4095 Min EU Minimum engineering units value for point range bias or low end value of instrument range Decimal value 999999 0 gt 9999999 0 Value used for EU conversion instrument under range alarming and TREND PID BAR GRAPH EU data scale This value is defined fo
72. in which they can attempt to logon to the system before they are locked out The user will have to wait for the lockout to timeout before they can attempt to logon again 4 lf the Administrator has disabled a User ID the user will not be able to log onto the system A message Bad user ID or password Access denied will be displayed 5 If another user is currently logged onto the system and the Current user must logoff option is active in the Security Settings dialog box for their user group See Section 4 3 9 2 the currently logged on user must logoff the system before any other user is allowed to logon 6 See also Shared zones Section 1 8 3 and Password protection Section 1 8 4 1 8 2 2 To log off from the RealFlex server For Microsoft Windows look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Login Logoff option The User Logon Logoff pop up is displayed User Logon Logoff E4 User demo 12 curently logged on E Log Ort Close 2 Click on the Log Off button For RealFlex4 look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Login Logoff option The LOG MENU pop up is displayed Page 40 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual ee LOG MENU Fi LOGON F2 LOGOFF 2 From the LOG MENU select LOGOFF or press F2 Flex View will make contact with the RealFlex server to save your User Profile and log you off the system Note When the Current use
73. is reported gt To change the Alarm color Click on required button A pop up pallet of standard colors will be displayed Click on the required color The selected color will now be displayed on the button top Note The default color Black will specify NO ALARM and will disable alarm limit checking If an alarm limit is defined a color must be chosen other than Black Page 114 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 5 When you have completed all your entries or changes click on the Fi button in the top of the window to save your changes A Database Modification dialog box will appear displaying the progress for the addition modification of the Tag in the RealFlex database 3 5 5 2 Edit Create Tank Strapping Tables Editing or creating Tank Strapping Tables can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access In the Tag properties window for Tanks the Edit strapping table button allows you to create or edit linear or non linear strapping tables A strapping table is used by the data processor to calculate the volume of fluid in a tank based upon the fluid level reported by a tank level transmitter Note Before this feature can be used a tank scan point must be defined and stored specifying the Max Level Max volume and a Level conversion type of 2 3 or 4 If the level conversion type is 2 or 3 indicating incremental strapping table
74. limited only by hard disk space and user friendly techniques are provided for accessing the displays and switching from one display to another While in realtime display mode user defined graphic displays may be recalled for viewing by four mechanisms 1 Via the Displays menu which is accessible through the Displays on screen button 2 Via the Virtual Screens window 3 Via Display Links 4 Viathe Desktop Layouts window If you wish to send a particular display to the back of the workspace to uncover other windows that may be behind it click on the To Back on screen button Note Although you may have more than one display opened at a time there is a maximum memory allocation set for Displays When the maximum has been reached you will see the message Not Enough Memory Close one or more windows You can capture an image of the currently open Display by sending it directly to the Printer using the Print Window option from the Utilities menu or you can copy the display to the Clipboard Once copied to the Clipboard you can then paste the contents of the Clipboard into another application e g Microsoft Paint Visio Word etc Right click on the open Display and select Copy to Clipboard from the pop up menu 2 2 5 Display links If Display links have been implemented for your system you will be able to switch to another display or overlay the current display with another by clicking on a link button in the displa
75. logon Current user must logoff When this option is active the user must logoff by typing his her own user ID and password before another user can logon Restart will logoff current user When this option is active if the main node is restarted rebooted then all currently logged on users will be logged off the system Restart will unlock all users When this option is active if the main node is restarted rebooted then all locked out users will be unlocked 3 Inthe bottom section of this dialog box set parameters for each security option Options are Minimum password length Defines the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password May be set from between 1 and 25 Default 7 Password history Specifies the password history depth Up to four passwords can be remembered to avoid reusing the same password May be set from between 0 and 4 Default 4 Password lifetime days Defines the number of days before the current password expires May be set from 0 to 36500 days Default 180 If set to O then the password will never expire Note If the Password never expires option is active in Security User Maintenance dialog box for a particular user then the Password never expires option will override the Password lifetime option for that user Attempts before lockout Defines the number of times that a user may attempt to logon correctly before they are locked out May be set from between 0 and 127 Default
76. menu then click on the Move ltem Up or Move Item Down buttons until the selected button command or separator is in the required position in the list gt Copy buttons or commands If you want to copy a button or a command to a different sub menu but apply different arguments Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Click on and highlight the button or command in the menu or sub menu to be copied then click on the Copy button or key Ctrl C Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy where you want to paste the copied item Click on the 3 Paste button or key Ctrl V The copied item will be added to the selected menu or sub menu If required set the new arguments If copying a button rename the button Delete buttons commands or separators Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Click on and highlight the button command or separator to be deleted from the menu or sub menu then click on the delete button or key Delete If you want to remove the item and copy it to the Clipboard click on the de cut button or key Ctrl X When deleting buttons commands or separators a window is displayed asking you for confirmation
77. occurrences This display is updated in a push down fashion so the first line on Page 1 reflects the latest alarms events or controls occurrence the second line reflects the one before that and so on The operator moves from page to page by pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys or clicking on the Page Up and Page Down on screen buttons Paging of the display is circular That is if the page down button is selected while viewing the last page the user will be moved to the first page of the display For a Microsoft Windows look and feel display you can change the chronological order so that the first line on Page 1 reflects the oldest alarms events or controls occurrence To change the order click on the Time column caption An up arrow to the right of this caption indicates that the data has been sorted so that the oldest occurrence is at the top A down arrow indicates that the data has been sorted so that the latest occurrence is at the top Alarms cannot be acknowledged while viewing the Historical Event Summary which is provided for information purposes only However the alarm silence on screen button may be used while viewing this multi page summary and access to the Alarm Lines display remains available A Page 73 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual The user may also request a hardcopy of this summary Special notice should be taken that if the Calarmproc processor was activated at system startup with
78. of the Application window has not been activated and the operator will not be able to resize the main Flex View window See Note below X Close button Note If the Minimize and the Restore or Maximize buttons are not displayed then both the Allow to resize and move and Allow to minimize check boxes in the Main Window section of the Application window have not been activated and the operator will not be able to resize or minimize or move the main Flex View window See Section 4 3 12 1 1 2 1 2 Toolbars g Main Utilities Configuration Displays Qi 160105 14 52 47 The toolbars provide quick mouse access to many options and facilities used in Flex View Button Action del Alarm sounder silence button Main Displays the Main menu options Utilities Displays the Utilities menu options Configuration Displays the Configuration menu options Page 13 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Displays Displays the Select Display window B E y Links you to the on line Help Displays a list of hidden menus after the application window has been reduced in size Indicates a message has been received from another logged on user A sound accompanying the flashing button may be played if activated via the Miscellaneous options window see Section 4 3 12 4 Flashing Indicates communications state with the RealFlex server Clicking on this button you can find out who el
79. on the E Flex View icon in the Taskbar and select Close from the pop up menu With the Flex View application window active key Alt F4 The system implementor has the ability to password protect or prevent certain users from exiting Flex View Page 127 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 2 Utilities menu The Utilities menu allows you to gain access to the following options Print Window Allows you to print a copy of the current Flex View window For details please refer to Section 4 2 1 Print Preview Allows you to display the active window as it would appear when printed For details please refer to Section 4 2 2 Print Alarm Page Allows you to print the contents of the Alarm page For details please refer to Section 4 2 3 Report Scheduler Allows you to schedule and execute reports on a timed basis For details please refer to Section 4 2 4 Set Server Time Date Allows a user to set the Date and Time on the RealFlex Server For details please refer to Section 1 6 Project Journal Allows a user to view a log of errors and warnings generated for the Project currently open For details please refer to Section 4 2 5 Remote Modules Help Provides access to the on line Help files on the RealFlex QNX server For details please refer to Section 4 2 6 Page 128 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 2 1 Print Window The Print Window option from the Utili
80. on the Fi button in the top of the Tag Properties window The Tag Properties window may also be accessed for editing via the Edit Database option of the Dynamic Display Control Poke Points menu For details please refer to Section 2 3 1 6 Tag properties can only be edited by Flex View users with appropriate user level access 3 5 2 Analog Point Definition 3 5 2 1 Analog Tag properties Adding or deleting Tags can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Analog Tag Properties window is used to provide RealFlex with the information it needs to monitor and display analog scan points Analog scan points are those that can assume real number values over some defined range Alarm levels and alarm actions may also be defined for each analog point as well as the colors for displaying the point when alarm limits are violated gt To access the Analog Tag properties window Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window is displayed listing all PCU s on the system 2 From the Database Editor List of project PCU window double click on the required PCU The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window
81. on the mouse If the selected object is a poke point not all are the Poke Points menu similar to the one shown below will appear RTU_1 41_00_04 ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM MANUALLY OVERWRITE DISPLAY ALARM EVENTS DISPLAY DYNAMIC TREND P EDIT DATABASE INFORMATION TAG CONTROL TAG ALARM DISABLE Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel Acknowledge Alarm Manually Overwrite Display Alarm Events Display Dynamic Trend Edit Database Information Tag Control Tag Alarm Disable Select the function required from the menu If the selected function is not applicable to the datapoint associated with the display element you have chosen nothing will happen Otherwise the selected function will immediately be performed All of the Poke Points menu functions are invoked by clicking on a Poke Point and apply to the database point associated with the Poke Point as opposed to merely the particular display 2 3 1 1 Acknowledge Alarm This function silences the audible alarm and stops the flashing of the display element selected This is the only way to acknowledge a single alarm without simultaneously acknowledging all other active alarms in the same display 2 3 1 2 Manually Overwrite Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance This function is used to manually correct the value or state of the database
82. on users Receive messages from logged on users Communication status visual indicators are as shown in the table below Indicator State Not connected to RealFlex server Connected to Main RealFlex server Connected to backup RealFlex server Local simulation on Windows PC apela When you click on this button the following dialog box will appear Modes State for Project Demo ES Model Connected gt This dialog box will inform you in plain language the current nodes state for the project 1 5 1 To find out who else is logged onto the project From the Nodes State for Project dialog box click on the 2 button and the dialog box will expand to display a list of other users currently logged onto the project An example is shown below Modes State for Project Demo El Hodel Connected E Console Name User Mame Time of connect Lan CONSOLE David Davis 10701703 18 11 32 ja CONSOLE 2 Des Samson 10 01 03 19 31 11 BL CONSOLES Sam Smith 10 01 03 12 31 10 Note The red circle with a yellow Z appended to the console symbol warns you that the other user has access to the same zone s as you and could cause changes in that zone without you knowing it To collapse this dialog box click on the El button To close this dialog box click on the 2 button in the right hand side of the title bar Page 23 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual If you double click on any of the listed
83. ooccccccccnnnnnnccnonnnnncononnonnnononnnnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 2 2 Oo Alarm Enable DISAB iaa os 2 2 3 2 Dynamic Display Control Realtime Controls ooo cccooooonncccnncccnccnnnnconncononnnanncnnnnnnnnnnaannnnnos 2 2 3 2 1 For Microsoft Windows look and feel iii did 2 23 22 ForRealFlexlook and feel ernea dr li do dis 2 2 4 FLEX VIEW SUMMARY SCREENS DATA SUMMARIES ccccccesssceecceesseceeceeeuseceeeeeaaeceeteeeseeeeseaaaes 2 2 4 1 Data Summanes commands sii a a e a a tias 2 2 4 2 FUSLOMCAlAIARII EVEN astas ds 2 ZA ACNEEA anne aa a ae a 2 244 Summary Properties WINDOW neces cess acetate niiae ete oela eea ar i elainn nein 2 REPORTS its al aa a 2 3 DATABASE IMPLEMENTATION coi a 2 3 1 DATABASE IMPLEMENTATION OVERVIEW 0sccceeececesececenececenceteesceteeceteneeeceneeeseseetsnecetsnecetsneeteness 2 3 2 DATABASE POINT DEFINITION OVERVIEW 0sccccsececesececeseceseseeteesceteeceteeceneneeeseseetsaeeetsueeensneeteness 2 9 DATABASE EDITOR suis 2 3 3 1 Database Editor List of project PCU WiNdOW ccccccccnoconnnccnncccncnonncnnnnnnnnononanonnnnncnonannnenons 2 3 3 2 Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU WiNdOW occccnncccncooonnccnnncccnnonnccnnncnononnnaneninos 2 3 3 3 To Add Duplicate Replicate Edit and Delete PCU S ooonccncccccocccnccccconconncnonancnnnonannonnnnos 2 394 IMponiid EXPONO POU Season ride 2 32390 TONI ATA FOU acre tocaran 2 34 TOFDIT TELEMETRY SETTINGS srotnrnhte A 2 30 DAT
84. open area of the Title Bar and drag the window to the required position in the screen For RealFlex4 look and feel 1 Right click on the FlexView icon at the bottom of your screen and select Restore from the pop up menu The Main Flex View window will reduce in size as shown in the example below but any open displays the Alarm banner Nodes State for Project window and the User Name banner will remain in their original size and positions until they are individually closed or moved 2 Move the mouse pointer over the edge or corner of the window The pointer becomes a double pointed arrow 3 Drag the window border until the window is the desired size then release the button 4 Move the window by clicking on an open area of the Menu Bar and drag the window to the required position in the screen 1 7 3 Resizing and moving Display or Summary windows During the operation of Flex View you may find it useful to reduce the size of a Display or a Summary window and or to move it to a different location on the screen For example it may be desirable to simultaneously view two different Displays or Summaries in which case you could reduce the size of each and move each to a different side of the screen gt To resize or move a Display or Summary window Method 1 1 Move the mouse pointer over the edge or corner of the window The pointer becomes a double pointed arrow 2 Drag the window border until the window is the
85. or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the User Function needed 4 Select the desired User Function from the Select Remote Procedure window 5 Click on the gt button to the right of the Arguments field A pop up menu will appear Tag Mare PLU Mame DB Type Tag Index PCU Index Console Mame Arguments Tag Name PCU Name DB Type Tag Index and PCU Index are corresponding parameters of the tag user function being applied Argument Console Name corresponds to the console name for the user function being applied 6 Click on the required option You will be returned to the Command Properties window where a code for the option S optionname will be added to the Arguments field These codes pass this information to the QNX application as arguments e g TagName will pass the name of the tag that the user has right clicked on and selects the User Function for the QNX application associated with it 7 f required add further options chaining to the Argument by repeating steps 5 and 6 above Separate each argument in the Arguments field with a space 8 After you have selected and set up required command click on the OK button You will be returned to the User Functions window where the name of the command will be displayed in the Edit menu button sub menu name field Page 211 of 249 Va 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 9 If re
86. particular PCU Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system 2 Double click on the PCU for which you want to add scan points The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 On the Tag editing toolbar click on required button Choices are a Add Analog E Add Meter a Add Status K Add Tank A blank Add Point window for the data type selected will be displayed Note The Add Point windows are identical to the Tag Properties windows Once relevant fields have been defined the scan point may be written to the RealFlex database by clicking on the F button in the top of the Add Point window gt To delete scan points for a particular PCU Scan points can be deleted from the RealFlex database while viewing the points in the Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system 2 Double click on the PCU for which you want to edit scan points The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU windo
87. point associated with the poke point when the correct value or state is known to be different from that reported by the scanner and shown on the display When a value or state is manually overwritten the supplied value remains in place until cancelled or manually overwritten with a new value Page 62 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual While viewing either a System PCU Summary display page or a custom graphic display with dynamic status analog meter and or tank points defined the Manual Overwrite feature is invoked by performing the following 1 Click with the right mouse button on the point you wish to overwrite The Poke Points menu will appear 2 Select Manually Overwrite from the Poke Points menu The Manual Overwrite window will appear Note For a Meter or Tank point a window will first appear allowing you to select the Subtype you wish to overwrite Example Manual Overwrite windows Manual Overwrite El E Tag RTU 781 00 02 Description TANK 1 CAPACITY Manual Overwrite Tag ATU_1 DI_00 02 Description PUMPS STATUS Please enter new value for the point Its current value 12 4 506456 043 Pleaze select new option and press Execute NAAA mea mea Microsoft Windows look and feel i Manual Overwrite PIU 1 HIJI Jg Talg dl LEYEL MANUAL OVERURITE FTU 1 Curia TL PEU Cari 1 rt E AAA US 5 8948576 1 I I I I I I J i 0 000 9 000 NENE 5 898576
88. the e command line option daily alarm event history EVENT YYMMDD files will be maintained on the hard disk in the realflex data events subdirectory If you click on the Options on screen button a pop up menu will be displayed By selecting one of the options the user may change the way data is displayed Show For All PCU all alarm points for all PCU s will be displayed Show For Selected PCU allows you to view alarms for a selected PCU On selecting this option a window listing all available PCU s will be displayed Click on the required PCU PCU Tag Switch will display the Tag name instead of the PCU name 2 4 3 Active Alarms The Active Alarm Summary display as shown below provides the operator with an easy to use mechanism to review points in the system that are currently in an alarm condition E Active Alarm Summary Ol x PageDown f PageUp AckPage E fOptions YYFMOSDD HHMI SS MS AI PCU Description value Units Type Microsoft Windows look and feel af ACTIVE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE UP PAGE DOUN OPTIONS 7 ACK PAGE YOPMO O0 HAIMA ss AI PCU DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS TYPE PAGE 1 OF 5 RealFlex4 look and feel As data values or states return to being within normal limits or reflect acceptable conditions the associated alarm message will be automatically removed from this summary and replaced with an OK or return to normal message which will subsequently be removed upon acknowledgeme
89. the Main node number Standby Node Number Restrict access to the Standby node number Clock mode field The Clock mode field becomes active when selecting the Set Server Date Time command 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Clock mode field The RealFlex Hardware Clock Mode window will appear which will list by name each clock mode defined in the RealFlex system You will note that mode names are presented alphabetically If the window Is full use the or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the mode needed 2 Select the desired clock mode from the RealFlex Hardware Clock Mode window Choices are Local Time Default On the RealFlex4 PC it uses QNX 4 The user is allowed to select if he she wishes to work in local time taking into account summer winter time and number of hours from GMT UTC Coordinated Universal Time UTC is the international time standard It is the current term for what was commonly referred to as Greenwich Meridian Time GMT Zero 0 hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich England which lies on the zero longitudinal meridian Universal time is based on a 24 hour clock therefore afternoon hours such as 4 pm UTC are expressed as 16 00 UTC sixteen hours zero minutes Since a day is 24 hours long the world may be split into 15 degree wide longitudinal bands 360 degrees 24 hours Each band represents one hour As an example Huntsville Alabama is located
90. the bottom There would normally be no reason to change this directory path 5 After you have set archiving parameters click on the Accept button or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation Historical data will be archived at the time specified 4 3 7 Report Generator The Report Generator option from the Configuration menu allows you to create a new report or edit an existing report file using the Flex Report application program Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For details on user level access please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance To view or run an existing report please refer to Section 4 1 3 1 User report gt To view a list of reports For Microsoft Windows look and feel From the Configuration menu click on the Report Generator option The Select Flex Report File window appears displaying the lt Create New Report gt option and listing all reports available for the project sorted alphabetically by name Page 164 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Select Flex Report File Y As E Realtime xls xls es Communication xls es Summary ATUL xls z Historical xls E S st_ Sum RTUL xls gT MewReport xls El win xls gr Realtime xls If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the buttons located in the toolbar will scroll the list left or right to the desired name You can als
91. the date and time as required For details please refer to Section 1 7 13 3 Inthe Value field enter the required value then click on the Apply button The new record will be displayed in the View window 4 Click on the Exit button to close the Add Historical Data dialog box gt To copy retrieved data to the clipboard The historical data retrieved can be copied to the clipboard as plain text and pasted into another application e g WordPad Excel etc 1 Select data to be copied To select a single record click on and highlight the record To select a group of records that are next to each other click on and highlight the first record of the group hold down the Shift key then scroll down the list and select the last record of the group To select individual records which are not next to each other hold down the Ctrl key then select each record as required To select all records right click then select the Select All option from the pop up menu 2 With the selected records highlighted right click then select the Copy to clipboard option from the pop up menu The selected records will be copied to the clipboard ready for pasting into another application 4 3 6 6 Historical Data Archiving On the RealFlex server Historical Data Archiving splits your large oldhdata file contains all historical records into monthly chunks It creates a new oldhdata file with a time span of X months e three months
92. their description 1 Fora new zone click on the Enable filtering check box A tick will appear when activated and the List of PCU s will appear 2 Click on the Search Tags button The Search Options window will appear Search Options E Search for tags having the description like E Look through i AIPCUs Checked PEU in current configuration omen 3 Inthe Search for tags having the description like field the asterisk indicates search all tags If you want to search for tags related to TANK 1 for example type TANK 1 The asterisk before and after TANK 1 is used as a wild card to request all point descriptions containing TANK 1 i e TANK 1 LEVEL OUTFLOW TANK 1 etc 4 Inthe Look through section select required option then click on the Search button Flex View will proceed to search for the defined tags The result of the search will appear in the Search Results dialog box Search Results El F Add to configuration Replace configuration e Cancel i ERTU_1 PCU El Analogs Al 0000 TANK 1 LEVEL ALDO D1 TANK 2 LEVEL Al OO 02 TANK 1 CAPACITY Al OO 05 TANK 2 CAPACITY Al OO 04 TANK 1 DEL FLOW Al 00005 TANK 2 DEL FLOW Al OO 07 OUTFLOW TANK 1 Al OO 08 OUTFLOW TANK 2 E 4 Meters MT oO 04 ACCUM TANK 1 MT_00 05 ACCUM TANK 2 Gg status DIO0 06 Flow In Tank 2 DIoo 07 Flow In Tank 1 An expandable collapsible hierarchy listing all PC
93. to API subroutine TAB6B which calculates the CTL The gross barrels are multiplied by the CTL and meter factor The mtrtbl record structure for calculation type 5 variation 1 is as follows Meter_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Calculation type 5 Product_type_tag The tag name of the status database point containing the product type MF_Product1_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the Product 1 meter factor MF_Product2_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the Product 2 meter factor API Subroutine ASCII characters TAB6B Gravity_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s specific gravity Temperature_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s observed temperature Page 107 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Sample mtrtbl entry for calculation Type 5 variation 1 12 total GULF _PLAINS 5 12 PROD_TYPE 12 NGAS CMF 12 NGAS_ SMF TAB6B 311 C GRVTY 12 NAT_TEMP b Variation 2 using GPA Technical Publication 16 subroutine The system implementor manually enters the two meter factors into analog pseudopoints and creates a status database point for the product status as well as a scanned analog database point for the product temperature The product status i e its identity is either manually entered during realtime or scanned in depending on the system I O dev
94. to the menu list You may want to separate groups of options in the menu list by inserting a line Click on the Insert Separator button In the appropriate position in the command list of the Edit menu button sub menu name field lt SEPARATOR gt will be displayed gt Edit commands for buttons or sub menu s 1 2 3 Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Click on the command to be edited then click on the Command Properties button The Command Properties window will be displayed where you can edit the command properties After you have edited required command click on the OK button You will be returned to the Main Menu Rename a button or sub menu name 1 2 3 Click on the 5 Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Click on and highlight the button or sub menu to be renamed and click on the Rename button or key F2 Rename the selected button or sub menu Page 207 of 249 p Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Rearrange buttons or items in a menu or sub menu list Click on the Go into Submenu or E Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Click on and highlight the button command or separator to be moved in the sub
95. type point description name For example if you want to print details for TANK 1 LEVEL type TANK 1 LEVEL To print details for all activities related to TANK 1 type TANK 1 The asterisk before and after TANK 1 is used as a wild card to request all point descriptions containing TANK 1 i e TANK 1 LEVEL OUTFLOW TANK 1 etc The Match case check box distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters When Match case is selected Flex View finds only those instances in which the capitalization matches the text you typed in the Point Description field Presets section The Presets section is used to save your selections in the Selective Alarm Print window and build a library of your commonly used reports gt To save your selections 1 Click on the Save As button The Save Preset window will be displayed Save Preset Input or choose name for preset to save New presel So Cancel M Save date and time values in the preset Page 124 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Inthe Input or choose name for preset to save field tyoe a meaningful name to describe the report or if you are editing an existing report click on the El button and select the required report from the drop down list If you want to fix the selected date and time used click on the Save date and time values in the preset check box 3 Click on OK to save your report and add it to the Presets list
96. users the following dialog box will appear displaying Advanced Console Information Advanced Console Info E Active zones Built in zone Lighthouse System ZONE IP address 81 131 68 223 Flex View version 3 1 Build 8 1 1 43 Protocol version 30 The significance of each field is Active zones Lists the zones assigned to the user If there is more than one zone assigned to the user they will be listed with a coma separating the zones e g Built in zone ZONE A ZONE B Note Zones shown in red text warns you that the user has access to the same zone as you and could cause changes in that zone without you knowing it IP address Lists the IP address of the console Flex View is connected to This IP address can be thought of as a house address that a postman uses to deliver mail The computer uses the IP address to know where to address and exchange information Each computer on any network has a unique IP address Flex View version The Flex View software version number and build number used by the logged on user Protocol version The protocol version of Flex View 1 5 2 To send a message to logged on users 1 From the Nodes state for project dialog box click on the A button The Send Message window will appear Bl send Lot Es Copy AA Paste T or j AT Subject Insert David Wicks 2 Page 24 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 You can choose to send a message t
97. who locked the application by clicking on the LOGOFF button Features section gt To enable disable the User Name Banner The User Name banner displays the name of the currently logged on user Click on the Enable User Name Banner check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick When enabled the banner is normally visible below the Date and time field of Flex View toolbar lf you want to move the banner to a different location on the screen click on the banner and hold down the left mouse button while you drag the banner to the required location then release the mouse button The background color of the User Name banner is used to indicate the level of control you have over the active zone Gray You are logged on and have full view of the system Yellow You are logged on and have exclusive control of the active zone Red You are logged on and have shared control of the active zone with someone else See Section 1 5 Communications status with Real Flex server for information of zones shared with other users Page 193 of 249 a 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual gt To enable disable Virtual screens Click on the Enable Virtual Screens check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick When enabled the Virtual Screens window as shown below will be visible in the bottom right hand corner of the Flex View application window e
98. will normally display the name of the function but can also include other information to make it easier to identify Your system implementor should provide you with a means to identify the User Function object used in your system Within Flex View the operator can run the assigned user function by clicking on the User Function button This method for starting a User Function can be used as an alternative to creating a User Function menu item from within Flex View A Page 56 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual User Functions available are Start RF RealFlex creates a command that will start RealFlex from Flex View Stop RF RealFlex creates a command that will stop RealFlex from Flex View Restart RF RealFlex creates a command that will restart RealFlex from Flex View RF DB init RealFlex initializes the database on the local machine AutoUpdate RealFlex runs the script file AutoUpdate from the RealFlex QNX system which updates Flex View with any changes made to the database on the RealFlex QNX system side since the last AutoUpdate was run Crontab init A file on RealFlex QNX PC that stores scheduled tasks Crontab Init reads this text file and implements the schedules found inside this file 2 2 7 Trend Dynamic Data A trend display is a dynamically updated graph showing a database point s numerical value plotted against time Below is a sample trend display q gt a al RT PES SS SS S
99. you to edit the contents of menu buttons or to add and edit project user defined menu buttons to create personalized menu s and sub menu s for accessing Flex View menu options Executive programs exe Commands com or Batch bat files A unique Main Menu window is provided for each Flex View Project and for each User ID Flex iew Options Application Main Menu Sounds Colors Editing menu buttons on Miscellaneous Environment Main d 3 Product Info Utilities d Hey ae oe Configuration gt eee gt Alarms ci Fonts Displays gain Menu E bo User Functions one Settings mn Zone Editor Advanced dh X El User Options Pain Menu Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can set this option for the Project You must also be logged onto the RealFlex server before you can set this option for the User For the Project By default the Main Menu for the Project is configured to display the Main Utilities Configuration Displays and Help menu buttons for the Flex View Project These are displayed in the top of the Base window and allow you to access the standard Flex View menu options A user with appropriate user level access normally the System Administrator can edit or re arrange the options available via these menu buttons For the User When a user initially logs on the Main Menu for the user is blank Each user can define their own pers
100. 0 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 4 Flex View Summary Screens Data Summaries Flex View provides the Data Type Summary utility to allow viewing all system database points of a given type on a multi page display The PageUp and PageDown keys and the on screen buttons can be used to scroll through the pages The points defined for the given type are shown listed alphabetically by tag name and grouped by PCU association Values and states depicted represent a current state snapshot at the time the Summary was requested and thus will not be updated to reflect realtime changes As is applicable alarm conditions will be indicated however alarm acknowledgements are not supported via these summaries Flex View Summary screens can be grouped into the following types Data Type Summaries see Section 2 4 1 Historical Alarm Event Summary see Section 2 4 2 Active Alarm Summary see Section 2 4 3 2 4 1 Data Summaries commands RealFlex provides the Data Type Summary utility to allow viewing of all system database points of a given type on a multi page display The points defined for the given type are shown listed alphabetically by tag name and grouped by PCU association Values and states depicted represent a current state snapshot at the time the summary was requested and thus will not be updated to reflect realtime changes As is applicable alarm conditions will be indicated While in realtime display mode the Data Sum
101. 0 to 23 59 Weekly In the Start time field set the time of day for the report to start running shown in the format HH MM May be set from 0 to 23 59 In the Day of week field click on the El button and select the required day of the week from the drop down list Monthly In the Start time field set the time of day for the report to start running shown in the format HH MM May be set from 0 to 23 59 In the Day of month field select the required day of the month May be set from 1 to 31 Yearly In the Start time field set the time of day for the report to start running shown in the format HH MM May be set from 0 to 23 59 In the Day of month field select the required day of the month May be set from 1 to 31 In the Month field click on the x button and select the required month from the drop down list Output section You can select any of the following options as required Print report on the default printer Click on this check box to enable the sending of reports to the default printer This is the printer defined in the Configuration menu Printer Config option A tick will appear when enabled Save report file s to folder Click on this check box to enable the sending of the report to a file A tick will appear when enabled and the field below will become active In this field the default path for reports is already displayed If you want to change the path click on the Bi button an
102. 00 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Click on the E button to the right of the PCU field and select required PCU from the drop down list of currently defined PCUs for the system Click on the El button to the right of the Type field and select required Type from the drop down list Analog Meter or Status Click on the id button to the right of the Tag field and select required Tag name from the drop down list of all currently defined tag names for the selected PCU and Type The drop down list will only include tag points that are not already included in the list of historical points In the Deadband field enter a value to set the filter for the point before data is saved in historical collection The minimum allowable value for this field is 0 00001 Analog and Meter points only For analog points the entry is used as a minimum change in percentage of full EU scale Max EU Min EU For meter points the deadband represents a minimum raw count change If the Type selected is Status the deadband field is not used All changes in Status data values will automatically be recorded for any change of state Note Keep in mind the defined deadband for your I O Driver the f Analog deadband value parameter when defining the deadband for your historical record The deadband in the Historical Data Point Maintenance window does not have to match the deadband defined for your I O Driver but if the deadband set
103. 000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual The color boxes next to each field in the Limits section shows the color that will be displayed in alarm messages and dynamic value and or bar graph representations of the referenced analog when the alarm condition is detected Change colors by left clicking on the color box and selecting required color from the pop up list Note The default color Black will specify NO ALARM and will disable alarm limit checking If an alarm limit is defined a color must be chosen other than Black 5 When you have completed all your entries or changes click on the Fi button in the top of the window to save your changes A Database Modification dialog box will appear displaying the progress for the addition modification of the Tag in the RealFlex database 3 5 3 Meter Point Definition 3 5 3 1 Meter Tag properties Adding or deleting Tags can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Meter Tag properties window is used to provide RealFlex with the information it needs to monitor and display meter or accumulator scan points Meter points listed on this window are described by tag name description units meter type meter factor pulses unit rollover and current value gt To access the Meter Tag properties window Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access l
104. 0000 MSH SMSREASOMN RSSI WOLTAGE LEWEL COUNTER SETSTATE FUELSTATE TEMPSTATE PRESSURE ESTOPSTATE TAMPERSTATE Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 6 For the Channel edit the Value fields for each Label as required Use the scroll bar if required Label is not visible Labels and their default values are as defined in the scanner name cfg file provided by the scanner developer When you select a Value field the field will become active allowing you to edit the value using one of the following editing modes Level edit the value by overwriting existing value 10000 CER O highlight the existing value and type in the new value or use the spinner buttons to change the value click on the El button and select required value from the 7 After editing required values click on the OK button to save the PCU communication settings or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation On selecting OK an Operation In Progress window will appear while Flex View makes contact with the RealFlex server to update the channels description file driver configuration file and channel driver setting information A 5000 0001 0040 E Page 94 of 249 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 5 Database Point Definitions 3 5 1 To Add Delete and Edit Tags Adding or deleting Tags can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access To add a scan point for a
105. 1 From the Utilities menu select the Set Server Time Date option The Set Server Time Date dialog box will appear Set Server Time Date Server Local TimeD ate 10 45 45 0 03 2003 2 Set the time and or date for the RealFlex server For details please refer to Section 1 7 13 3 Click on the Set button to apply the new time and date or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation O must be exercised when changing the date or time because several programs are executed on a time basis For example A report might be automatically scheduled to run at 07 00 a m each morning If the time is changed at 07 01 a m back to 06 59 a m the report will be printed again This may not create any specific problem unless some database points or counters are reset at the same time lt may cause the loss of two minutes of valuable data Any time the Historical Data Collection subsystem is active and the date or time is changed in a backward direction you will record items in historical collection with double time stamps A separate time initiated task is activated via the rptcron file that will automatically read the hardware clock and reset the internal system software time at a specified daily interval usually at two minutes after midnight Caution should be exercised so as not to change the date or time precisely when this program would be executed Page 27 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo
106. 1 34 Reports 10 28 03 17 26 18 ATU and Tag Databaze 10 28 03 08 38 05 Symbol Library 102803 19 00 01 Time of the First Historical Event 01730703 12 00 00 Cancel 2 Select the required components and click on the Update button or click on the Cancel button to close window without updating Selected system components will be updated on your PC Page 153 of 249 MD 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 5 Configuration File Editor Configuration file editing can only be carried out by Flex View users with appropriate user level access In order to configure RealFlex there are some configuration files which need to be created or edited The Configuration File Editor option allows a user to configure these files from within Flex View or Flex Builder A user is able to setup his her system totally independent of the RealFlex QNX system gt To open the Configuration File Editor application 1 From the Configuration menu select the Configuration File Editor option If no one is currently logged on the Flex CFE application will automatically start to open and a User ID dialog box will appear User ID Enter User ID Enter your user ID in the Enter User ID field and press Return User ID s are not echoed to the screen while being entered The Configuration File Editor application will then complete the opening sequence Flex CFE SERYER coldstart File Edit View Op
107. 126 Analog Contro i Mentes des E N EE EA 68 Eo ALEL E e oe cosets nachos E E E hands net A EE A TEE A EE EE E T 62 68 OIE MENOS arado octal E ode 57 O RO OS ENE EE EEA ETE E OOO 52 96 A re ene ES a een rT Dene ERR ee eee ee ene 95 AP I volume Correction O AS a 118 COMECTONS TON MES ia 103 Applicaton RASO a A da 197 PO DIIC ATION ole a AA ase one die a eee 194 Display Or TAN isaac 194 Application was locked as defined time interval elapsed cccccccconccnncccconccnncnnancnnnonnnancnnononanncnnnnnnnos 191 Application window configuration Options MENU ooccccnnccccccnnnncnnnnncnonnnanncnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnonnnnnnennnnnnoss 186 Arenive Historical data ee nen ate tee ere ee Ta Rn a a 154 Arguments Gommand Propeller dd load 221 USC FUNCIONA ae cian 208 Audible alar S CUINA a E N 188 TIPOS ia NN TA EA a S LANCE 44 Auto Aide Virtual SCLE CMS as A A A AS 16 Automatic locking Ol Therap PlICAllOM amici ii AAA AI A AA vin 191 Aux address AMalOG TaS cc A san ee A sede ces antes Nees 96 Metertad Sunat cola dios 100 Salsa S oerna lacico ita ereccion bacon uo aa lille delata 109 Auxillary Files Update Timestamp resetting occcccccconnconccccnoncnnnncnononnnonnancnnnononannnnnononancnnnonannnnnnnnss 219 AV Sy GUIS TALS a ot cL neces gage E dl astasaenteoau O soca 57 B Background colors Alarm banner sssicanctavstaccadccoessadundicacenesoosedicoessahectiscbdichacsto cous tSecdiakiceeeeae ort 190 PVCS IO aaeoa a a T a
108. 172 A e o o E 37 39 A e e 7 PEO OO O O 37 39 A O aaidusiaovemultanttemied abarcas N S 37 39 a she aetiene essnea nat cees saranda cate E e a a a gates 44 96 M Mail Account Settings Scheduled reports hracu a a A 130 Mam ment GOS a o 119 PROUT TOK VICOW ira sae sans eres eh sca Ma Bs Nes asd Bat acl Mabe Oa ate led pala Flies N 126 Data Sumae S a o al o e da haa 72 Demand RODOREDA A ld Gates 120 Demand Reports Selective Alarm PriNt ooconnnccnnncccccnononncnnnnncnnonncnnnnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnonnnnnnennnnnnnss 122 1 ene eo eo ae 126 RealhlS SUMMA ES a o bauer 119 User logon LOGO A A bios 37 39 Main Menu window Configuration Options MENU cccccccccoccnccnnnccccncnonncnonnncnnnnoncnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnnnonnnos 204 Manual OV Cr tite errata od tolero lt irlanda 62 Display INGICAION ariel lalr diablo iaa ooo 44 A A PP desea iates a a a an 57 MAX Et Analog ta0 Sip ae ee sica 96 Max levels Lank tags eriin ennerien ais dio coc ie 112 TankStrapbpind table arisen unei a e e a ela T 115 MAX RAW Audible Alarm TYPES o do de os de 44 ANAO TAGS iaa eo 96 Molor TAGS sa aa a a er S 100 Max volume Tank strapping table sicari aaa aai e a aa aaa aa aaae aiia aaa aai 115 A a a a a a a aS 112 Maximize button Flex View application WINGOW ccccccsseeeeceesececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaseeeseaueeeesaeeeeseeeeesenees 13 Maximizing WII OWS si id iban 28 31 32 Message Playing of a sound when user message IS received ooocccccocon
109. 2 1 7 11 Cursor control by keyboOArd ooooonncnncccccccoonccnnnncnnonnonnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononnnanennnnnnnss 2 a A A A A AT 2 1 7 13 Setting Date and Time fieldS ccccccconcnnnccnnnnccoonnnncnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnnononnncnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnonoss 2 1 8 USERLOGON LOGOFF iria sia 2 1 8 1 User Logon Logoff Standard security ccccccconccnccccnnccnnononancnnnnnonancnnnononnnnnononannnnnnnonanenns 2 1 8 1 1 To log onto the RealFlex Server ocooonnccocococcccncococonnnconononononcnnononnnconanonnnnnrnnoronnnnonannnennnrarenannnnnss 2 1 8 1 2 Tolog off trom the RealFlex Server iconos acid 2 1 8 2 User Logon Logoff Enhanced security ccccccoocconccccnonconnncnnnncnnnnnnnancnnncnnnnnnnnnonannnnnononnns 2 18 21 Tolog onto the ACASO VE A en ee Ree E i Eas 2 Page 3 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 6 22 fo log off tromine RealFleX Server sra tolnsenensawenadaedeaue 2 ES SOMARCG ZONE ia lia 2 1 04 Password protec Mia ce 2 2 REALTIME MONITORING AND CONTROLo ooooncconnncconnnccnnnnccnnnnconanccnnnocnnnnorenanernnnnrrnnnnernnnnrrnanarnananos 2 Zk ALARWEVENTOTATUS NOTIFICATION sicrie E a bathe d eentouediatenseeetcebesie 2 2 1 1 EIS DIAY INGIGAIONS er a te svadaton a a a 2 22 o A aE aE a E a AT eiheacs 2 22 CONTROL SOMMARIES mpeni ana a AN 2 2 2 1 OV Se S POU siera N 2 222 GOMMUICA ION Score eairaE 2 22d ACTIVE AOL VINO Wasp oo 2 224 OA MIE WASH S osasse r
110. 2 Click on the Take sound from the following file option button The file name field and Browse button become active 3 Click on the Browse EJ button The Open dialog box appears 4 Look through the directories on your PC and select the required sound file 5 Click on the Test sound buiton to review the new sound Click on the Stop button to stop hearing the sound If required set the sounds for other alarm types by repeating the above procedure Note For the Server unavailable alarm you can disable the audible alarm by clicking on the Don t play sound for the alarm option button After all changes have been made to the Sounds window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes Page 190 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 3 Colors window Configuration Options menu The Colors window as shown below allows you to change the background colors for the Summary Alarm banner and Desktop displays Selected colors are displayed on the button tops next to the display type Flex iew Options El Application Colors Sounds Color preferences Miscellaneous Environment Summaries background Desktop background o So Product Info E Project Alarm banner background o z Alarms Fonts Reset to Default Main Menu z User Functions one Settings 7 Zone
111. 2 10 Main Menu window Configuration Options MENU cccccseeeeececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeesseeeeeesaaeees 2 4 3 12 11 User Functions Configuration OptionS Menu ooooccccnncccccnocnncnnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnononnnnnennnnnnnnnnan 2 4 3 12 12 Zone Settings window Configuration Options MENU ooooocccnnncccccnnonccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnans 2 4 3 12 13 Zone Editor window Configuration Options MENU ccccseeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeaeeeeessaeeees 2 4 3 12 14 Advanced window Configuration OptioNS Menu cccccccccccccnccnnnccconononcnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonononanennnncnnnnnnos 2 4 3 12 15 User Options Configuration OptionS MENU ccoooconcccnnncccnnnonncnnnnconnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnos 2 4 3 12 16 Command Properties WINKOW ccccccccccceeesseeceeeecceeeeeececeeseseeaeeeeeeeeessaeseeeeeeeessusaeeeeeeeessaaaaeesees 2 4 4 AR NE a eee er ee 2 4 4 1 A desea i a i a SS 2 4 4 2 Display properties WINKOW ccccccseeceecseeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeseueeeessaueeessaeeesseeeeessneessnanees 2 AS AREER err a e a a a aS 2 4 5 1 A TA NEN EAE A A EN EE EAEE OAT E OAE E hese etenesecen 2 Page 6 of 249 ii I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Preface Flex View is part of the Flex Win suite of programs and is an Operator Workstation for the RealFlex SCADA system Flex View runs on a Microsoft Windows PC located anywhere in the world requiring only a TCP I
112. 3 See also Lockout duration below Attempts timeout min Defines the length of times in minutes that a user can attempt to logon correctly before they are locked out May be set from between 0 and 127 Default 1 See also Lockout duration below Lockout duration min Defines the length of times in minutes that a user will remain locked out of the system May be set from between 0 and 127 Default 5 Note If Lockout duration is set to 0 then the user will be locked out until the system reboots Restart will unlock all users option active or until the administrator unlocks the account manually 4 Click on the Apply button Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to change the security settings in the RealFlex database The new security settings will now be active for all groups and their assigned users gt To add a new user group By adding a user to a group you give the user all the permissions and user rights assigned to that group For instance a member of the Users group can perform most of the tasks necessary to do his or her job such as logging on to the system and carrying out operator functions However only a member of the Administrators group should be assigned to add users to groups change user passwords or modify most system settings Page 176 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 5 Click on the Ed button The following Security Group Maintenance di
113. 3 12 8 Alarms window Configuration Options menu The Alarms window as shown below allows you to specify the number of lines visible in the Alarm banner and to enable and define the printing of alarm reports Flex iew Options Alarms Alarm banner IW Keep always on top Contains up to alarms H Environment Product Info Alarm printer aE Project E Type filtering og e Printer corti O 4 Enable Alarm printing F g Y Acknowledge Fons Zone filtering e Alarm y Main ven No zone filtering 4 Event User ae r Apply active zone a Critical Fone Settings W Urgent np f Apply selected zone Sa r Y Retumed to Normal A Advance Built in Zone Iv Ss E User Options aystem events Main Menu The Alarms window is divided into two sections Alarm banner and Alarm printer Alarm banner section gt To keep alarm banner on top 1 For the Active Alarm window banner to always be on top regardless of how many displays are opened and closed 2 Click on the Keep always on top check box A tick will appear when activated gt To change number of lines in the alarm banner Click on the spinner buttons in the Contains up to XX alarms field to select the number of lines to appear May be set from 2 to 10 lines Page 201 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Alarm printer section gt To enable alarm printing
114. 4 2 4 2 Address Book WINGOW eo 2 4 2 5 Project Journal Utilities Menu oooccccccccnnnonocconnnnnnonnnonnnnnnncnnnonnnnnnnconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 2 4 2 6 Remote Modules Help Utilities Menu ccoccccocnccnncccconnnnncnonancnnnononncnnnonnnnncnnnnonannennnnos 2 AS GONFIGURATION MEN in a lid 2 4 3 1 cl ene a te a ena ee ne ne RD See eae 2 ES ld Soeseacisewitexndeta teed EA EE e a lee 2 oe MOnmeCt 10 Wie Severo 2 4 3 3 DISCONNG C niaaa DO AE a 2 AoA Gneciolor Uat vr S A A AA dE 2 43 0 Conliguravion File Edi aa 2 4 350 JMISTOFMCal ENO asta seni eiiniaieuia verano ena 2 4361 Toadda Historical OOM aie ii A A as 2 4362 Todelete a historical pot eici Sari ca 2 4309 TO ealtamistolical DOM amanda cirio 2 4 3 6 4 To import export data points to a CSV file occccccccooconnncnnnccconoonnccnnnnonononnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 2 4360 FOWIEW ISIONCAl o 2 43 06 Historical Data Archiving cererea a heade meat odeed de A aa A 2 Ao REPO GOMClaAlOl nmen a a e a a 2 4 3 8 Send Flex Report File to the Server sesionin dee a a a i 2 4 3 9 Password Maintenant ia A a 2 4 3 9 1 Password Maintenance Standard Security cccccoonnccncccconconccononnonnnonancnnonnnannnnnonnnnennnononnronennnnoss 2 4 3 9 2 Password Maintenance Enhanced Security ccccoonnncocnnnncconnnnononencnnanononnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnns 2 4 3 9 3 Security User Maintenance Options oocccccccccccconnccnnncononononc
115. 40 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Move the mouse until the thumbnail is in the grid segment you require as shown below then release the mouse button a Virtual Screens 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to move other thumbnails 1 3 4 Setting Virtual Screen Parameters 1 Position the mouse pointer over any of the grid positions then click right mouse A pop up menu will be appear displaying Parameters Position the mouse pointer over the word Parameters and a further menu will appear Options are Rows Count Used to define the number of rows in the Virtual Screens grid May be set from 1 to 5 rows Columns Count Used to define the number of columns in the Virtual Screens grid May be set from 1 to 5 columns Always on Top The Virtual Screens will always be on top regardless of how many displays are opened and closed A check mark is displayed in the menu at the left side when activated Auto Hide The Virtual Screens may be locked in place and always visible to the operator or may be set to automatically hide when the cursor is not positioned over the window A check mark is displayed in the menu at the left side when Auto Hide is activated As an alternative you can toggle between Locked and Auto Hide by clicking on the symbol in the top left hand corner of the Virtual Screens window as shown below m Virtual Ser E A Auto Hide Locked Reset to Predefined Allows you to reset the Virtual Scr
116. 9 of 249 Ma 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 11 Click on the Next gt button The Import Project Wizard Menu Configuration window will appear Import Project Wizard Menu Configuration Select main menu type you want to be used in Flex View for the project Project menu configuration O Flex view default menu O Existing RealFlez menu for Runtime Edition Back Cancel 12 In the Project menu configuration section select required option Choices are Flex View default menu Flex View will try to import the project on the RealFlex QNX system to the exact format of the Flex View default menu Existing RealFlex menu for Development Edition Default Flex View will try to import the project on the RealFlex QNX system to the exact format of the Flex View development edition i e allow database editing password maintenance display building Existing RealFlex menu for Runtime Edition Flex View will try to import the project on the RealFlex QNX system to the exact format of the Flex View runtime edition i e no database editing or password maintenance or display building etc 13 Click on the Next gt button The Import Project Wizard Ready to Import window will appear Page 150 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Import Project Wizard Ready to Import Press the Import button to begin importing project Check the information below is correc
117. A tick will appear when activated and the List of displays will appear You may select to view all displays or a selected set of displays A tick in the check box to the left of the display name indicates that it has been selected To select All click on the button Conversely to de select all click on the button To choose individual displays click on the check box to the left of the required display to toggle between selected and unselected To invert the selection i e change all selected to unselected and all unselected to selected click on the El button Clicking on the Auto Select button will only select Dynamic displays After you have edited the PCU filtering and zoning fields click on the Apply button The Connecting To RealFlex Server pop up will appear for a short period while the zone is being edited on the RealFlex server To delete an existing zone Click on the E button of the Edit zone field and select required zone from the drop down list Click on the Delete button A window is displayed asking you for confirmation Click on the Yes button to delete the zone or click on the No button to abort the operation The Connecting To Server pop up will appear for a short period while the existing zone is being deleted from the RealFlex server After all changes have been made to the Zone Editor window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel but
118. ABASE POINT DEFINITIONS esuortatasosba aca g tios 2 Page 4 of 249 A 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 5 1 iho Add Delete and Edit ag S unir s 2 32 Andog PON Dennis aida 2 302 11 Analog ad DrOpenlOs asii Ir iaa 2 39 9 Meter Point Demo M a A A a 2 353 1 Meter Tag Properties asias a 2 3023 2 JAP VOIUIME corrections tor Meu aia coins 2 294 Status PON DEINIUON artisa a e a N aa 2 SAT Status Tag Properes sinin a e a E E AS 2 399 do o a a a 2 al TaK Tag Prop a ene ee ere aN 2 3 5 5 2 Edit Create Tank Strapping Tabler Arnen A EE ERS EN 2 395 9 APT yoM cCoOrectioniortankS aa E cda 2 E MENUS ina 2 4 1 NS nn A A A 2 4 1 1 RealFlex Summaries occcccococcnccnnnccncnononncnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnanenoss 2 4 1 2 Datta Summaries ccccccssssseeeccscnseeeecsasseesccseassaesenseauseeeesseasseeeesseuseeseetagsarsesseassensessoases 2 Alias Demand RODOS ta vents gosta ssritenns senostanctinaitanal suiahsaeaiida ate ceecanacodida nat esteasqeoniiaandwusanaronidaeaty salute 2 Ae E A e E a aA 2 432 SCISCUIME AMM Pda E A ita 2 ANA USerLOgGO NEO Marcia 2 Eno cADOUPTRIGX VIGW na 2 4 1 6 SS o a A 2 AZ NITIES WEN ruleta rival olla treo lain idiotez lord 2 4 2 1 As o A 2 4 2 2 A a EAN 2 4 2 3 A A 2 ADA Report Scheduler cerrarle 2 4 2 4 1 Scheduled Report Properties WiNdOW ccccccccccoconcccnnncconnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenan 2
119. Browse for Folder dialog box will be displayed Look through the directories on your PC and select required project folder to be added then click on the OK button The new project providing it contains valid project files will be added to the List of registered projects To remove projects from the list From the Open Project window click on the More gt gt button to display the Project management section From the List of registered projects click on and highlight the project to be removed Page 143 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 Click on the Remove from list button A window is displayed asking you for confirmation Click on the Yes button to remove the project or click on the No button to abort the operation gt To rename a project 1 From the Open Project window click on the More gt gt button to display the Project management section 2 From the List of registered projects click on and highlight the project to be renamed 3 Click on the Rename button The Rename Project window is displayed 4 Type in the new name for the project then click on the OK button gt To backup a project The Backup function allows you to backup any registered project on your C Program Files Datac Projects directory and save it as a backup file to a directory on your hard drive or to a floppy disc or CD You may also backup a project you have on a floppy disc or CD and save it as a
120. EA WIM GOW so id ici 194 POMS WWI O Wie oa ENES 203 Man MEMU ta dl id dd a 204 Miscelaneos WIN Wii da 191 PFO GUIG LINO WINDOW coo see isc 197 PO SC WIM O Wisin io 198 A A gee da adesated 188 OTS el al 8 05 0 9 Lc wena ete tant me ee ie ener A A re 208 US OV OO o A E 220 ZONE EGIIOlWINGOW Artois adsl 214 ZONE Settings WINKOW 2 ccccescccceseeececeesescceds ena 212 Configure Network parameters cccccccccccesesssseceeceeceaeeeeeeeeeeesueessseeeeeesseeeaaseeeeessseaaaseeeeeeessseasangasss 198 O A A eee 184 Connecting to ihe RealFlex Sey Cr aia a a A A 13 151 FO ATOM MD A Rata aes mans oad dame eaicig dae aes 109 Page 236 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual A ee ee er ee 44 62 68 109 A E ee ee eee ee ee 46 Control in progress Display Indicator oooconnccnnnccccononnnncnnnnnononanccnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnnnnnnnnns 44 Control Sequence Language PFOCESSOS cccccccccececeeeeseececeeeeseeeeeceeeeseueeseeeeeeessssaeaeseeeeeeessaaaeeseeeees 79 Gontrol Tag Display MICO o colosal da 44 Control Tag WINKOW cccccccccececeeeeseeceeeececaaeesseceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeusseeeeeesessaaaeeeeeeeeessssaaeeesenees 62 Control type Status tagS cccccccccsssseecceeceeeeeseeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeesseaeseeeeeeeeesessaaagesss 109 Controllable Analog tags ccccccssssesccccccceeeseseceeeeeesaeeeeeeceeeeessaseeeeeeeee
121. EWocccuinn nana 2 1 1 STARTING THE FLEX VIEW PROGRAM c0 ccssseececceccccesseeeeeeeeseccasseneeeeesceccasseneeeeesescceseaeeesssscosess 2 12 WeEEX VIEW APPLICATION WINDOW e ed 2 1 2 1 For Microsoft Windows look and feel ooooncncconcoccconconcccocnnconanoncnnoncnonnncnnonnanonconancnnnnanens 2 y oe GUE BA eee oo OO 05 oR eee tee tect cee ete ee re ete eerie a nee eee ee ee eee eee ee 2 Te A Oe e Al a PE CAE E e EOI A R 2 122 For RealFlex4 lOOK anG eo ni odia enon 2 Mio MIR TUALSCREENS ti aciendo T N 2 1 3 1 Displaying a Auto Hide Virtual Screens WINdOW cccccccccoccccnnnccccnnnnnncnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnonononanenns 2 1 3 2 To add Display thumbnails to a grid segment oooocccccccnocncnncconnncconcconnnnconcnonnnconononanccnnennnnns 2 a TOSO Mamando CISDIAVS A ee eee seca Ses 2 1 3 4 Setting Virtual Screen Paramete Scenina a i N ee a 2 1 3 5 Resizing the Virtual Screens WINKOW ooooonccnnncccccccoccnnnnconononannnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonononannennnnnss 2 tA DESKTOPLLAYQUES a N NN E V eines 2 1 4 1 To enable the Desktop Layout feature ooncccccccoconccnccccnoncnnnnnnnnonnnnonannnnnononancnnnnnonancnnnnnnas 2 142 TOSave a Display La yO Uy EA a a ADAC 2 1 4 3 To delete a saved Display Layos taci n 2 144 Tochange an existing Display Layout ccoconccccocnnonccconncoconnnnonnnnonnonanonnonannnnononononnaneness 2 t45 Tosel ct a saved Display Lao laminar rea bean 2 1 5 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS WITH
122. Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual DATAC Technologies LTD Flex View V3 1 Help Manual FILENAME Flex View V3 1 Help Manual 5000 0001 0040 E doc Document History 24 05 2003 D C Wicks Initial draft 1 00b 17 10 2003 D C Wicks Updated for Version 3 0 2 Build 7 263 21 8 15 03 2004 D C Wicks Updated for Version 3 1 0 Build 8 1 0 10 1 00d 03 06 2004 D C Wicks Updated for Version 3 1 1 Build 8 1 1 43 Enhanced security 22 07 2004 D C Wicks Datac Technologies Ltd July 04 All rights reserved If you are aware of any error in this document or wish to inform Datac of any non compliance found whilst using this software please mail or fax it to one of the following address DATAC Technologies Ltd 22001 North Park Drive DATAC Control International Ltd Unit 19 Suite 200 Kingwood TEXAS 77339 USA Enterprise Center Dublin 2 Ireland Tel 1 281 348 1038 Fax 1 281 348 2340 Tel 353 1 6717377 Fax 353 1 6717470 Email sales datac technologies com Email sales datac control com www datac technologies com www datac control com Page 1 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Page 2 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Flex View V3 1 Help Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS PRE PAG A vex cusweseesssuaneusveudeaewsseseeueauceusussaes 2 RELATE O DOCUMENTS o dia 2 SOFTWARE INFORMA MON dara od 2 CONVENTONS tdo adas 2 MOUSE CONVENTIONS kasasta lei dada ste 2 1 FEEXVIEW OPERATIONS OVERVI
123. Flex View receives the list of historical points from the RealFlex server You can update the data in the list of historical points by clicking on the button in the Action toolbar The significance of each column in the display is PCU The name of the PCU Type The database type Analog Meter or Status Page 155 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Tag The tag name The following informational fields are editable from the Historical Data Point Maintenance window State Displays the current recording state of the point either ON or OFF To change the state position the pointer over the State field to be edited right click and select On or Off from the pop up menu Historical data collection can be disabled or turned Off without affecting the data previously collected for a point This can be useful when a point or sensor is temporarily out of service or is generating invalid values Lifetime The amount of time for which historical data is to be saved to disk Outdated data is removed daily To change the numeric increment value select the database point to be edited then from the Action toolbar click on the E button This will open the Edit Point Maintenance dialog box allowing you to change the Lifetime value of the field To change the text increment value position the pointer over the Lifetime field to be edited right click then select the new increment value from
124. K 2 CAPACITY Date Tagged 16 Dec 2003 15 37 02 Operator Name demo This pump is not being used for the next 5 days due to maintenance J Simmel Microsoft Windows look and feel Page 66 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual of CONTROL TAGGING SAVE CLEAR RW_1 ES START EUNE 1 Date Tagged J4 alou Z553 UE IZ Operator Nane BEIT This pump is not being used for the next 5 days due to maintenance J Sins RealFlex4 look and feel The control tagging window will display the PCU name tag name the date accessed and the operator login To enter information and apply tagging begin typing When the message is complete click on the Add button To edit information and reapply tagging edit existing information When the message is complete click on the Save button To clear the message notification click on the Clear button You will be prompted to confirm the clearing of the tag with a Yes No selection To abort changes and close the window click on the x or button in the title bar of the window Once a control tag has been placed the value of the associated point will display with a purple C Whenever an operator tries to access a control tagged point to send a control the information placed in the Control Tag window will display No controls can be issued on a control tagged point until the control tag is removed Once a control tag is placed it can be cleared or edite
125. L DELIVERY PRESSURE ALARM GENERATION DISABLED Ew RILL1 TAHE 1 CAPACITY MAHUAL OVERWAITE REMOVED EY AIL 1 TAHK 1 CAPACITY MAHUAL 7 07530e 43 gt 7 6 5oRe 435 m OS ca co m0 St a 6S li ole mo O me Ca a Lal AS sas Ai Le r r ca loo Qu a me ca mo me malla oo m Microsoft Windows look and feel ej HISTORICAL EVENT SUMMARY FOR RTU_i 4 _ PAGE UP PAGE DOWN OPTIONS PAGE 1 OF 85 WVFMOYOO HH hbi Ss Hs AI PCU DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS TYPE RAIU_1 DELIVERY PRESSURE ALARM GENERATION ENABLED AI 1 DELIVERY PRESSURE ALARM GENERATION DISABLED RIO i IAHk 1 CAPACITY HAHUAL OVERMATIE REMOVED RIU i IHK 1 CAPACITY HANUAL 7 07530 43 gt 7 07 n mo co mo LL 7 Lal J LU mu m Lal m r Lal Lal Lu Lal Lu m 4 Lu s gt Lal LL e RealFlex4 look and feel The first page of the Historical Event Summary display is requested by clicking on the Main menu button selecting RealFlex Summaries and then selecting the Historical Alarm Event option The summary is automatically generated by RealFlex and allows quick operational reference to historical operations of the system Thus the operator who must leave the control center to perform other duties can upon his her return easily review events that occurred during his her absence By default this multi page summary display contains a reverse chronologically ordered list of the latest 512 alarms events or controls
126. M DT_O00_05 MAIN STATUS DI OO 06 Flow In Tank 2 DI OOO Flow In Tank 1 DYT_O0_06 CIGITAL INPUT 3 01200209 DISITAL INPUT 9 0100210 DIGITAL INPUT 10 c01200_11 DIGITAL INPUT 11 0100212 DIGITAL INPUT 12 An expandable collapsible hierarchy of Tag types Analog Meters Status and Tanks and all associated tags for the selected PCU is displayed in this window Tag types with a symbol to the left of them can be expanded to show all tags for that type Clicking the symbol next to a Tag type will collapse the item and hide the detail Note Tag types must be expanded when making selections 3 You may select all Tags or a selected set of Tags A tick in the check box to the left of the Tag name indicates that it has been selected To select All click on the button Conversely to de select all click on the El button To choose individual Tags click on the check box to the left of the required Tag name to toggle between selected and unselected To invert the selection e change all selected to unselected and all unselected to selected click on the x button 4 After making your selections click on the Apply the filtering button You will be returned to the Zone Editor window where a yellow diamond shaped symbol is placed in the bottom right hand corner of the PCU check box as shown below le ATU_3 Page 217 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To select PCU s and tags by
127. No Cancel selection The RealFlex database will be updated and you will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window where the new PCU s will now be included in the list of PCU s To Edit a PCU record Click on and highlight the PCU to be edited Click on the button or position the pointer over the selected PCU click right mouse and select Edit PCU from the pop up menu The PCU Properties dialog box will appear PCU Properties PEU Name RTU_1 Description PLU SCAN Address f Channel lz Active pe Cancel Edit the PCU Description Address Channel number and make the PCU active tick in check box or inactive no tick in check box as required Click on the OK button The RealFlex database will be updated and you will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window gt To Delete a PCU record PCU s can be deleted just as any other database data point type from the RealFlex database l Click on and highlight the PCU to be deleted Page 88 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Click on the x button or position the pointer over the selected PCU click right mouse and select Delete PCU from the pop up menu If there are no associated datapoints defined for the selected PCU you will be prompted to confirm deletion with a Yes No selection If any defined database points are associated with the selected PCU a Confirm Act
128. P connection to the RealFlex QNX server Related documents The following documents are related to the use of the Flex View program Flex View Getting Started Document reference number 5000 0001 0050 Flex Builder Help Manual Document reference number 5000 0001 0041 Flex CFE Help Manual Document reference number 5000 0001 0060 Flex Gallery Help Manual Document reference number 5000 0001 0042 Flex Start Help Manual Document reference number 5000 0001 0043 Flex Language Help Manual Document reference number 5000 0001 0044 Flex Converter Help Manual Document reference number 5000 0001 0045 Software information This Help Manual describes facilities contained in the Flex View application program version 3 1 1 Page 7 of 249 Ds f 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this document The beginning of a sequence of instructions 1 2 3 etc A set of steps in a sequence of instructions A single step in an instruction Highlight This term defines the action of moving the cursor to illuminate an alphabetic or numeric character word or phrase to initiate a procedure OR Ina sequence of instructions the text OR is used to indicate a choice of steps Either execute the one step before the OR or the one step after it Mouse conventions Within the text the left mouse button is assumed for all mouse operations unless otherwise stated Click Press and relea
129. REALFLEX SERVER 00sscccceeeeceeeseeceeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeessaeaeeeeeeeeeseaas 2 1 5 1 To find out who else is logged onto the project coooncccnccconncnoncconocnncncnnnonnnonocononcnnnnnos 2 1 5 2 To send a message to logged ON users coooonccncccccncnnccccnnnconcnononnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 2 1 5 3 Receiving a message from a logged ON USEFL cccccseeeeceeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeseaeeeeessaaees 2 1 6 SETTING THE SERVER TIME AND DATE oca osos 2 7 USING FLEX MIEWWINDOW Serrano aO 2 1 7 1 ISP Starr ren Doa poo a NNcOn oauencsaieaetasst 2 1 7 2 Resizing and moving the Main Flex View WiINdOW ooccccooncnccconcnncccnccncononcnnnnncononnanennononens 2 1 7 3 Resizing and moving Display or Summary WINKOWS occccccoccnccconcnnconcnnnonanonnonononnononcnnnnnos 2 1 7 4 Panning and Zooming within displays ccooonnnncconncncononcncnnoncncnnnnonconanonnnnnncnnonnnnnncnnannnos 2 A USNO SCHON DANS tl E 2 1 7 6 Closing Displays and other WiNdOWS ccoocccncccccnncnnnccnnoncnnnonnnnncnnnnononncnnnonannnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnns 2 1 7 7 Minimizing and maximizing the Main Flex View WINdOW occooooonccccccoccconccononcconcnonnnccnncnnnnos 2 1 7 8 Minimizing and maximizing Displays and other WINdOWS cooonnccncccnnnnccnccnnnncccnccnnnccnnenonnns 2 1 7 9 Adjusting the width of the COlUMNS occcccccccncnnnccccnoncnncnnnnncononnnnncnnnonnnancnnnnnnnancnnnnonanennnnnnnns 2 AI A A a odie Pein
130. RODOS iste cass et cecal al 129 Settimo Or language neina ce Eee A eed a ca et ad 194 ZONE SO A O 212 User cannot change password Enhanced Security ccccooonccnncccconncnnccononnnnononancnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnennnnnanenns 182 User Defined Report Scheduled reports ccccccoooccnnnccncccccconnncnnnncnnnonononcnnnnnnnnononancnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnononoss 130 User FuUncUon DINAMICO 52 User Functions window Configuration Options MeNU oooocccnnnccccccnonncnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnonononannnnnnnnonononans 208 User is disabled Enhanced Security cccccoccnnconcccononcnnnocononcncnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnannnnonennnas 182 User is locked out Enhanced security ccccccccsssseceecceeeececcceeueceecseuseceeecaeaueceeessaaeeeesseaaeeesssaeaaass 182 User Logon Logoff WiIMGOW se titi siii 37 39 User must change password at next login Enhanced Security cccoocccococoncnnoconcnnconnnonononenononanenoss 182 User Options Configuration Options MENU occccccocccnnccnnnccncnononnccnnnnonnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnss 220 Wser prole estr a a a io 220 Saving a O ia 220 Usmo Flex VIEW WINDOWS pt bec ate cane ees ete a a a a hGhal icy 28 o A eaten O A PR 28 31 IEA co A A 128 Pint Alarm Page carrito do DAA tE NA E 129 di A e aa sauacduasneot a aoe ty acaate ts 129 CLON dl glo o APC O USE A 129 Project Jolla pic otitis dial 137 Remote Modules Help oooccccccoocconcccccoccconcconannnnnn
131. SeS Seeeseeeeereseegeeage ee 5 a o ae pee OS EA EA m H a ite ES ee E ae 14 33 42 49 157 33 A49121 235 Hg 45 14 He 19 Ad 07 32 54 HOW 15 Hoy 15 Hoy 15 Hoy 15 Hoy 15 Hoy 15 A TAHK 1 LEVEL A ree rere Fal FU a ee eee TANK 2 LEVEL 1 eres RAM 95 FUE eee TANK 2 CAPACITY A RAH Ae ioe Ese ear TAME 1 DEL FLOW o gt MIG Sees ali RIU ee ee TANK 2 DEL FLOM Of MLD R k PEUS Ta E DELIVERY PRESSURE ote ey een ewes arate R k In some cases the values of several different datapoints may be plotted each in a different color on the same graph In these cases there may be a description line for each datapoint located directly beneath the display and a different set of scale labels will be displayable for each with the color of each set of scale labels being the same as the color of the corresponding plot Note that the time axis of the graph is reversed with the current system clock time at the left and progressively earlier times as you move to the right If you take a few minutes and watch a trend display you will see the entire plotted trace move to the right with points being added to its left end The length of the period on the graph and the time direction you want the trend to update in is determined when a trend display is first created using one of the Display builders Page 57 of 249 M0 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When a trend display first appears it may be blank This happens if histo
132. The User Functions window from the Configuration Options menu Demand reports The Demand Reports options from the Main menu Edit scratch pad Not used in Flex View Edit password file The Password Maintenance option from the Configuration menu Historical data maintenance The Historical Editor option from the Configuration menu Set date time The Set Server Time Date option from the Utilities menu Report generator The Report Generator option from the Configuration menu Manual overwrite To manually correct the value or state of the database point associated with the poke point Alarm disable To disable alarming for a selected point Exit FlexView The Exit Flex View option from the Main menu To select a user Move the pointer over the list of user names in the hierarchy The pointer will change to a hand and the selected user name will be underlined and change to blue click to select To create a new user 1 Click on the button The Add New User dialog box will appear Add Hew User Mew user IO Mew user Name Apply Close 2 Inthe New user ID field enter a user ID maximum of twelve 12 alphanumeric characters without spaces This will be the name that the user enters when Logging on Page 170 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E 3 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual In the New u
133. U s on the system their Tag types Analog Meters Status and Tanks and all associated tags are displayed in this window Tag types with a symbol to the left of them can be expanded to show all tags for that type Clicking the symbol next to a Tag type will collapse the item and hide the detail To expand collapse the detail for a PCU double click on the EE symbol next to the name of the PCU Note Tag types must be expanded when making selections Page 218 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 5 You may select all Tags or a selected set of Tags A tick in the check box to the left of the Tag name indicates that it has been selected To select All click on the button Conversely to de select all click on the El button To choose individual Tags click on the check box to the left of the required Tag name to toggle between selected and unselected To invert the selection i e change all selected to unselected and all unselected to selected click on the button After making your selections click on the Add to configuration button or if you want to replace an existing selection click on the Replace configuration bution You will be returned to the Zone Editor window where a yellow diamond shaped symbol is placed in the bottom right hand corner of the selected PCU check boxes as shown below le ATU_3 Enable Zoning 1 For a new zone click on the Enable zoning check box
134. Utilities and Configuration menu buttons to display their drop down menus you can choose to show or hide Icons alongside the menu options as shown in the example below Page 14 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E S9 Print Window El Print Preview Print Alarm Page Report Scheduler Set Server Time Date Utilities menu with Icons Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Print Window Print Preview Print alarm Page Report Scheduler Set Server Time Date Utilities menu without Icons 1 Right click anywhere inside the Flex View toolbar to display a pop up menu 2 To Show Icons Click on the Show Icons in Menu option A check mark appears next to the menu item To Hide Icons Click on the Show Icons in Menu option The check mark is removed next to the menu item 1 2 2 For RealFlex4 look and feel A toolbar is displayed along the top of the Flex View application window The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many options and facilities used in Flex View Button mE mu Main Utilities Conf iguration Displays El EJ Flashing 22 11 H1 18 23 16 Bl A 5000 000 1 0040 E Action Alarm sounder silence button Displays the Main menu options Displays the Utilities menu options Displays the Configuration menu options Displays the Select Display window Links you to the on line Help Displays a list of hidden menus after the application window has been reduced in size Indicates
135. a ae 2 Ze IIS DIY UKS caros risotto ln 2 226 DYNAMIC Display TYPOS sia di 2 220 A a hie asus ie a N 2 Cie E PARR WIGTCK PF OMNES atacara in oca 2 22 623 StAlUS POMS ia A A A Ca 2 2204 A A A Satiedomie S 2 PROD o tas cecssccasecn ccecacea A a boatoaaiupitetaat eat ait Canauie nontmeere erm moaned 2 OO e ena E 2 RAS A O A O ata ano aa eaine ee 2 2208 O eae ae ec ann dure eee ee eee sel atin decent Rac ae tee 2 2209 WeD page A a te ds at 2 2 NS A ea ney eee lew fers 2 Zee OM WANMESTAMD oeae aetteianc scene tous aesed ances e cute ncsemeasuacetedaae 2 220 de User FUNCIONS meara a inicia 2 zar Irena Dynamic Dalarnas diia 2 2er Trend Display Modes a a ne ee eee 2 2 2 7 2 Other Trend handling functions available occcccccccnccnnccnnncccnnoonnccnnnnnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 2 23 DYNAMIC DISPLAY CONTROL sra ii 2 2 3 1 Dynamic Display Control Poke PoOiNtS occccccccccccnnncccconconccononncnnnononnnnnnnonnnncnnononannnnnnnnnnos 2 Zo Nel ACKRNoOWledge Alar sisi a cin 2 2 12 Manually Overwrite ota iria ilia ts 2 2013 WISDIAY Alani EVENS la LE 2 2 3 1 4 Display Dynamic Trend Analog and Status points only oooooooniccnnnnininiccccncnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnns 2 231 9 Display Poke Meter points ony a sa 2 ao mo EdtDataDaS O ia ai pacos 2 PT ie dao la ME A e eh es Ga dec nce fa ae vaevagestdiau as eee E O ues 2 2 3 1 8 Control Tagging Analog and Meter points ONly
136. a message has been received from another logged on user A sound accompanying the flashing button may be played if activated via the Miscellaneous options window see Section 4 3 12 4 Indicates communications state with the RealFlex server Clicking on this button you can find out who else is logged onto the project and send receive messages to from logged on users Displays current date and time When not connected to the RealFlex server time displayed will be as set on your PC clock When connected to the RealFlex server time displayed will be the time of the RealFlex server i e local time Minimize button If this button is not displayed then the Allow to minimize check box in the Main Window section of the Application window has not been activated and the operator will not be able to minimize the main Flex View window Page 15 of 249 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 3 Virtual Screens The Virtual Screens window when activated in the Miscellaneous window of the Configuration Options menu see Section 4 3 12 4 is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of a maximized Flex View application window An example is shown below a Virtual Screens If the Virtual Screens window is not visible then its parameters have been set to Auto Hide See Section 1 3 1 Displaying a Auto Hide Virtual Screens window This window contains a grid displaying thumbnail representations of selected Displays Each grid s
137. aced in these fields A type 0 meter will recount for Current Net start from zero when the value goes to zero in the field A field determined rollover Type 1 Calculates a delta value by subtracting the previous value from the field device from the current value This value will then be added to the CURRENT GROSS field The delta value will then be multiplied by the FACTOR and UNITS PULSE and added to the CURRENT NET YEARLY MONTHLY DAILY HOURLY and LAST HOUR fields A type 1 meter will not reset the Current Net field to zero until the Rollover value specified in the database is reached This Rollover value does not have to match the value specified in the field device A software defined rollover Type 4 The value received from the field is added to the CURRENT GROSS field This reading is multiplied by FACTOR and UNITS PULSE and then added to the CURRENT NET field Type 5 Utilizes American Petroleum Institute processing See Section 3 5 3 2 Type 6 The value read from the field is treated as a delta value If the new field value is greater than the rollover then the new value is treated as the delta The difference between the last good value and the rollover is ignored in this meter type For example if the rollover value is 1000 and the LAST GOOD is 900 when a current value of 100 is read in from the remote device the delta value added is 100 not 200 The HOURLY DAILY MONTHLY and YEARLY fields are also maintained MAX RAW is
138. ags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU Database Editor 0 Ei Tags for ATU_1 PCU Tag editing 9 5 1 3 A Type Filter o E a igi i EAT _00_00 ANALE TANK 1 LEVEL Ea 000l ANALO TANK 2 LEVEL Ea o_o AMAL Cs TAMK 1 CAPACITY Ea ooo ANALOG TANK2 CAPACITY Ea o_o ANALOG TANK 1 DEL FLOW Ea _oo0_o0s5 AMAL Cts TAMK 2 DEL FLOW Ea o_o AMAL Cts DELIVERY PRESSURE Ea oo_ 07 AMAL Cts OUTFLOW TANK 1 ES a1_o0_o8 AM ALCS OUTFLOW TANK 2 Ea 0009 ANALOG COMBINED FLOW Ema 00 10 ANALOG Solar Panel Voltage hal ie Total PEU count 7 Total point count 861 Ar 5 74 MaA Ti 2 The Add and Delete Tags buttons in the Tag editing toolbar are only visible for Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access gt To filter data by Tag type You can filter the display by using the Type filter buttons in the top right hand side of the window Choices are ll All types Analogs ay Meters Status al Tanks Page 83 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To return to the List of project PCU window Double click on the BH icon in the top left hand side of the window 3 3 3 To Add Duplicate Replicate Edit and Delete PCU s PCU editing can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Database Editor List of project PCU window is us
139. alFlex Summaries and then selecting Communications from the menu The resulting multi page display will list all PCUs defined in the system lel ES Communications Summary a Ack Page 4 Page Down Page Up PAGE 1 OF 1 PM ON TOTAL VALID RE NO DATA COMM PCU NAME ADDR REPLY OFF SCANS SCANS TRIES RESF ERROR EFF Microsoft Windows look and feel A Page 47 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Bf COMMUNICATIONS SUMMARY sf ACK PAGE PAGE DOWN PAGE UP PAGE 1 OF 1 A PCU NAME ADDR REFLY OFF SCANS SCANS TRIES RESP ERROR EFF x ON TOTAL VALID RE NO DATA COMM RealFlex4 look and feel Traverse through the allocated pages using the PageUp and PageDown keys or the Page Up and Page Down on screen buttons These statistics indicate the following TOTAL SCANS The total number of scan requests VALID SCANS The number of valid responses RETRIES The number of retries NO RESP The number of no replies DATA ERROR The number of data errors COMM EFF A communications efficiency calculated as a percentage based on the number of valid error free responses versus the total number of scan requests 100 corresponds to perfect communication and 0 corresponds to no communication To change the scan status ON OFF state for a PCU listed in the Communications Summary display click on the ON OFF entry to be changed a pop up menu will be displayed Select Turn On or Turn Off as d
140. all Project PCU s to a CSV file a 1 Click on the El button The Save as CSV file dialog box will appear 2 Indicate the location and the name of the file to be exported the file name can differ from the default database name entered then click on the Save button The Save as type will always be CSV File csv You will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window To import a CSV file into the database Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can use this option Elx 1 Click on the il button The Import CSV file dialog box will appear 2 Locate the file to be imported then click on the Open button The Files of type will always be CSV File csv The Database Modification window will appear displaying the progress of PCU or Project Tag data being updated on the RealFlex server Database Modification Adding tag TEST TN_00_00 A Page 90 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual After the PCU or Project Tag data has been updated you will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window 3 3 5 To Warmstart a PCU When configuring new PCU s or re configuring existing PCU s during online operation it may be desirable to warmstart the I O driver s that are currently executing on a specific channel This allows the I O driver to rebuild its scan tables and pick up all information entered since the last time RealFlex was r
141. alog box will appear Security Group Maintenance Database builder Access disabled CAT related utilities Access disabled Send controls Access disabled amp Server exit Access disabled User functions Access disabled Demand reports Access disabled Edit scratch pad Access disabled Edit password file Access disabled Historical data maintenance Access disabled Set datetime Access disabled Report generator Access disabled Manual overwrite Access disabled Alarm disable Access disabled amp Exit Flesview Access disabled Group Name roupt Description Maintenance O oee 6 Inthe Group Name field enter a name for the group maximum of thirteen 13 alphanumeric characters including spaces 7 Inthe Description field enter a description for the group maximum of thirty two 32 characters including spaces 8 At this point you can set the access rights to certain Flex View functions or you can set them at a later date See To set change user access level below for details 9 Click on the Apply button Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to add the user group in the RealFlex database You will be returned to the Password Maintenance window where the new group Name and description will be added to the hierarchy gt To remove a user group Note If the group has user accounts assigned to it then you must first remove the users or assign them to another group befor
142. alue The graph may be scaled or unscaled as the implementor desires The color of an analog bar can be set to reflect the database point s current alarm state lf a specific color was chosen during Display implementation the graph will always display in the selected color DESCRIPTION This mask will display an extended description that can better describe a display 2 2 6 2 Meter Points VALUE For meter database dynamics the value field is used to display the current net value of the selected point the units associated hourly daily monthly yearly accumulations factor last hour yesterday gross value and raw value TIME This type of meter dynamic display element is used to display calculated unit run times which are accumulated by the calculation processor For example a time display might be used to monitor how long a pump has been turned on so that preventive maintenance can be performed after a factory specified period of operation BAR A bar type dynamic display element consists of a bar graph representing an meter database point s current value The graph may be scaled or unscaled as the implementor desires If no color is specified for the bar graph the graph will display in the defined alarm colors If a color is selected for the graph during display implementation the graph will always display in the selected color DESCRIPTION This mask will display an extended description that can better describe a display Pag
143. ance look and feel of any other Microsoft Windows program For users connected to a RealFlex4 server and wishing to retain the RealFlex4 QNX look and feel as used in previous versions of Flex View the user can switch to the RealFlex4 QNX look and feel via the User Interface section of the Environment options window Title Bar Toolbar Communication status with RealFlex o Flex iew Demo Alpha 8 server E main utities Configuration Displays User name banner Desktop Layout window Display area Virtual Screens Alarm Banner 7 Unacknowledged Alarms Alarm banner Figure 1 Flex View application window Microsoft Windows look and feel A Page 9 of 249 A 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Toolbar a Communication status with RealFlex Ef mao Jue Nities configuration f Displays 7 mG 10 05 2004 12 12 53 LA server Nodes State for Project Demo Alpha 8 Nodel User name banner Desktop Layout window Display area Virtual Screens Flaw VI i EVA Y FOR irtual Screens Alarm banner Figure 2 Flex View application window RealFlex4 look and feel The Main and Displays menus provide access to the most commonly used screens and displays The Utilities and Configuration menus allow the user to configure and access data and functions within the system Flex View operations are normally carried out while viewing one or more of the Displays that are cr
144. ancel If you click on the Cancel button after you have input data into a window the data is not saved and you are returned to the previous window Page 34 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual If you enter data and then use a navigation button to go to another data input window on the next level down the data you entered is automatically saved lf you return to the window that you used the navigation button from the data still appears in the window as you entered it If you now use the Cancel button to dismiss the window the data you previously entered is still saved l Some data input windows have spinner buttons for selecting items for further definition If you click repeatedly on the up or down arrow button the selection will appear in the field to the left of the arrows in ascending or descending order as appropriate The spinners also respond to the keyboard up and down arrows Some fields have a down arrow hd button Clicking on this button will display a drop down list of choices or in the case of a Date field a calendar for choosing a date 1 7 13 Setting Date and Time fields Some Flex View windows and dialog boxes have Date fields or 092005 gt and Time fields 11 35 4 i From these fields you can reset the date and time as required gt To set a Date Method 1 Click on and highlight the portion of the date and type in the required date Shown in the format DD MM YYYY Method 2 1 Click o
145. and this will program the Hardware Key to enable the Flex View product For full details on registering see the Flex View Getting Started Manual supplied on the CD with the Flex View application To visit the Datac Technologies Limited WEB site Click on the Web Server button Your WEB browser will be opened and the Datac WEB site will be dialled gt To send us an e mail 1 Click on the E mail Support button 2 When prompted say Yes to copying the contents of the Application summary to the clipboard Your e mail application will be opened where the Datac contact addresses will be entered automatically Page 198 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 Paste the text from the clipboard to your e mail adding information about your problems 4 Send the e mail to us in the normal way 4 3 12 7 Project window Configuration Options menu The Project window as shown below allows you to configure the Network parameters for connecting to the RealFlex server You can set these parameters for Node 1 Main connection and if required Node 2 Standby connection You can configure a number of Network connections for example if the RealFlex is a fail over system a second IP address backup node would be required Flex iew Options El Application P roject Sounds pu Colors E dit settings hor Node gt Miscellaneous f n H Environment G Enable Node Product Info Network interface
146. ank level when a low alarm condition is reported HI HI Fields Feet Meters Decimal value max 99 feet or 32 meters which constitutes a high high alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value reaches the high high limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Inches Centi Decimal value max 11 inches or 99 centimeters which constitutes the fractional foot meter portion of the high high alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value reaches the high high limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Alarm Color Color to display alarm message and dynamic value representation of the referenced tank level when a high high alarm condition is reported LOW LOW Fields Feet Meters Decimal value max 99 feet or 32 meters which constitutes a low low alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value becomes less than the low low limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Inches Centi Decimal value max 11 inches or 99 centimeters which constitutes the fractional foot meter portion of the low low alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value reaches the low low limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Alarm Color Color to display alarm message and dynamic value representation of the referenced tank level when a low low alarm condition
147. ar or is grayed out then the Enable Alarm printing option in the Alarms window of the Configuration Options menu has not been activated no tick in check box gt To print the Alarm page From the Utilities menu select the Print Alarm Page option The contents of the Alarm page will be sent to your printer 4 2 4 Report Scheduler The Report Scheduler option is used to schedule and execute user and predefined reports on a timed basis Reports may be sent to the printer defined in the Configuration menu Printer Config option sent to file or sent to an e mail address Prior to using the Report Scheduler option user reports must already be saved under a name or title Page 129 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To access the Report Scheduler From the Utilities menu select the Report Scheduler option The Report Scheduler window will appear 20 Report Scheduler 1 x 4 Create 3 Remove p r Properties Time Base Schedule Nest Aun Time Status Last Run Time Last Result El Daily Flows Local PE At minute 10 of every hour Report running disabled Never Historical Local PE At 200 on Tue of every 0827 02 02 00 00 Never El Meter Sum Local PE At minute O of every hour 08224012 20 00 00 The Report Scheduler window displays a list of scheduled reports displaying the Report name or title the time base used the time it is scheduled to run the next time it will be r
148. art time is reached Page 60 of 249 A l 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To pan forward place the cursor on the leftmost time label and click the select button Panning is disabled if historical data collection is not enabled for the database point s being graphed and when panning is invoked the trace is lost for all points in the trend for which historical data collection is not in place Trend Point Description Options The Point Description is the information displayed below the trend area detailing the PCU Name Point Description Point Value Units and Point Value Displayed RAW MAX MIN or AVG Using the Point Description line the operator can choose to view all points defined for the trend a subset of points or an average minimum maximum or raw values for analog points gt To View a Subset of Trended Values To change the display values for a selected point right click on the far right column which displays the current definition of the point i e RAW MIN MAX or AVG As you click the point display type will change from the defined display type to display Pen OFF and the point in the trend display will disappear You may turn off all points or only selected points To turn a point back on right click on the point display type again and the display type will return and the point will reappear in the trend display area By default when a trend is opened all points are displayed To Chan
149. ata to the clipboard below gt To save selected data point s to a CSV file 1 Click on and highlight the data point s to be saved as a CSV file To select a single point click on and highlight the point To select a group of points that are next to each other click on and highlight the first point of the group hold down the Shift key then scroll down the list and select the last point of the group To select individual points which are not next to each other hold down the Ctrl key then select each point as required 2 From the Import Export toolbar click on the El button The Save as CSV file dialog box will appear 3 Indicate the location and the name of the file to be exported the file name can differ from the default name entered then click on the Save button The Save as type will always be CSV File csv You will be returned to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window To save all data points to a CSV file E 1 1 From the Import Export toolbar click on the El button The Save as CSV file dialog box will appear 2 Indicate the location and the name of the file to be exported the file name can differ from the default name entered then click on the Save button The Save as type will always be CSV File csv You will be returned to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window To import a CSV file into the Historical Editor Ely 1 From the Import Export toolbar clic
150. ation and applicable hardware data sheet Subtype This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable hardware data sheet Level conversion type 0 No conversion required 1 L amp J Tank Gauging interface 2 Incremental Strapping tables English 3 Strapping tables with API Volume Corrections See Section 3 5 5 3 API volume correction for Tanks 4 Incremental Strapping tables Metric For level conversion type 2 3 or 4 refer to Section 3 5 5 2 Edit Create Tank Strapping Tables Fractions per inch If the level conversion type is 2 or 3 indicating strapping tables in English units then this refers to the precision of the data to be entered in the table Click on the 1 button and select required option from the list The two allowable responses are 8 which signifies that a volume is to be entered for every 8th of an inch and 16 which signifies that a volume is to be entered for every 16th of an inch See Section 3 5 5 2 Edit Create Tank Strapping Tables Max volume Decimal value max 9999999 representing the maximal tank product volume In the Max level section Feet Meters Decimal value max 99 feet or 32 meters representing maximal tank product level in feet or meters Inches Centi Decimal value max 11 inches or 99 centimeters representing the maximal fractional foot me
151. backup file to your hard drive 1 From the Open Project window click on the More gt gt button to display the Project management section 2 From the List of registered projects click on and highlight the project to be backed up 3 Click on the Backup button The Backup Project window will appear Backup Project Path settings Project path C Program Files Datac Projects DemoDublins Save as C Program Files UA TAC les ViewsDemoD ubli Path for restore C Program Files DatacProjects Demolublins Archive operation log Page 144 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual In the Project path field the path of the project you selected in the Open Project window will have already been entered If you want to backup a different project you have on your hard drive floppy disc or CD click on the button on the right of this field The Browse for Folder dialog box will appear where you can select the Project file required In the Save as field a default path and File name will have been entered automatically If you want to backup the Project to another path and File name click on the button on the right of this field The Save As dialog box will appear Indicate the location and the name of the file to be saved save as a Flex Win Backup Files fwa file the file name can differ from the original name then click on the Save button You will be retur
152. base point to hold the densitometer reading A density switch point is specified in the mtrtbl file to differentiate between the two products The meter factor selected by the data processing is multiplied by the gross barrels to get net barrels The mtrtbl record structure for calculation Type 3 is as follows Meter_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Calculation type 3 Density switch constant The density at which the processor switches from the lower density product s meter factor to the higher density product s meter factor Product_density_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the current product s density Lo density MF_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the lower density product s meter factor Hi_density_MF_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the higher density product s meter factor Sample mtrtbl entry for a meter using calculation Type 3 METER 5 STATION 7 3 6225 MTR5_DENSITY MF_MIX_BUTN MF 12 NGAS Page 105 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 Non temperature compensated Meters with one meter factor and a temperature compensation factor CTL Net Gross MF CTL a Variation 1 using API subroutines TAB5B and TAB6B The system implementor manually enters the meter factor into an analog pseudopoint and creates scanned analog points for the product gravity and temperature The CTL is calc
153. be translated at display time to indicate the tank number if L amp J Tank Gauging interface is used If the field device does not support reporting of tank number values the tank tag name will be displayed If a color has been assigned to a tank tag name via the Product Editor the status value will display in the defined color when in normal range If there is no association made via the Product Editor the status value will display in black When alarm limits are reached the status will reflect the type of alarm and the associated color as defined in the Database Editor ALARM STATUS This mask will be translated at display time to live data indicating the tank s alarm state If a color has been assigned to a tank tag name via the Product Editor the status value will display in the defined color when in normal range If there is no association made via the Product Editor the status value will display in black When alarm limits are reached the status will reflect the type of alarm and the associated color as defined in the Database Editor 2 2 6 5 Trends A trend display is a dynamically updated graph depicting a database point s numerical value plotted against time For further details please refer to Section 2 2 7 Trend Dynamic Data 2 2 6 6 PID The PID dynamic display type is a graphically simulated PID Proportional Integral Derivative loop controller faceplate An example is shown below Page 54 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E
154. by a blank Edit menu button name field Click on the Insert Submenu Please enter a caption for the item Jew Cancel Type in the caption for the sub menu item This name will appear in the sub menu Click on the OK button You will be returned to the User Functions window where the name of the sub menu will be displayed in the Edit menu button name field To return to the parent menu click on the Return to Parent Menu button To the right of a Menu button in the parent menu a F is displayed to show that a sub menu exists Add commands to a button or sub menu Click on the Le Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy Click on the Insert Command button The Command Properties window will appear Page 210 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Command Properties Command AAA ed Description Execute specified user function at server Functor E Arguments H Menu item caption Execute User Function cancel In the Commanad field Execute User Function will be displayed 3 Click on the E button to the right of the Function field The Select Remote Procedure window will appear which will list by name each User Function defined in the RealFlex system You will note that User Function names are presented alphabetically If the window Is full use the
155. cccccssseececeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesseeaeeseeeeeesssaaaeeeeeeess 163 Current State Of reports cccccccssssseeececeeceeeeeseecceeeeesaesseeeeeeeesaeesseeeeeeesssaaaaseceeeeeessaeaaeeeeeeeeesasaaaesss 163 Report Scheduler Utilities Menu oooconccnnncccconoonnccnnnncononononncnnnnnononnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnns 129 Report Scheduler properties Window 2 cc ciccccsecesesceecseasccccesseeseceesccceneseceeecsecccceseeeecsucssccessensenss 130 FIC OOM VICWEM sect tusarencausanete isan un diesen gansta a E ieatara ae beens E 186 FNC OIG wah sanctastvar nado ada 7 FOC REDON ia oroie nl nalts Musso clas code alli anata E to nec take Ds ci os 120 129 RE EIEE e EEEE A EEE A E E EA A A eae pees ate eae seen rodas dl 120 129 Scheduled A A 129 SAI ANS oa 122 Sending Flex Report Files to the RealFlex Server ooccccccccccccooonccnncnccocooonccnnnonononannnnnnnnnnnonononnnnos 166 A A A oansiodd adttayee ieee saan tock 129 WIS Te ae A 120 Reports Update Timestamp reSetting cccccssccccccssssecececsessececesesecececseaeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeaesecessaaeeeesessanaaes 219 Reset Timestamp TIMINGS ideas 219 PRC A A gata tala A 57 Vila Screen parametro A 16 Resizing Toolbars Flex View application WINGOW occcocooonccnncccnonccnncnononcnononnancnnnnnnnanennnnonnnnennnnonanens 13 DIS DI AY Said Miehdad a A 28 29 SLIMMING SS tii encia 28 29 Virtua O ESAS WINGO We iD a eae voce varanasi EAS A
156. cccncccnoncconcnononcnncnonancnnnononancnns 191 Received from other logged ON USETS oooocccccccnnccnnccccnonnnncnononcnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnnnns 23 Sending to other logged ON USES ooooncccnnncccccoonncnnnncnconononennnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnannnnnss 23 MESSAGES Recipiente id 134 Meters SOntol WINGO W aida it 62 68 10218 00010 6 OPIO OEA In eee eee nee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee 52 95 A O A 100 PE dia 100 Microsoft Excel CSV files Importing and Exporting ooooccccnncccccccoonccnnnnononononcnnnnnonnnnanonennnnnnnos 89 154 Microso t OUNOOK EXPOS S o e du ao 134 Microsoft Windows PC RUNNINQ cccccccccccnncccccncconccononnconnnnnonnconnnonnnncnnonnnnnnnnononnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnss 9 A A e IN O 57 Mi EU Analog ad Suri iia daa roda 96 MIN RAW audible Alarm Types ccccccsssseceeeceeseceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaseeeeesseeseeesessaaeeeeeesaaaeeeees 44 Anal g TiO AP OS e OOO A a e a a 96 Mi a a S 44 96 Minimize button Flex View application window cccccsssecccccsseeeceeecseeseeeeeeseeeeeeessseeeeeeeesseaseeessaaeeenees 13 MINIMA WINA OW atiende creia iba tidad lia atic a 28 31 32 Miscellaneous window Configuration OptiONS Menu ccooooonnccnnnncccnnconnncnnnnnonononannnnnnnnononannnnnnnnononanans 191 Monti accumulatlo n Meter 1AGS isidro dada 100 Moving Toolbar Flex View application WINdOW oocccccconncnnc
157. ccnooncnnccononcconcnnancnnncononncnnnonnnncnnnnnnnanenoss 13 A A ae aN a ea A danas orca Ba 28 29 Page 242 of 249 1 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual N Node 1 amp 2 Seling aira Pe A 198 Nodes state for Pro ECM e a 23 Normal state Status AS aana a a a a a pall a a a 109 Ps Staus LAGS ar a aa a a a eats 109 O OK alarm AUGiblesAlaniiy TYDES ct is 44 MA eii a A A N eee 188 Oldhdata HiStOniCal CAS ld ii A LE LEE A eer aes 154 Omme Hep FIEX VIEW A A E 5 E E E 232 ROAF O 139 Open Dialog box LastorojectalstanU sinaloa dulce ios ici libelo 186 POOG TA oline clic timida idad 142 Opening ANA Closing WINGOWS coito lol 28 32 Operate NME Sta lus ad Srita 109 Operator Workstation Rex VIEW ositos asii 9 Opllons COMMGURAUON Men pasais oasis 185 Ordinary alarm sounder Setting occcccccccccccconncnnnnconnnnnncnnnnnonononanncnnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaannennns 188 Omer logged Om USES esmero nao ntnino a a patas 23 Over the network COMMUNICA IONS ccccccccccccconnccnnnncnnnnnonncnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 9 p Pants Hex VIEW WWI CLOWN Sui its 28 30 FB Ag e a e ee ee eee 57 Fanning POSITION OL GISDIAYS ui a 231 Parameters Virtual Screens oooonccnnncccccononnncnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 16 Password Arguments Command Properties ooocccncccccnconcccnonncnnnononancnnnonnnanennnono
158. ch mtrtbl record must be located in the same PCU The tag names should be entered in upper case letters NOOR OND Each mtrtbl entry specifies the numerical data and associated database fields needed to perform the calculation and each record also specifies one of the calculation types described below 1 Temperature Compensated Meters with one to four products meter factors MFs MF selected according to product type and flow rate MF f product flow rate Net Gross MF For this subtype each product has a meter factor for high flow rate and another for low flow rate In addition to creating an entry for each meter in the mtrtbl file the system implementor needs to enter in the Database Editor the meter factors into unscanned analog database points analog pseudopoints and create a status database point to hold the product type The product type can be entered during realtime in which case the status point should be unscanned a status pseudopoint or it can be received from the field scanned if your hardware supports this feature Page 103 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual The mtrtbl record structure for calculation Type 1 is as follows Meter_tag RTU_tag Calculation type Flow Rate Switch Flow_Rate_tag Product_type_tag No of Meter Factors Lo Rate_1 MF_tag Lo Rate_1 MF_tag Lo Rate _2 MF _tag Lo Rate_3 MF_tag Lo Rate_4 MF _tag Hi_Rate_1_MF_tag Hi_Rate_2 MF_tag Hi_Rate_3_MF_ta
159. check box for the component s you want to reset to the same date and time A tick will appear when selected 2 Set the Date and Time For details please refer to Section 1 7 13 3 Click on the Apply button The time set for the selected component s will be displayed in the appropriate field to the right of the component 4 If you want to change other component timestamps to a different time setting de select any selected components and repeat steps 1 to 3 above After all entries have been made to the Advanced window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes Page 220 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 15 User Options Configuration Options menu The User Options window as shown below allows each user to define the way their desktop layouts are saved and restored between sessions Note The Enable Desktop Layouts option in the Features section of the Miscellaneous window must be active tick in check box before the options in this window will become active and take effect Flex iew Options El Application User Options Sounds 2 Colors Desktop Layout J Mise taneous Use the last user desktop layout at logon from main menu Ask H Environment Product Info El Project al Alarms iW Restore the default desktop layout at logoff Save the user desktop layout at logoff Ask
160. cker to edit these within Excel After the changes have been made you can import the CSV file back into Flex View gt To access the Database Editor From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance Page 89 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Database Editor Of x List of project PCU ecu editing a ay A A a Telemetry editing E Import Export m aL E E FLEX WIN o o El 1 64 Je 64 bo Je 79 Je 64 PLU SCAN 64 Je 64 J o 15 18 3392 5 365 M 162 T 2 E RTU 2 2 ON RTOS 3 On HRT 4 4 On 5 0 He RTUS On He SYSTEM ON Oo E E o PF ah OOO O 0 Total PEU count Total point count 561 gt To save a selected PCU to a CSV file 1 Click on and highlight the PCU to be saved as a CSV file t 2 Click on the El button The Save as CSV file dialog box will appear 3 Indicate the location and the name of the file to be exported the file name can differ from the default name entered then click on the Save button The Save as type will always be CSV File csv You will be returned to the Database Editor List of project PCU window gt To save
161. click on the Y Sena button The message will be transmitted via the Flex Serv application to the selected recipients Page 25 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 5 3 Receiving a message from a logged on user When a message is sent to your console a flashing El button will appear on the Flex View application toolbar A sound accompanying the flashing button may be played if activated via the Miscellaneous options window To read the message Click on the El button A Message from window will appear as shown in the example below 5h Message from CONSOLE 2 OF x Ep Repl From CONSOLE Subject Please logotf system Hi David Can you please logoff the system as I need to carry out changes to your access rights Regards Les El A Received 0305 02 10 36 23 David Davis gt To send a reply Click on the pep button The Send Message window will appear where you can send your reply in the same way as sending a message to a logged on user shown above Page 26 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 6 Setting the Server Time and Date The Set Server Time Date option allows a Flex View user to set the Time and Date on the RealFlex Server Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For details on user level access please refer to Section 1 8 4 Password Maintenance To set the Server time and date
162. cncnonconoconancnnnnononncnnnnnnnos 37 39 Factor Mel TAOS nienn AAA AC TAI ate A 100 Filter dialog box Historical ECOL cd ds 154 PICK BUQE at dcr ao osc SA oat ee 9 GFE APPICAUOM ements ment et N eee 153 ISX CONS aa o la 120 129 reatingo MOD OWS cet lll ae e lleida sde 163 Scheduled reo ii ide id oli tad 130 Sending files to the RealFlex Server eeina oerein rN 166 FICK VICW s ACCESSIN erernel ea eere s a arte 9 AE PP A A 9 GOMMIQULATION OPINA Sita dr ls rc 185 DEM dd e do o eee ee eee ee 9 A A A E E T E A A TA e A E AA E S EE 28 50 A S A ASTE A E A A T A TA T E A EA e E A 126 Opera ons A e e a o 9 Operator WORKS o o O 9 Programi Stant Up achos rena aa a aa a a 185 Registering applicato iia il eae 197 SOCUNILY SYSTE iiaa o a a a a ER 167 OVO eaaa aa aa a aa a a 9 UI S EEEE R EETA ATS AEE A E A E A E AE E E deta A TEA 12 MRD ooh calcd tang beast tet ak Sd a a a aa a a a 13 Toolbar A 13 Version a d BUNGE NUMDO ceia a ei headaches the cehatehnl E 126 WVIAC OWS ta E 28 Flex View application window Allow MINIMIZINO ccccoooccnccconnnncononcnnononcnonnnconconanonnnnancnnnnnnrnncnnanenoss 186 Allow TESIZING ANG MOVING ii A A A A AA 186 Hide or show application DACKQIFOUNG ccccseececcseeceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeseuseeessueeessaeeeesauseeessneeesaaeees 194 Flex View Summary Screens Data Summaries ooooncccnnncccccnenoncnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 72 Flex Win Backup FllOS caviar cil
163. cnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnananos 219 ICAO A dilo 9 System AdMe Ras cota cdo diosa 172 SVStent gt ouUmMmManes aia aaa 28 29 46 WIG VIG aea net itu Soeannanact titers anc tune T E O A be unauenan ae ontes 28 29 FACSIZING adenda dando 28 29 SY SIEM ROU SUMAS eses bieas cosilla tri aeecarosuda asi tacddonddiainnaste 46 T Tag editing Database ECO ti ee ee 83 tag terna Seareh result Ia nace 214 LOMO S di boo cds 214 Tag Pro perties ANA ida AA e E di 96 MET tdt AA elo 100 SIS O E 109 A II O O totes 112 WINCOWS cimas ips act alan 81 io o a states 62 EE a ETEA NIE E OE ti ie e oc 9 72 81 95 96 Select Database ENO essa dto ala ee 81 Tags for PGU Window Database Ello rosten nanenane ene lil deidad 83 A ee a a 52 BREU IN E E E E E E SE E tact E E E A ETA T AE AEA A A E 62 A a a aa a ere A ee 95 STID a ennaa aa a eee ee 115 TIONI eaae haa tame a a a a a a 52 Tank Product Data Manual Overwrites occcccccconccncccconcnncconnnncnnnnononnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnanennnnnnnns 62 Telemetry Editor WINGOW siria a e ad e aa a a ea 92 Telemetry settings Editing vivio a 82 92 Tempo for alarms Sounde sata id 188 Time Setting on RealFlex Server avenia a a a a a a a a a a 27 TiMS MESSI oil 28 35 Timeout TINGED S taUs AS id 109 Timestamp s Resina 219 Hmestamp Dyn aMi Gesien a a a a 52 Title Bar Flex View application WINGOW cccccccssseecccssececceeseeccsaueecsaseeceeaseeessaseeessageeeeseueeessaseee
164. coconccnnccccoocconccononccnncnonancnnnonnnancnnnnnnnncnnononannennnnnnnos 190 Restore desktop layout at logoff oooocccccoconcconccononconncnononcnononnnncnnnonnnnnconnnonnancnnnonnnncnnnnnanenennnnss 220 Defining user ZONE SettiNQS ooccccccncnnccconnncoconcnnnnnnnnnnnnannncononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenannnnnennananess 212 Delete Addresses from the Address Book WINGOW ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeseeeesaaaeseeeeesaneees 134 Commands from ment DUON Scania ii oi ado 204 208 WESKIOD AV OUIS atada dorada 20 E mail recipients for scheduled reports ooccccccccoonnnncccconcnnncncnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanas 134 Histolicalatchive data usaste idol ecc 154 Ment DURtOAS asada tad dba das 204 208 PES Database ECiOn ios 82 84 A E E NS ee ee 95 User groups Enhanced security iia fa teshinc ii 172 UES B aera eer RT MS Re Pe me nN ee NEC RT 167 172 A A ee er eee 214 DE MEN Gs CDONS sacra aes en i ne i Lec 120 129 COMIN VANES wi fess ac cece apc eee atic terminate aos ek was eal vate eta seen 120 Selective Ala PMA iarsi N A N 122 Demand caen is 47 Desktop display CONO Saad ici 190 Desktop Layout Window Changing ii dado 20 ACIVAINO pia did 20 BA ON 20 Enable dis al ii a a nays ved ct usa a cee ost eeeee 191 FACCOVENIMG AU IOGOMA a IA A a CEA A A 220 Restore Default desktop layout at logoff ooooccccccconnconccccooncnnnononononn
165. configuration E Project i Alarms Badr Ial Z I O SAONE Be 17 145 170 H none b2 17 149 168 410 lt none gt enter ner 2 Main Menu User Functions 7 one Settings z zone Editor i Advanced El User Options M Automatically restore a connection trying every A seconds Main Menu caca emp When you initially open the Project window Network parameter settings are normally displayed for Node 1 Main To view Node 2 Standby settings click on the y button of the Edit settings for field and select Node 2 from the drop down list In the Network interface configuration section each line represents a separate IP connection The number of addresses you can have depends on the number of physical network cards on your machine Normally there is one IP address associated with each network card gt To activate a Node 1 Click on the id button of the Edit settings for field and select Node 1 or Node 2 from the drop down list 2 Click on the check box to the left of Enable Node A tick will appear when activated The fields in the Network interface configuration section will become active To add a network connection 1 Select Node 1 or Node 2 as required 2 Double click on lt enter news or click on the button The Address field will become active with a flashing cursor as shown below Page 199 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E gt Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual
166. correction based on relative density and temperature No vapor pressure correction is done at this time but the structure of the mtrtbl is designed to include vapor pressure to allow for future expansion The mtrtbl record structure for calculation Type 4 is as follows Meter_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Calculation type 4 Meter_factor_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s meter factor Continued on next page Page 106 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Continued from previous page API Subroutine No 3 Density constant Floating point product density constant Product_temperature_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s observed temperature Vapor Pressure constant Floating point product vapor pressure constant this entry is ignored Sample mtrtbl entry for a meter using calculation type 4 variation 2 MIX_ TOTAL HTF BUTANE 4 MIX_BUTN_MF 3 575 MIX_TEMP 0 0 5 Non Temperature Compensated Meters with two meter factors and a temperature compensation factor MF f product Net Gross MF CTL a Variation 1 using API subroutines TAB5B and TAB6B The product type is specified by a status value The data processor selects the meter factor based on this product status The corrected gravity output from the API TAB5B subroutine and the scanned analog product temperature are used as inputs
167. ct Display window within 30 seconds the window will disappear Page 231 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E 4 4 2 Display properties window gt To move size pan and zoom within displays Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Right click on the open display and select Properties from the pop up menu The Display Properties window will appear Display Properties Description Water Overview Window position pels Left side 310 Top side 101 Panning position Window size pels Height Zooming MW Enable Horizontal Vertical EE ve 7 width 475 292 El l El Factor 100 aly Reset to default Using the spinner buttons I you can change the displays position in the screen size panning position and zooming factor Note As you click on the spinner buttons the display being altered will actively change on the screen Once you have made your changes click on the Save button If you want to return the display to its original size and position click on the Reset to default button If you want to abandon the changes you have made click on the Close button A 5000 000 1 0040 E Page 232 of 249 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 5 Help 4 5 1 Help The Help command links you to the Flex View on line Help and provides Help topics and tips to help you accomplish your tasks To access the on line Help Click on the 2 or El Help
168. cters including periods dashes and underscores If the PCU names being created are likely to exceed the 12 characters a message Cannot generate name will appear to the right of the PCU name field 4 Inthe From field enter a number to start from and in the To field enter a number to end at May be set from 0 to 8388608 Examples are shown below 5 Inthe Digits field enter a number to represent the number of digits for the in the PCU name Can be set from 1 to 12 depending on the PCU name not exceeding 12 characters Examples are shown below Example 1 You want to replicate RTU_1 five times to create RTU_2 to RTU_6 you would enter a PCU name of RTU_ enter a 2 in the Start field enter a 6 in the To field and leave the Digits field at 1 Example 2 You want to replicate RTU_1 one hundred times to create RTU_101 to RTU_ 200 you would enter a PCU name of RTU_ 1 enter a 1 in the Start field enter a 100 in the To field and set the Digits field at 2 Example 3 You want to replicate RTU_1 fifty times to overwrite ten existing PCU s RTU_101 to RTU_110 and create forty new PCU s RTU_111 to RTU_150 you would enter a PCU name of RTU_1 enter a 1 in the Start field enter a 50 in the To field and set the Digits field at 2 6 Inthe Address field enter the PCU address for the first PCU or all PCU s being created If you want the Address to be incremented for each PCU being created click on th
169. ction 2 3 Flex View Summary Screens Data Summaries see Section 2 4 Page 43 of 249 SA I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 1 Alarm Event Status Notification Flex View uses both audible and visible indicators to denote alarm status changes of state and operator designated point information to display information pertinent to the system and your application Alarm Event Status Notifications can be grouped into the following types Display Indicators see Section 2 1 1 Audible Alarm Types see Section 2 1 2 2 1 1 Display Indicators Flex View display processes use several display conventions to alert the system operator to certain non standard data value conditions These display alert conventions used in all relevant Flex View displays are as follows Character Color Description gt white signifies control in progress The control issued designator remains until either a control failed is received from the I O driver the controlled state is reported by the field device or the control time out timer expires prior to reporting of the expected state I white signifies Instrument Failure outside of set EU range for the point as defined in the Database Editor C purple signifies a Control Tag has been placed on the point This will prevent controls from being issued on the point until the Control Tag is removed I yellow signifies that an Information Tag has been assigned cyan signifies that a Manual Overwrit
170. cumentation and hardware data sheet Page 101 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Factor Decimal value 0 0001 gt 99 9999 representing an adjustment factor for pressure and temperature compensation etc which is applied to either the inter scan delta change value or to the actual PLC RTU counts depending upon the Meter type Rollover The highest value attainable for RealFlex internal accumulation given the FACTOR and UNITS PULSE Max value is 999999999 The rollover value is independent of the raw meter counts returned by the PLC RTU Max raw A decimal value max 999999999 that is the largest value 1 that RealFlex will receive from the field device without setting an instrument failure flag Units pulse Decimal value 0 1 gt 9999999 9 which represents the quantity of product that must flow through the totalizing device before one count is added to either the total raw counts or the inter scan delta depending on Meter type Meter type Meter processing type Type 0 The value received from the device in the field is to be stored directly in the CURRENT GROSS field The raw value will then be multiplied by the specified FACTOR and UNITS PULSE and the result placed in the CURRENT NET field The YEARLY MONTHLY DAILY HOURLY and LAST HOUR files are calculated by subtracting the current device reading from the previous device reading and multiplying by FACTOR and UNITS PULSE before being pl
171. curred during recent operations and afford the opportunity for corrective action Page 45 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 2 Control Summaries Flex View provides a variety of methods to silence alarms send controls and monitor system processes through the use of utilities and screens Control summaries can be grouped into the following types System Summary see Section 2 2 1 Communications Summary see Section 2 2 2 Active Alarm window see Section 2 2 3 Flex View displays Dynamic Display Types see Section 2 2 6 Trends see Section 2 2 7 2 2 1 System PCU To view the dynamically updated state and or value of all scan points associated with a unique PCU issue controls or initiate processes invoke the System PCU display process by clicking on the Main menu button selecting the RealFlex Summaries option and then selecting the System PCU option Select the desired PCU from the resulting window menu which will list by name each PCU defined in the RealFlex system You will note that PCU names are presented alphabetically If the window is full use the or BI buttons to find the PCU needed When you select a PCU the first page of that PCU s System Summary display will be presented on the screen E System Summary for ATU_1 OF x Index 4 Prev PEU E Next PEU 8 Ack Page G Page Down 2 Page Up PAGE 1 OF 7 PM ANALOGS TAG MAME POINT DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS a HHHH
172. d report to a temporary file bypassing the Report Scheduler option Prior to using the User report option user defined reports and Flex Reports must already be saved under a name To demand a report Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance From the Main menu select Demand Reports and then select User Report from the sub menu The Demand Reports window will appear Page 120 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Demand Reports Select report to demand User defined report Predefined report i FlezReport es MewReport xls es NewReport xls es NewReporty xls Realtime xls Realtime ls le Time spar tf Previous i E Curent Span Create report in SY format Output to Display Printer Report at time execution 09032004 15 03 50 M Close this dialog after successful operation coe gt Selecting required report 1 Select User defined report Predefined report or FlexReport as required by clicking on the appropriate option button 2 Click on and highlight desired report in the Select report to demand list or exit by clicking on the Close button or the Xl in the upper right hand corner of the window Setting time span The Time span options are only active when selecting User defi
173. d PCU it will appear and allow the user to enter the required telemetry data This basic information varies depending upon the protocol of the PLC or RTU Some examples of telemetry data that may be required are the maximum number of each database point type reported by the remote unit the phone number used for automatically dialling the remote device and the dialup delay interval Informational fields may provide system performance or state for the I O driver For more details regarding telemetry editor window information refer to the applicable I O Driver data sheet for your system Telemetry editing is carried out via the Database Editor List of project PCU window Important Before you can edit the Telemetry setting the Channels Configuration file realflex data crt fwd tel driver chn must be created manually using the Configuration File Editor option from the Configuration menu gt To edit Telemetry settings Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to the Password Maintenance topic 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system 2 Click on and highlight the PCU name for which you want to edit the telemetry settings 3 Inthe Telemetry editing toolbar click on the l button or position the pointer over the
174. d by any user The control tag window will always display the last user logon who edited the text Each time an operator sets or clears an information tag an entry is placed in the Historical Alarm Event Summary 2 3 1 9 Alarm Enable Disable Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance The Alarm Disable option available from the Poke Point menu will disable alarming for the selected point This functionality is only provided for users experiencing equipment malfunctions that may cause annoying alarms When Alarm Disable is selected from the Poke Point menu the following window will appear Page 67 of 249 M0 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Alarm Enable Disable D ALARM ENABLE DISABLE Tag RTU 1 41 0005 Description TANK 2 DEL FLO KTU_1 OURO eye Z F Disable alarm generation for this point men Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel A eee Eu mtj THIS POINT Is ENABLED DISABLED The Alarm Enable Disable window will display the PCU name tag name and current alarm state for the selected point To Enable or Disable an alarm Microsoft Windows look and feel To Disable Click on the Disable alarm generation for this point check box A tick will appear in the check box then click on the Execute button To Enable Click on the D
175. d by the I O driver protocol Active Represents the current state of PCU scan control permissiveness ON signifies that the PCU is communicating with the I O driver and the field device OFF indicates that the PCU is not communicating Channel A number between 0 and 99 that is used by the I O driver software to identify the PCU or PCUs to be serviced by each driver Page 84 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Description A description for the PCU Maximum of 20 characters including spaces Analogs The total number of Analog points Meters The total number of Meter points Status The total number of Status points Tanks The total number of Tank points gt To Add a new PCU record to the RealFlex database 1 Click on the a button The Add PCU dialog box will appear PLU Marne PO Description o Address jo Channel jo Active Fr Cancel 2 Click on the PCU Name field and enter a name for the PCU Each unique PCU name can be a maximum of 12 characters including periods dashes and underscores and cannot be changed once it is created Once the PCU name is entered it will automatically default to display in all capital letters If the user elects to change the name of a defined PCU they must add a new PCU name to the RealFlex database using the Duplicate PCU or Replicate PCU function to copy the defined database points from the old PCU name to the newly created one
176. d segment of the grid as shown below At the same time the selected display will now be visible in the Flex View main window Virtual Screens 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above until you have added all required Displays If you want to add more than one display to the same grid segment without selecting a different segment in the grid repeat steps 1 and 2 above to add a second and subsequent displays After you have added your displays to the same grid segment resize or tile your displays as required in the Flex View main window The thumbnails will resize accordingly as shown below a Virtual Screens 1 If you want to know the name of a Display position the mouse pointer over the required thumbnail and a tooltip will appear displaying the name of the display As an alternative position the mouse pointer over the thumbnail then click right mouse The title of the Display will be shown in the top of the pop up menu Note If you close a display the thumbnail will be removed from the Virtual Screens window 1 3 3 To sort arrange displays You can sort the order of your display thumbnails within the Virtual Screens window by moving them to a different grid segment You can even move several thumbnails into the same grid segment 1 Position the cursor over the thumbnail you want to move Click and hold down the left mouse button the pointer will change to a crossed double headed arrow A Page 17 of 249 f 5000 0001 00
177. d the Browse for Folder dialog box will appear If you want to append the date to the file name click on the Append date of running to the name of the report file check box A tick will appear when enabled Page 133 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Send report by E mail 1 Click on this check box to enable the sending of reports to a number of E mail addresses A tick will appear when enabled and the Subject field below will become active In the Subject field a default subject topic Flex View report REPORT from CONSOLE on DATE at TIME will be displayed This will translate as Flex View report Report title from Console name on 29 07 2003 at 11 00 22 in the Subject field of the E mail You can enter your own subject topic by overwriting the existing subject topic As you enter your subject topic you can insert a code for the Report Name Date Time or Console Name by clicking on the Pl button and selecting required option from the drop down list Define your Mail Account settings and select your mail recipients by clicking on the Settings button The E Mail Settings dialog box will appear E Mail Settings Mail Account Settings SMTP Server SMTP port 25 Sender e mail User ID Password cos As Flex View employs a totally independent mail sending mechanism a user must specify the settings for the outgoing Mail Account and the
178. e 2 2 6 10 PCU Group The PCU Group display type allows you to monitor and control a number of identical data points which are common for a number of PCUs In the example below we have part of a Display where four elements have been encompassed by the PCU Group object Example PCU Group The components for the PCU Group object comprises of a field displaying the PCU name anda ieee x button Other components that may or may not be displayed are Previous A and Next i buttons a Description for the element grouping and a Boarder around the group of elements The operator only needs to use the drop down list or Previous and Next buttons to select and view required PCU details 2 2 6 11 Timestamp The Timestamp dynamic object displays the timestamp of the last event for a Analog Meter Status or Tank tag point An example is shown below Timestamp example 1976 61 81 66 88 87 The system implementor specifies what time information is displayed It will normally display the date and time for the event but can also include other information to make it easier to identify Your system implementor should provide you with a means to identify the Timestamp object used in your system 2 2 6 12 User Functions The User Functions dynamic object allows for the execution of a procedure on the RealFlex QNX server An example of the display representation is shown below The system implementor specifies what information is displayed It
179. e Auto increment check box to the right of this field A tick will appear when active The Address for the PCU s may be changed at any time using the Edit PCU function 7 Inthe Channel field enter the applicable channel number for the first PCU or all PCU s being created Page 87 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E 10 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual If you want the channel number to be incremented for each PCU being created click on the Auto increment check box to the right of this field A tick will appear when active The channel number for the PCU s may be changed at any time using the Edit PCU function In the Active ON OFF section select required option ON State or OFF State The PCU s may be left inactive OFF until the entire configuration process is complete The active state of the PCU s may be changed at any time using the Edit PCU function If you are creating new PCU s that have the same names as existing PCU s you can overwrite these existing PCU s with a copy of the PCU being replicated To overwrite existing PCU s click on the Overwrite existing PCU s check box A tick will appear when active Click on the OK button You will be prompted to confirm the execution of the PCU replication with a Yes No selection If you are overwriting existing PCU s and you failed to tick the Overwrite existing PCU s check box you will be prompted to confirm the overwriting of the existing PCU s with a Yes
180. e Configuration Options Zone Settings window A user would need to create a user button or a sub menu for an existing user button with a title of Select zone A sub menu would then need to be added listing all the assigned zones using the Apply Zone command An example is shown below User button created in the Configuration Options User Wain Menu window SUB Menu Built in zone Wi ater List of Apply Zone commands Microsoft Windows look and feel Page 228 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual User button created in the Configuration Options User Main Menu window SuUb menu mol 22 85 82 49 39 12 USER Select zone P Ed SELECT ZONE Built in zone Water List of Apply Zone commands RealFlex4 look and feel 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Zone field The Select Zone window will appear which will list by name each Zone defined in the RealFlex system You will note that Zone names are presented alphabetically If the window is full use the or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the Zone needed 2 Select the desired Zone from the Select Zone window Page 229 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 4 Displays 4 4 1 Select Displays The Displays menu provides access to graphic representations of plant processes or field data as designed by the system implementor using the Fl
181. e each action will zoom in by approximately 60 of the previous screen view Repeat the process to step in closer To zoom out There are two ways in which you can zoom out 1 Right click and select Zoom Out from the pop up menu Each action will zoom out in steps Repeat the process to step out further 2 Press and hold down the Ctrl key the pointer turns into a magnifying glass Clicking the right mouse button reduces the view The new view is centered wherever you click gt To return the window to the original size and position Right click and select Zoom Off from the pop up menu Note You can also zoom in or out using the Display Properties window see Section 4 4 2 Panning To pan Press and hold down the Shift key the pointer turns into an open hand Click left mouse button without releasing it and move the view to position required Once you have changed the Display settings you may want that window to always appear as you have set it Right click on the open window and select Properties from the pop up menu When the Display Properties window appears select Save Note You can also pan using the Display Properties window see Section 4 4 2 Page 30 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 7 5 Using scroll bars a Some of the windows used by Flex View have scroll bars These are graphical objects along the side and or bottom of a window which can be used to move the contents of the
182. e 109 Tank Strapping table cc cccccccssesecceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeseaseceeeeseeeeeeesseaeeeesseaeeeeeessaaeeeeeneas 115 PAN TAGS POMS seca ii tr aaa aid ii 112 User groups Enhanced security ooocccccccoconnnnccccnnncnnonononononononancnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnoncnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 172 User ID and access rightS ccconcccccconcncoconcnnoconnnnnonononnononcnnnnonononnnnnnnonnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnonannnnonanens 167 172 ZONE ZONE COMING alien tii da 214 Add Historical Data window Historical Editor ooccccccooonncnnccononnnncnonancnnnononancnnnononanennnononnnnnnnnos 154 Add Point Maintenance window Historical Editor ccoooonccnncccconncncnnconcnnncnnnancnnnononanennnnnnanennnnos 154 Address Book window Scheduled reports ccccccccccocoonccononcconononcnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnononnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnannennss 134 AQUSUNO COMM AW IGHAS sendas adorada 28 33 Advanced Console Information WINdOW arica as 23 Advanced window Configuration Options Menu oooccccnnncccccccnonccnnnncnnnnonnncnnnnnononanncnnnnnnnonenannennnnnnnss 219 Alarm Active Alarm SUMA E 74 Banner Setting MUMbBer Of NINES ii eeccecss ssh ices Ga vdet errno E So ete tee 200 Deadband Analog tas hoe io lacas ais 96 Disabled Display Indicators 44 Enable DIS able Bok POIS ua is 62 Keep banner ONO oda 200 MiS A O A 44 PHNTCr cCONIQUA ION nadia 200 Printer Font soting ala nando 200 Printer properties WINDOW cis
183. e 52 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 2 6 3 Status Points SYMBOL Symbol type dynamic display elements are used for status or digital input output points such as valves pumps blowers circuit breakers etc A display of this type consists of a graphical symbol whose color reflects the current state of the database point If an unacknowledged alarm condition exists for the database point the symbol will flash VALUE Value type dynamic display elements are used to show the name of the state a database point is in if the database point reflects a digital device The color of the display will reflect the current state and will flash if an unacknowledged alarm state exists for the point OBJECT An Object dynamic display element is a graphical object in the display that changes colors according to the state of an associated status datapoint It can be as simple as a small circle or as complex as a large irregular polygon It will generally represent some important piece of equipment in the system such as a boiler tank or pipeline ANIMATION Animation displays are similar to symbol displays except that a different symbol may be used for each digital state For example the standard engineering drawing symbol for an open valve would be used to represent the open state and the standard symbol for a closed valve would be used to represent the closed state The valve symbol would appear to be moving when the monit
184. e SEAE REA 52 62 96 Dynamic Dales a nese oe eee eee ee ee ee ee ee 57 62 A dun iainemeuseaitaatatunartesiauemsstaearsusdaulcetadubidzandt caananeaseeaasacsnanaee 57 Mode Mentira a eap 57 A OA A A tenescese eat 57 Type filter Database EdItOF c ooonccnccccconncnnccononconncnnnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnanennnnnnnas 83 U Unacknowledged alarms Display Indicator oooccccccoconnconccononcnnnononancnnnnonononnnnononnnnnononannnnnonnnannoss 44 PACKMOWISCOCC alii lada 49 PACIIIOW COG ING sr dd 74 Uns POG NAS se cat ea el a old aes 96 MetertadS aa ato Biman cana hase wetlands Dana a nani sd 100 TANKTA AAA A A A hs A 112 units pulse Meter tags a tale etl scan ne o e o 100 Unlock Toolbar layout Flex View application window ccccccccocccnnccccnoncnncnononccononononnnnonnnancnnnonnnanenns 13 Virtual Screens WINDOW a ici 16 Unrestricted access Tor US Sut lacado 167 172 Updates to PRO Stud dabas dde 151 Urgent alarm sounder Seti ii A Sis 188 User Allow logging off to unlock applicatiON oocccccconcnnccconcncononcnnononcnnonanononnononnnnoncnnnonannncnnanenoss 191 BE In A shies 120 Font setting for RealFlex4 look and feel ccoooccococococccooocnonoconnococoncnnnonanononannnnononrnnnnnananennunanos 194 Dname and PASS WOTd said ct 167 172 LOGO LO Meri ii a 37 99 ME A oee erena ereer tesa te latresaleinboteuae ees ace 13 El AAA rn a eetis e ea neta inte a 191
185. e connection is successful live data is downloaded from the RealFlex server Any connection problems or errors are reported For instructions on how to create or edit a report please refer to the Flex Report Help file Reports generated by Flex Report are saved as Microsoft Excel xls files in the C Program Files Datac Projects Name of Project setup win rg win draft directory until they are sent to the RealFlex server To send files to the RealFlex server please refer to Section 4 3 8 Send Flex Report File to the Server The name of the saved report is added to the list of defined reports in the Select Flex Report File window and the Select report to demand list in the Demand Reports window Page 166 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 8 Send Flex Report File to the Server The Send Flex Report File to the Server option allows a user to register new and edited Flex Report files on the RealFlex server Draft reports are stored in the C Program Files Datac Projects Name of Project setup win rg win draft directory To send Flex Report files to the RealFlex server Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For details on user level access please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu click on the Send Flex Report File to the Server option If there are no draft reports available for sending the message D
186. e en or cee Pane eet ne ee oe eee ee eae ee ene 9 57 109 112 A S mca a a taeceted cde a a a lene a a 96 Melendo rita cdo 100 US oi 109 Tank lag Sr 112 Database Ed e dd dal 62 implementa ON OEI e 79 MOdifICaton WIN dOWS a a a a 89 PONE DEMIAN II o e e encima e 79 A o E E aeceancouteausio 79 ROMS TENOS pa dt a 57 Update Timestamp resettiNg ccccccocccnoncccconncnnnncnnnnnnnononancnnnononnncnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnas 219 Bello chao 10 AA tras O A ON 79 81 96 elo AB A A 84 Add Delete Edit Tags for a PCU ooonncccnnncccccncnonccnnnncnononnnennnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnanennennss 83 Database Implementation OvervieW ooncccccccoccnnccccnoncnnnnnnnancnnnononancnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnas 79 EGIL FelemsiESsclIndS rta addict kegel 92 MPortind Exporta PEU quemacocos talados 89 HiS OR PFOJECt PC UAWINGOW susana iaa 82 OPUS iras adas idol 81 Database Points Adding Deleting a 81 EANO ase O enatia mu saneiaasnniate 81 Page 237 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual WIG WIN 81 DAA WEB SIO eee eo e ee 126 197 Date Setting on RealFlex GENE zei e aa e 27 Date elds SENO a dai 28 35 Dale time e nibs atte lus 9 13 PC ACO GING eeen NOU uo O O a tent 96 Historical archive Data cccccsseccccccceeeseceeceeeeeeeeesueeseeeseeeseceeeseeuseeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeseeeessaeaeeeessaaeeeeeessaaees 154 Default Colors used for display DackgroundS ccc
187. e fields set the time back to the time you would like to start viewing historical data For details please refer to Section 1 7 13 When the time span has been entered click on the Execute button Flex View will extract the requested historical data from the RealFlex server and display the information in the View window in the Date Time and Data columns If there is no data available for the requested period no data will be presented in the View window and the Execute button will become active again To edit a Historical record Click on and highlight the record to be edited Click on the Edit button or right click then select the Edit Historical Data option from the pop up menu The Edit Historical Data dialog box will appear Edit Historical Data Fa a lt lt a7 Date o 092003 Time 13 37 07 ms EE Value 0 000 on In the Value field edit the value then click on the Apply button You will be returned to the View window where the revised value for the selected record will be displayed To add a Historical record Click on the Add button or right click then select the Add Historical Data option from the pop up menu The Add Historical Data dialog box will appear Page 162 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4dd Historical Data E4 Date 0372003 Time 13 41 37 H ms jo Value 0 000 on 2 Inthe Date Time and ms fields set
188. e has been assigned A yellow signifies that an Alarm Disabled command has been placed on the point This will prevent the value from displaying an alarm state if one is reported from the field white signifies a communications failure This occurs when the remote unit does not reply to the scanner s request for information the reply is found to be erroneous or the remote unit has been removed from the data acquisition cycle flashing signifies an unacknowledged alarm state All other colors are database defined Valid numerical data representations of non alarmed points and or analog values in acceptable operating range are colored green whereas valid normal state status data is represented in the database record color designated for that state All other colors are database defined for alarm violations 2 1 2 Audible Alarm Types Alarms events within the Flex View system represent predefined software messages that are either specified during the database configuration process or are automatically generated within the Flex View software The following types of alarms events are supported Page 44 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Unauthorized Changes of State Unauthorized changes of state occur when a status change is detected by the Flex View software and a corresponding control request is not currently active for the point An alarm or event will be generated according to the alarm type specified in t
189. e list will initially be sorted in ascending order An up arrow on the caption button will indicate that the column has been used to sort data in ascending order 2 To sort the data in descending order click on the column caption button again lac 0031 ANALOG lac 0030 ANALOG lac 0029 ANALOG 4000 28 ANALOG A down arrow on the caption button will indicate that the column has been used to sort data in descending order 1 7 11 Cursor control by keyboard If for some reason the mouse has become non operational a user may manipulate the cursor and select items by means of the keyboard this is providing the Enable cursor control by keyboard option in the Miscellaneous window of the Configuration Options menu has been activated To move the cursor Press and hold down the Ctrl Shift keys and press any of the arrow keys gt To select Press and hold down the Ctrl Shift keys and press the Enter key To display a Poke Points or pop up menu Press and hold down the Alt key and press the Enter key 1 7 12 Entering data You will enter data and make choices in a number of different ways while using Flex View The most common methods are described here For specific details of data entry refer to the help information corresponding to the required task There are two buttons that appear on the data input windows OK or Apply If you click on OK or Apply button after you have input data to a window the data will be saved C
190. e name The and last nine search patterns are saved and can be recalled by clicking on the I button and selecting required search pattern from the drop down list 2 Double click on required Help file The selected help file will be opened and displayed in a Internet Explorer type window QNX Neutrino RTOS 6 2 lc gt Q a 3 Back Forward Stop Refresh Home Print ES a an QNX Neutrino OS Version 6 2 0 e system Architecture e Programmer s Guide e Building Embedded Systems e Utilities Reterence e Library Reference e Audio Developer s Guide e Addon Interfaces Library Reference e Technotes AR l The top pane displays the toolbar It provides buttons for navigation printing refreshing the screen and other frequently used options these are the Internet Explorer type toolbar buttons For Help information on the Flex View application program please refer to Section 4 5 1 A Page 141 of 249 f 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 Configuration menu The Configuration menu offers the following commands Open Project Allows a user to open add remove rename backup restore and import projects For details please refer to Section 4 3 1 Connect to the Server Allows a user to connect to the RealFlex server For details please refer to Section 4 3 2 Disconnect Allows a user to disconnect from the RealFlex server For details please refer to Section 4 3 3 Check for Updates
191. e on the screen Once you have made your changes click on the Save button Page 75 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual If you want to return the summary to its original size and position click on the Reset to default button If you want to abandon the changes you have made click on the Close button Page 76 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Reports Flex View provides a variety of standard printed reports the ability to copy the current screen display to a printer and accessing reports generated by the user Report types available are Print Window Used to print a copy of the active Flex View display See Section 4 2 1 User Reports Allows you to print standardized reports and Flex Reports generated via the Configuration Report Generator option You can also access additional RealFlex Utilities and printed summaries reflecting system data See Section 4 1 3 1 Selective Alarm print Allows you to request a partial or complete report of the alarms See Section 4 1 3 2 Schedule Report Used to schedule and execute saved reports on a timed basis See Section 4 2 4 RealFlex Summary Reports Used to print the contents of the System PCU Communications Active Alarms and Historical Alarm Events summary reports See Section 4 1 1 Data Summary Reports Used to view and print the contents of the Analog Meter Status Tank Manual Overwrite Alarm Disabled Control
192. e to be changed then click on the El button The following Security User Maintenance dialog box will be displayed Security User Maintenance El User ID ze User name Dave Wicks Member of Group 1 Maintenance User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires User is disabled User is locked out Cancel 2 Inthe User ID field change the User ID by typing over the existing name maximum of twelve 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces This will be the name that the user enters when Logging on 3 Inthe User name field change the name for the user by typing over the existing name maximum of twenty 20 characters including spaces This is usually the name of the employee to whom the User ID is assigned 4 Inthe bottom half of this dialog box select or change required user security options For details please refer to Section 4 3 9 3 5 Click on the OK button Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to change the User ID in the RealFlex database You will be returned to the Password Maintenance window where the new user ID and name will have replaced the existing name in the list gt Changing the user logon passwords This option allows you to change user logon passwords or to change your own logon password Page 179 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To change a user password 1 Click on
193. e you can remove the group Click on and highlight the group to be deleted then click on the Ed button A message Are you sure you want to permanently delete group Group name and description will appear Click on the OK button to confirm deletion of the group or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation The built in Administrator group should not be removed Page 177 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To add a new user account It is advised that you should place a user in only one group Usually you can find or add a group with the combination of permissions needed by any user 1 2 3 Click on and highlight the Group that you want to add the user to Click on the amp button The following Security User Maintenance dialog box will appear Security User Maintenance Fa User ID FO User name Po Password Po Confirm password Po Member of group Group 7 Maintenance User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires User is disabled F User is locked out Cancel In the User ID field enter a User ID maximum of twelve 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces This will be the name that the user enters when Logging on In the User name field enter the name for the user maximum of twenty 20 characters including spaces This is usually the name of the employee to whom the User ID is assigned
194. eated by the system implementor using the Flex Builder easy to use display builder These Displays are dynamically updated pictures diagrams charts and graphs that continuously display the status of the system under control By pointing and clicking with the mouse or trackball the operator can quickly 1 go from one graphic display to another 2 send controls to the controllable elements of the system 3 create temporary high visibility displays of selected system elements for example dynamically updated bar charts and graphs of datapoints that are close to alarm 4 track communications performance In the Flex View Application window the toolbar across the top of the window contains an on screen button for silencing the latest audible alarm on screen buttons to access the Main Utilities Configuration Displays and Help menus a button displaying current state of connection to the RealFlex server and the current date and time The current date and time is displayed as an on screen button While not connected to the RealFlex server the clock is synchronized to the PC clock When connected to the RealFlex server the clock will synchronize with the clock of the RealFlex server to display local time The alarm banner displayed at the bottom of the screen contains the latest active alarms This banner can be configured to display between 2 and 10 lines A Page 10 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual The Ma
195. eck box 2 Click on this check box to enable A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick This option allows you to set the Flex View character set for the user currently logged onto the Windows PC For example if you were to log onto a Windows 2000 PC as John and opened Flex View logged in as USERA and have selected Spanish as the chosen language then the character set in Flex View will be Spanish If you were to log off the Windows 2000 PC and another user logged on as David and opens Flex View logged in as USERA the character set will revert to the default character set of English and not your preferred language of Spanish User Interface gt Setting the Flex View look and feel By default the Flex View Main window and its displays take on the appearance look and feel of any other Microsoft Windows program For users wishing to switch to the RealFlex4 QNX look and feel click on the Enable RealFlex4 look and feel for main window and displays check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick Page 196 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When enabling the RealFlex4 look and feel the field below become active allowing you to change the General font for the Flex View windows To change the font click on the Change button and choose required font from the Font dialog box Note To change the fonts used in picture text objec
196. ed The fields from left to right are Date shown in the form YY MM DD Time shown in the form HH MM SS MS Alarm class A Alarm U Urgent or C Critical or will contain OK for return to normal conditions PCU_ Name and Point_Description these fields help the operator identify the scan point for which the alarm is being logged Value and Units contains the actual EU Engineering Units value which resulted in the alarm message Issuance Type presents the alarm threshold value which was violated This same information will be printed on the system printer as well as being added to the appropriate alarm summaries To view and acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms 1 Click on the alarm banner a window similar to the one shown below will appear Unacknowledged Alarms for RTU_ 1 Total 4 Microsoft Windows look and feel Page 49 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual cf UNACKNOWLEDGED ALARMS FOR RTU_1 TOTAL 4 RealFlex4 look and feel 2 Click on the Space Bar Acknowledge Alarms button or press the Spacebar on your keyboard gt To view and acknowledge individual alarms Please refer to Section 2 2 3 Active Alarms RealFlex Summaries menu 2 2 4 Flex View Displays Displays are dynamic representations developed by the system implementor to depict the system s application parameters and or station schematics As many of these displays may be built as are needed
197. ed to create and define PCUs and their associated database points The screen displays a listing of all PCUs defined for the system the address the active status channel number current total point count and the number of status analog meter and tank database points currently defined for each PCU A PCU is used to group database points that are receiving information from the field utilizing the same communications protocol If a different communications protocol is used then the PLCs RTUs are being scanned on a time basis gt To access the Database Editor Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to the Password Maintenance topic From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system Database Editor _ E4 List of project PEU pan aT i El El o 3 3 0 i RTU 4 4 On 4 b Je 4 o HR TUS 5 On 4 PLU SCAM b 32 b4 o E SYSTEM O GM O 3 o 15 o Total PCU count 7 Total point count 861 5 332 5 365 M 162 T 2 at The significance of each column in the display is Name The name of the PCU Address This represents the PCU address for the associated channel This number is a decimal representation maximum 65535 of the address encoded in the physical remote unit and included in I O message exchanges if require
198. ed when the mouse pointer is moved over any dynamic object for more than 1 second There are three choices available 1 If you want to show tooltips for display links if implemented click on the Show for display Links check box A tick will appear when activated 2 If you want to show tooltips for values poke points in graphic and summary displays click on the Show for display values check box A tick will appear when activated You can further decide on what information is to be displayed in the tooltip Tag descriptions PCU and tag names or Auto For the Auto option Flex View decides automatically to use descriptions or PCU and tag names on Tooltips If there is a description with text then it uses description if the description has no text then it uses PCU and tag name 3 If you want to show tooltips in the Select Display window click on the Show in the Displays dialog check box A tick will appear when activated Report Viewer option The Report Viewer field allows you to select the application when displaying reports default iexplore exe gt To change the application 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Report Viewer field The Browse for Report Viewer Application dialog box appears 2 Click on the a button to the right of the Files of type field and select from the pop up list either Execute Command Batch or All Files as required 3 Look through the directories on your PC
199. eeceesesauecaesauecesaeeseesaeeseeeaeeaeeeens 13 151 EIS COMME CUI CIN adi 151 setting ime and Date su See cee dS da 27 RealFlex summaries commands Main Menu ooccncccccnccnnncccnonnnoncnonncnnnnnnnancnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnennnnonannrnnnnnnnns 119 RealFlex Summaries menu Historical Event SUMMAIY ccccncccccocnccnnnncncnnnnonccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnos 73 SA AP dawiede ames E neeSceddeamene 46 Reallimes Contorno lc oil 62 68 A hala RU Se elisa a OU al ethers alee hale 28 50 229 MOFIEOGING and contro a o ah ee el be do deal hae 43 SN A A dun Tacdn E 72 Receiving message from other logged ON USES ooocccccocccncoconcnnoconcnnconacncononcnnononcnnconancnnonnnrnnnnannnnnonaneness 23 Recipients Scheduled reports by e Mail ausirian onan a N A 130 Page 244 of 249 1 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Register Flex VieW application ccccccssececccssececeseeecseseeceeseeecsaseeecseuseecesageeecsageceueuseeessaseseeesaeess 197 PROG UC ten seatccatele die ntats cutietsia salieri do tbesttebuee 197 Registration NUMBER sado ici 126 197 Remote Modules He Drain dci 139 221 Remove Pr lara odia picos 142 Sn A suede 95 Rename PTO CCl cicavessantdsatauiewsasusiduxvatwiadue DA AR AREAS AE AR Ad AAA a ao 142 Replicate PCU s Database Editor ooooccccccccccocoonnccnonnconononcnnnonononnnnnncnnnnnononnnannnnnnnnononenannnnnns 82 84 Report Generator Configuration MENU cccc
200. eeeessaaseess 130 Scola atado EO eT 28 31 Search TESUNS Tagan o ete 214 Security Group Maintenance dialog box Enhanced Security coooccnncccconncnnccononnnncnnnancnnnonnnanennnnos 172 Security Settings dialog box Enhanced Security cccccoooconnnccnnncccccnononncnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnns 172 Security User Maintenance dialog box Enhanced Security ccccooocncncccconnconccononncnncnonannnnnnnnanennnnos 172 Security User Maintenance OPtiONS oooocccnnnccccccccnnncnnnncnononnnnnnnnnonononannnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnans 182 Selecting Communications RealFlex summaries ooooonnncnnncccnccnonnncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnnonenanenss 47 Cursor Mode TrENAS ccccccccssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceueuseeceeeeeseaeeseeeeeeessesaaeseeeeessaeuaeeeeeesessaasaaeeeeeeees 57 WESKIOD AY OUIS astas oda 20 Dial ING WV OMKING act secasncacatenentse atten aac uct sane veusannedanta A reodacasied veunanonsinenaianadtenensiabahacduadaacduniadans 198 ISP VS iure 13 229 E mail recipients Tor scheduled tebortS visiiia it ta 134 Flex Report File Report generator ua 163 A A O eam Rand eaitane asittiar toaeeneed alent 57 Selective Alarm Print WiIMGOW sists iGo a i Wms eaneeseeie esses eno eaecaaeoe ee 122 Send Flex Report File to the ServVer ooooccccccccccccnnccnonococonononncnnnonononnoncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnans 166 Scheduled repons Dy Ema e 130 Send Message To ot
201. eens parameters to default settings e g 3 rows 3 columns and Auto Hide A Page 18 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 3 5 Resizing the Virtual Screens window Depending on the number of segments displayed in the Virtual Screens window you may find it useful to resize the window To resize the Virtual Screens window 1 Move the mouse pointer over the top edge left hand edge or top left hand corner of the window The pointer becomes a double headed arrow 2 Drag the window border until the window is the desired size then release the button Page 19 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 4 Desktop Layouts The Desktop Layouts option from the Configuration menu displays a Desktop Layout window in the Flex View application window An example is shown below Desktop Layout Es From this window a user can store a number of different desktop layouts and recall them as and when required If your system employs a large number of displays this feature is most useful as it allows you to divide your system into groups of displays For example you could define a desktop layout that represents the system overview and then define a number of other desktop layouts that represent each control zone within your system Note This function must first be enabled via the Miscellaneous window of the Configuration Options menu You must be connected and logged onto the RealFl
202. egment represents a different view of Displays in the Flex View application window By clicking on a grid segment the operator can quickly bring to view a required Display or group of Displays The Virtual Screens window can be configured to display up to 25 grid segments See Section 1 3 4 Setting Virtual Screen Parameters You can also resize the Virtual Screens window See Section 1 3 5 Resizing the Virtual Screens window 1 3 1 Displaying a Auto Hide Virtual Screens window To display the Virtual Screens window move the mouse pointer to the bottom right hand edge of the Flex View application window and the Virtual Screens window will slide out from the right The Virtual Screens window will stay in view providing the mouse pointer is positioned over the window If the Flex View application window has been reduced in size as shown below move the mouse pointer over the bar and the Virtual Screens window will slide out b Flex View lolx i Man Utilities Confguration Displays 7 iy 1520103 08 53 27 Mersort Windows took and fee 1571703 10 18 90 ReslFlexd look and feel Intual Screens bar A Page 16 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 3 2 To add Display thumbnails to a grid segment 1 Click on any free segment in the grid as shown below a Virtual Screens 2 Select required Display A thumbnail representation of the Display will now be visible in the selecte
203. em See Section 2 2 1 Communications Displays the status of each PCU communicating with remote devices See Section 2 2 2 Active Alarms Provides active alarm event data display for all points in the system or sorted by PCU name See Section 2 2 3 Page 119 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Historical Alarm Event Allows you to review alarms and events that have occurred during recent operations See Section 2 4 2 From the Summary Screen you can capture data values or information at a specific point in time by copying the whole summary or the displayed page to the Clipboard as plain text You can then paste the contents of the Clipboard into another application e g WordPad Excel etc Right click on the open summary and select Copy Page or Copy All from the pop up menu 4 1 2 Data Summaries For details of Data Summaries please refer to Section 2 4 1 4 1 3 Demand Reports The Demand Reports sub menu offers the following commands Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can use these options User report Allows you to print standardized reports access additional RealFlex Utilities and printed summaries reflecting system data See Section 4 1 3 1 Selective Alarm Print Allows you to request a partial or complete report of the alarms See Section 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 1 User report The Demand Reports options available from the Main menu allow the user to generate a save
204. enes 13 To edit the Analog Tag Properties 2s nsicieseccieee othe coda peetcdctasencheed whe etaceteiee cca Bin heehee eee 79 96 To edit the Meter Tag Properties ccccccccccssesececcceeseeceeceeeueceeeseaaueeeesseuseeeesssaaeeeessssaneeeess 79 100 103 To edit the Status Tag properties oocccccccccoccnnnccnnncccnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnanncnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnennnnnnnnnnnanans 79 109 To edit the Tank Tag properties ooocccccoconnconccoconncnnncnnnnnconnnonnnncnnnnonnnncnononannnnnnnonanennnnnnnnnnons 79 112 118 Toolbars Flex View application WINGOW ccccccooonccnncccconcnnncnnnoncnnnononnnonononnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnanennnnnnnas 13 PI SONIC AU Edito varie thant oia a e e a 154 MPO EXPO GW Sa dt ed coles 82 Lock Unlock toolbar layout Flex View application window occcccccccoccnnccononnconnconnancnnononacnnnononanenos 13 Moving Flex View application window c ccccssseccseeseecceesseecceuseeeceeueecseseeeseaseeessageeeesanseesseneeesens 13 POU GONIN iaa tai de dido citas tdi ade 82 Resizing Flex View application WINCOW oooccccoconcoccccononccconnconannnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnonannnnononnnnenonanens 13 Tag editing Database Edi testa ende TO 83 cn e nti te 82 Type tlter Database Edd a ac eee iecdd 83 A A raaaamniamerauiney 186 Page 247 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual TOTAL SCANS iaa 47 Transducer Over Under range iii 44 A A a 57 A A nc at ee a e
205. enta 154 IMportina dala DOM 154 VIEWING tado ao recien beca 154 Historical Data Archiving window Historical Editor ooccccococcncoconcnnoconnnnconanonononcnnonncnnconanennos 154 Historical Data Point Maintenance window oocccooccnnccnnccnccconcnncnnncnnccnnnnonnnncnnonnnrnnnonncnnnnanrnnnnnnrnnnonaneness 154 Historical Editor Configuration MENU oooooncccnnncccccononnccnnnccnnonnnonennnnnnononannnnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnonns 154 PS LOM Gat Event summat Yanie a a ae 73 A A A A 96 112 FOuny accumulation Meter Tag ai oe aia 100 VO drivers WValiMS Ar src diia 91 Icons Show or Hide in Flex View Menus seirer oiaoi eisiata a taii a lave aeo eai 13 MDO Pro GCE WIZA Oana lr a ds 146 Import Export Data points Historical Editor isc it 154 POUS Database EQUOn tidad lata cias 82 iM PONG GOV Me a to e e dd aces tats as 89 154 IMPOrina Pro ec clan 142 146 INormalon Laden aan 62 DIS DIAY OIG ALON aia adan 44 Instrument failure Display Indicator ooccocooconoccconnnocononnnnononoccnonnnononannnnononnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnannnnnss 44 Paddress Seuinas as sic illa 146 198 SP COMIECUON senenn a cd 198 J AH GAUGING cig ric cee accra ee es er atten Suerte ce Ac Men lac cuhrn a cid tan thet ada ea 112 K Keyboard Control Of CUFSOTF cccccccseecceceeeeeceeseceeceeeceeceaeecesseaeceeseueeessaueeesseeeeeseueeessaueeessegeseeesaaes 28 34 L PANNA eS Cl a dota 194 ASU OOC WISTS i TAC Saucer
206. eport File window 4 3 9 Password Maintenance It is important to keep your system secure not only to protect data on the computer itself but on the SCADA system as well A good security system confirms the identity of the people who are attempting to access the resources protects specific resources from inappropriate access by users and provides a simple efficient way to set up and maintain security on your system RealFlex employs two different methods of applying user and password security Standard security Default allows User IDs to be added changed or removed from the system and to allow certain Flex View functions to be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password for each user For details on how to use the Password Maintenance feature please refer to Section 4 3 9 1 Password Maintenance Standard security Enhanced security allows User Groups and User IDs to be added changed or removed from the system and to allow certain Flex View functions to be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password at a user group level For details on how to use the Password Maintenance feature please refer to Section 4 3 9 2 Password Maintenance Enhanced security Note The Enhanced security system was introduced as an option for systems using the RealFlex4 31 software in combination with the Flex Serv V8 23 application software 4 3 9 1 Password Maintenance Standard security The Password Maintenance w
207. erenced analog data point ROC limit The decimal value in engineering units specifying the amount which a database point must increase or decrease by in order for a rate of change alarm to be posted Alarm action Decimal number 0 3 5 255 which identifies the Action Processor data file record s defining a digital output control to be issued automatically upon this analog s value violating an alarm limit 0 indicates no action An entry in the Alarm Action field requires a file written for use with the Action Processor The Action Processor is a RealFlex task designed to automatically respond to changes in state of status points and out of limits alarm conditions in analog points Alarm deadband Used for analog points that have a tendency to repeatedly violate one of the defined alarm limits The deadband value is specified as a percentage of the total EU range The Alarm Deadband maximum value is 255 i e 25 5 of the total EU range Example EU range 0 100 HLM 90 Alarm Deadband 100 or 10 of total EU Range Value rises to 95 and an alarm is generated Value drops to 85 and no Return to Normal is generated Value rises to 97 and no alarm is generated Value drops to 79 9 and a Return to Normal alarm is generated Value rises to 95 and an alarm is generated or EU range 0 100 LLM 20 Alarm Deadband 100 or 10 of total EU range Value falls to 15 and an alarm is generated Value rises to 25 and no Return to Normal is generated Value
208. ering There are two ways in which you can select PCU s and Tags either by selecting individual PCU s and their tags or by selecting PCU s and tags by their description gt To select individual PCU s and their tags 1 For a new zone click on the Enable filtering check box A tick will appear when activated and the List of PCU s will appear You may select to view all PCU s or a selected set of PCU s A tick in the check box to the left of the PCU name indicates that it has been selected To select All click on the button Conversely to de select all click on the button To choose individual PCU s click on the check box to the left of the required PCU name to toggle between selected and unselected To invert the selection i e change all selected to unselected and all unselected to selected click on the button Page 216 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Selecting Tag 1 When you click on a selected PCU in the List of PCU s a button will appear to the right of this PCU 2 Click on the button The Tag Filtering for PCU window will appear Tag Filtering for PCU v Apply the filtering YC Cancel l db E Analogs A Meters Gg status ALARM_30 ALARM 30 MINS LATE AUTO O05 AUTOMATIC OGS COMMPAIL PEU COMMUNICATIONS DT O00 00 PUMP 1 STATUS DI 0O01 PUMP STATUS DYT_O0_ 02 PUMPS STATUS 0100203 DEL Valve STATUS 01200204 INTRUDER ALAR
209. esaesseeeeeeeesssaeaseeeeeeessesesaageeeeeeees 96 Controlled Change failure cooooconccnnncccconoonnccnnnnononononncnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanncnnnnonnnnnnnananenoss 44 do A A 44 Controlling cusor movement by keyboard ooccccccccocccnnccccconconcnononncnononancnnnonnnnncnnnononancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanens 28 34 Copy Historical archive data srra tido 154 DISplays TOME GIO DO rd ecc cadena cta root cias occitano a 50 POUS Database calar etnia oia 84 Summary information to the Chipboard sica id nda 72 119 Greates Flex Report illescas o di 163 UE A A A RT A TE A 204 208 Sono PASS WO tilda 183 Tank standar eee 115 Gntical alarm sounder SUN a 188 GS CS ANTAA AEE AA E A A E A AE EA OAT E E E E E E E E IA Re ee E A 79 CONTE A Re eR re ee ee een 89 Importing Exporting Historical data POINTS cccccccocnccnnccnoncnncconnnnconnnnnnancnnnnonnnncnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 154 IMportind Exportina POS iene dan 89 Saving and viewing User Reposo lis 120 Gurrent Gross MelerntagS ais 100 Gurrent logged On USer MUST IOGOM i tias 39 Gurrent net Meter AGS cie 100 Gurrent vale Status tags secs cstv A ETN eee 109 GurSor Mode Trends ori AA 57 GUISO Movement DY KEV DO ANG os E A A eevsisaenn eats 28 34 D Dally ACCUMULATION Meter lags ai lab 100 Data Type SUMMA o o a a o do O 72 POL SO UUM CCOO AER OE e sa chahec one detustaenthiontere nd atnaaaduchsemtauctiaaa utes 198 SUMMAKES COMMAN Sd 72 SUMManes Mesa 72 o sea nia eae e
210. esired to effect inclusion in or exclusion from the data acquisition cycle or select Demand Scan to force all points associated with the PCU to be scanned immediately Additional options may be displayed and are I O Driver specific Please refer to applicable I O Driver documentation for more information PCU NO REPLY REPLY alarm acknowledgement is supported from this summary display by pressing the space bar or Ack Page button A Page 48 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 2 3 Active Alarm Window The Active Alarm window banner of the realtime display shows the most recently generated alarms This allows the operator to monitor alarms as they occur without having a specific graphic or summary display on the screen Note The Active Alarm window may be configured to display between 2 and 10 lines of recently generated alarms See Section 4 3 12 8 Alarms window from the Configuration Options menu Alarm Banner 28 Unacknowledged Alarms Microsoft Windows look and feel The number of unacknowledged alarms appears in the title bar As alarms are acknowledged this number diminishes 15 RealFlex4 look and feel On the first line the number of unacknowledged alarms appears superimposed over the date field As alarms are acknowledged this number diminishes until the day field is restored The individual alarms shown on these lines may vary in format depending upon the type of alarm being generat
211. estarted Refer to the applicable I O driver data sheet to determine whether your scanner supports this function Note If warmstart is not selected the new definitions will go into effect the next time RealFlex is shutdown and restarted To warmstart a PCU Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system 2 Click on and highlight the PCU you want to warmstart r r 3 Click on the te button or position the pointer over the selected PCU click right mouse and select Warmstart PCU from the pop up menu The Operation in progress window will appear for a moment and the following message will appear when successful Flex View Any errors are reported by the displaying of messages Respond to these messages as required Page 91 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 4 To edit Telemetry settings Telemetry editing can only be carried out by Flex View users with appropriate user level access Telemetry editing allows a user to edit the telemetry setting parameters for each PCU and its associated communications channel If there is a Telemetry Editor window associated with the I O driver for the selecte
212. et If disabled no tick the report will not be run and Report running disabled will appear for this report in the Next Run Time column of the Report Scheduler window Time base Click on the E button of the Time base field and select required option from the drop down list Choices are Local PC The date and time of your PC clock Server PC The date and time of the clock of the RealFlex server local time Interval Allows you to set the time interval for printing the report Page 132 of 249 A l 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Click on the x button of the Interval field and select a time period from the drop down list Every 15 min Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly or Yearly Depending on the time period set in the Interval field the field s below should be set as follows To set fields with the spinner buttons either click on and highlight the portion of the time and type in the required figure or click on and highlight the portion of the time in the time field and use the spinner buttons to select the required time Every 15 min In the Start minute field set the time for the report to start running May be set from 00 to 14 minutes Hourly In the Start minute field set the time for the report to start running May be set from 00 to 59 minutes Daily In the Start time field set the time of day for the report to start running shown in the format HH MM May be set from
213. ettings dialog box where the selected E mail address es will be displayed in the Recipients field Page 137 of 249 h 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 2 5 Project Journal Utilities menu The Project Journal option is used to view a log of errors and warnings generated for the Project currently open Errors that may be reported include values or tag points having wrong RTU indexing unable to find files An example of the Default Journal is shown below E Default Journal al RA AAA Type time Message _________ JfoisplsyfPoime ES Error 06 10 2003 15 04 21 value dyn 73 P5 255 25 has wrong ATU index 1 OILS 73 P5 255 ES Error 06 10 2003 15 04 21 value_dn 73 FT 92 26 has wrong RTU index 1 OILS 73 FT 92 ES Error 0610 2003 15 04 21 value dyn 73 PT 57 0 has wrong ATU index 1 CIL4 73 PT 57 Ed Error O6 10 2003 15 04 21 value_dyn 73 TT 51 1 has wrong ATU index 1 OIL4 73 17 51 ES Error 0610 2003 15 04 21 value dyn 73 P5 118 21 has wrong RATU index 1 CIL4 73 P5 118 Ed Error 06 10 2003 15 04 21 value dyn 73 PS 119 3 has wrong RATU index 1 OIL4 73 P5 119 E Error 06 10 2003 15 04 21 value dyn 73 44 46 61 has wrong ATU index 1 IL4 73 70 46 Ed Error 06 10 2003 15 04 21 value dyn 73 24 43 7 has wrong ATU index 1 OIL4 PO 43 E ES Error 06 10 2003 15 04 25 cannot open report file MewReport xls The significance of each column in the log is Type May display Error or Warning T
214. evels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window is displayed listing all PCU s on the system 2 From the Database Editor List of project PCU window double click on the required PCU The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 From the Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window either double click on the required meter point or click on and highlight required meter point then click on the button The Tag Properties window will appear Page 100 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual ll Tag Properties Type METER Peu RTU Tagname MT_00_03 7 o Tag description Short METER POINT 3 Extended q oo Units IN ONE Current net Point offset E Curent gross Aus address jo early Subtype jo Monthly Factor i Daily Rollover roo esterday blas raw ho Hourly Units pulze no Last hour Meter type sa Last good A 4 When adding a new Tag enter a Tag name Tag description and values for each parameter as required When editing an existing Tag edit fields as required by overwriting the existing value for each parameter MOTE The Tag Properties window may also be accessed for editing via the Edit Database option o
215. ew V3 1 Helo Manual To edit information and reapply tagging edit existing information When the message is complete click on the Save button To clear the message notification click on the Clear button You will be prompted to confirm the clearing of the tag with a Yes No selection To abort changes and close the window click on the x or 5 button in the title bar of the window Once an information tag has been placed the value of the associated point will display with a yellow I Whenever an operator tries to access an information tagged point to send a control the information placed in the Information Tag window will display prior to the control window to notify the operator of any information associated with the selected point Once an information tag is placed it can be cleared or edited by any user The information tag window will always display the last user logon who edited the text Each time an operator sets or clears an information tag an entry is placed in the Historical Alarm Event Summary 2 3 1 8 Control Tagging Analog and Meter points only Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance A control tag is used to prevent controls on points Once the Control Tag option is selected from the Poke Points menu the following window is displayed Control Tagging Hd Tag Description ATU 1 TAN
216. ex Builder application For Microsoft Windows look and feel gt To select a graphic display Click on the Displays menu button The Select Display window appears listing all defined graphic displays available for the project sorted alphabetically by name This menu serves as an opening menu for the realtime display process Cd LIGHTHOUSE 2 Ey M OVERVIEW Cd OIL4 Cd SOLAR CJ LIGHTHOUSE 3 NEW Cg OILTRENDI Ca WATE CA LIGHTHOUSE 4 GOILI Cd OILTRENDE Ca TE CA LIGHTHOUSE 5 oIL2 Cd OVERVIEW Ca WEBI Cda LIGHTHOUSE 1 EA LIGHTHOUS co Eg ola CA PID E If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the buttons located in the toolbar will scroll the list left or right to the desired name You can also use the scroll bar if the required Display name is not visible To locate a specific name 1 Click on the _ Y button The Set Filter dialog box will appear Set Filter E Enter new patter H Cancel 2 Enter a text string to search for For example if you wanted to locate all displays with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and click on the OK button The Select Display window will change to list only those displays containing xyz in the name The and last nine search patterns are saved and can be recalled by clicking on the x button and selecting required search pattern from the drop down list gt To select a display for viewing Click on the disp
217. ex server before you can save delete or recall Desktop Layouts 1 4 1 To enable the Desktop Layout feature 1 From the Configuration menu select the Options option 2 From the expandable collapsible hierarchy of options click on the Miscellaneous option The Miscellaneous window will appear 3 Inthe Features section click on the Enable Desktop Layouts check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick If you want to display the Desktop Layout window at this point click on the Show Desktop Layouts window check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick 4 Click on the Apply button The Desktop Layouts option in the Configuration menu will now become active 1 4 2 To save a Display Layout 1 Design your display layout by opening required Displays and arranging them in the order you require For example you could resize and reposition the displays in a single window or you could use the Virtual Screens to define your layout 2 From the Desktop Layout window click on the gt Show control buttons button The window will change to display the control buttons Desktop Layout 3 Click on the i Save current layout button The Save Desktop Layout dialog box will appear Page 20 of 249 p Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Save Desktop Layout Save the current desktop layout as Defaut Cancel In this dialo
218. f the Dynamic Display Control Poke Points menu Tag properties can only be edited by Flex View users with appropriate user level access The significance of each field in the display is Tag description Twenty character Short and forty five character Extended free format description of the meter point Point descriptions may be entered in capital or lower case letters Units Ten character units of measure description for the value being accumulated e g BBL M3 GAL etc Accepts both capital and lower case letters Point offset The value in this field tells the I O driver which item of data received from the PCU is to be placed in this record Because the precise requirements depend upon the particular I O driver used to access the data for this point a general description of how to determine the point offset is not possible If this is a pseudopoint an unscanned point then 1 is entered in this field to tell the I O driver to ignore this datapoint A 2 value represents an output only value and is only updated when a control is issued for that database point Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable hardware data sheet Aux address This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver documentation and hardware data sheet Subtype This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver do
219. for tanks American Petroleum Institute API Volume Correction data processing can be applied to tank data The corrections are applied to tank database points for which TANK TYPE is set to 3 Details concerning the corrections to be applied for each point are specified in user generated files and associated database points Processing of tank data for datapoints with LEVEL CONV TYPE 3 is similar to processing for those with LEVEL CONV TYPE 2 except that API volume correction is applied This works as follows When a reading from a PCU is received for a type 3 tank the usual strapping table calculations are made producing the uncorrected product volume Then the API correction calculation specified in file realflex data api tnktbl for the specific datapoint is applied to the uncorrected product volume to produce the corrected product volume This value is placed in the PROD VOL database field If your installation supports tank transactions the BARREL field of each tank transaction display will contain the corrected value The correction factor calculated CTL is also placed in an analog database record specified in the tnktbl file so that it can be displayed in realtime displays Every type 3 tank point must have a separate record in the tnktbl file located in subdirectory realflex data api to specify how its correction factor is to be calculated The different types of calculations and the records required to produce them are descr
220. g Hi_Rate_4 MF_tag Database Editor point name tag Database Editor PCU name tag The flow rate at which the processor switches from the low flow rate factor to the high flow rate factor The tag name of the analog database point in which the current flow rate for the meter is stored The tag name of the status database point that will hold the product type designators corresponding to status values 0 3 2 4 6 0r8 Tag name of analog point containing low flow rate Meter Factor for product 1 status 0 Tag name for low flow rate MF for prod 1 status 0 status 1 status 2 Tag name for low flow rate MF for prod 4 status 3 Tag name for high flow rate MF for prod 1 status 0 Tag name for low flow rate MF for prod 2 Tag name for low flow rate MF for prod 3 Tag name for high flow rate MF for prod 2 status 1 Tag name for high flow rate MF for prod 3 status 2 Tag name for high flow rate MF for prod 4 status 3 Sample mtrtbl entry for a meter using calculation Type 1 P1 P2 TOTAL RTU CTRL 16 i 475 0 MTR_FLW_RAT PROD TYPE 4 MF _PROD1 LO MF _PROD2 LO MF _PROD1 HI MF _PROD2 HI 2 Temperature Compensated Meters with two meter factors MF selected according to product type as identified via a status database point MF f product Net Gross MF For this subtype the meter factor is a function of product type only Each product has a different meter factor The system implemento
221. g box Default is displayed in the Save the current desktop layout as field The Default layout is accessible to all users and is used in conjunction with the Restore the default desktop layout at logoff option in the User Options window See Section 4 3 12 15 4 If you want to save your layout as the default layout click on the OK button A prompt will appear asking for your confirmation Click on the OK button to overwrite the existing layout or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation OR If you want to save your layout as the new layout enter a name for the layout in the Save the current desktop layout as field then click on the OK button The Display layout will be saved with your user profile 1 4 3 To delete a saved Display Layout Note You will not be able to delete the Default layout 1 From the Desktop Layout window click on the Show control buttons button 2 Click on the hd button to the right of the Name field and from the drop down list select the layout you want to delete 3 Click on the Delete saved layout button A prompt will appear asking for your confirmation 4 Click on the OK button to delete the layout or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation Selecting OK will delete the Display layout from your user profile 1 4 4 To change an existing Display Layout 1 From the Desktop Layout window click on the al button to the right of the Name field and fro
222. ge the Point Value Display To change the Point Value display in the trend area and in the Point Description line left click on the far right column which displays the current display definition of the analog point i e RAW MIN MAX or AVG The values will cycle through RAW MIN MAX or AVG and the selected point in the associated Trend display will also change to reflect the type of data requested This feature is only available for analog values When the display type is changed the trend is automatically reset These changes are only in effect while the trend is being viewed Once the trend is closed and reopened the display will reflect the initial trend definition information Page 61 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 3 Dynamic Display Control Dynamic display controls can be grouped into the following types Poke Points see Section 2 3 1 Realtime Controls see Section 2 3 2 2 3 1 Dynamic Display Control Poke Points The term Poke Point refers to a group of functions that can be quickly and easily invoked by pointing and clicking with the mouse or trackball Poke point functions include expanded displays Such as bar graphs dials and trend charts manual data correction tagging alarm related activities and user supplied procedures To use a poke point while viewing a graphic or summary display place the cursor on a dynamically updated element of the display and click the menu right button
223. ges if required by the I O driver protocol Active Represents the current state of PCU scan control permissiveness ON signifies that the PCU is communicating with the I O driver and the field device OFF indicates that the PCU is not communicating Channel A number between 1 and 16 that is used by the I O driver software to identify the PCU or PCUs to be serviced by each driver Description A description for the PCU Maximum of 20 characters including spaces Analogs The total number of Analog points Meters The total number of Meter points Status The total number of Status points Page 82 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Tanks The total number of Tank points In the Status bar at the bottom of the window is displayed the total number of PCUs total point count and the total number of Analog Status Meter and Tank points for the system 3 3 2 Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window gt To access the Database Editor Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system 2 From the Database Editor List of project PCU window double click on the required PCU The Database Editor T
224. hange to blue click to select gt To define Security Settings This option is used to define the security settings for all groups and their assigned users 1 Click on the E button The Security Settings dialog box will appear Security Settings Fa IW Case sensitive user name Current user must logoff M Restat will logoff current user M Restart will unlock all users Minimum password length 1 l Password history Password lifetime days 30 l Attempts before lockout 3 Attempts timeout mirn Lockout duration miri 5 Apply Cancel 2 Inthe top section of this dialog box selected required security options by clicking on required check box es to toggle between active and non active A tick will appear when active l i Options are Complex Password When this option is active user passwords must not contain the users name and must contain characters from each of the following three groups Description Examples Letters uppercase and lowercase Numerals 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Symbols all printable characters not 10 8 _ 1P1 1 lt gt defined as letters or numerals See also Creating Strong Passwords Page 175 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Case sensitive user name When this option is active user ID s will be case sensitive When you assign the user ID users must type the same capitalization when they enter their user ID at
225. has been reached you will see the message Not Enough Memory Close one or more windows 1 7 2 Resizing and moving the Main Flex View window During the operation of Flex View you may find it useful to reduce the size of the Flex View window and or move it to a different location on the screen For example it may be desirable to simultaneously view another application you have running in which case you could reduce the size of each and move each to a different side of the screen To resize or move the Main Flex View window For Microsoft Windows look and feel 1 Click on the Bl Restore button in the right hand side of the applications Title Bar OR Right click on the Flex view icon at the bottom of your screen and select Restore from the pop up menu The Main Flex View window will reduce in size as shown in the example below but any open displays the Alarm banner Nodes State for Project window and the User Name banner will remain in their original size and positions until they are individually closed or moved Page 28 of 249 y A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual b Flex View Miel efi Main Utilities Configuration Displays at 15 01 03 08 53 27 2 Move the mouse pointer over the edge or corner of the reduced window The pointer becomes a double pointed arrow 3 Drag the window border until the window is the desired size then release the button 4 Move the window by clicking on an
226. he associated status database record Authorized Controlled Changes of State Authorized controlled changes of state will result in the generation of an authorized change event upon detection of the expected status Controlled Change Failure Time out If the controlled point fails to report the expected state within a specified time interval an alarm will be generated advising of the control timeout Transducer Over Under Range or Alarm Limits Exceeded Analog input values are initially compared to either the database specified raw or EU range according to the EU conversion type If the EU conversion type is zero and the MIN MAX EU values are both non zero or the EU conversion type is one and the input is greater than MAX RAW or less than the MIN RAW the point is alarmed as an instrument failure and the current value is forced to the violated MIN MAX EU span value Otherwise analog points are checked against various limits that were specified during the database configuration process These include LOLO value below the defined low low limit LO value below the defined low limit HI value above the defined high limit HIHI value above the defined high high limit ROC value is changing too fast exceeding ROC limit Tank database records similarly afford LOLO LO HI and HIHI alarm limit violation checking based on feet inches of product level Each status database point is designated as belonging for purposes of alarm processi
227. her logged ON USESS neose n E E 23 SAAC ne meee ere ee evn ero PO GRR TORN oe rE eR Ee IE TNT 23 Server Date Time Setting ANd CHANGING sarias E A N 221 Server unavailable alarm sounder settings occccccccccccooonccnnnnconononncnnnnnnnononannccnnnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnnnnnnnnns 188 set Date in Date Times ias 28 35 o A N A alanennens 194 SA WMS AG Dile ita 27 221 THmemn Date lime Meli a a 28 35 Time SPAN ATENAS a A A AAA N N 57 TUTE SLAM UMA IS aa a a ER AAA EA ENDE 219 VIMOS A A E ee Aw eens A essen 16 Sere ver Time Datedialog DO ari a cds EA A AAA A A 27 Setting and Saving WINDOW Properties sv aii AA A A E 28 29 o ees ce cela a a a se dana ceuebcaael a E a T E 41 Show Desktop Layouts WIN O Weir sg sscaweldtenacaasmtbancnsacaaans idaanacenetdntaedmotsaanl ateonaeeuecenseeeess 191 CONSI FIS VIEW Menu Secc aula e a lancia lesions soleil depa 13 Sel Server Date TiMe WINGOW suecan e naa a aiana nadia 221 Unavailable c mmands IM MENUS ysrurisniicito isso dinr eana ine aa aana ds 191 Sllence Audible ala Musica ictonadedecontaraacuensed Meg placa 62 SIZES Ol CIS OLAV A saazaaueshrecosiudansaoazeionarsdeaaeaquea a aa a 231 MO OLIN PP ee 57 SMTP Server Scheduled reports by e Mall ccccccccooccnnccnnncccconononccnnnonononancnnnnnnnnononancnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 130 SONT AAA CUN S as 28 33 Sounds window Configuration Options MeNU oocccnnncccccconccnnnnccncononnncnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnononnnanennnnnnnnnnnos 188 Standard Sec
228. hown and the window is full use the or 4 buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the desired name Journal field The Journal field becomes active when selecting the Project Journal command 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Journal field The Journal window will appear 2 Select the desired Journal from the Journal window which will list by name each Journal defined in the RealFlex system You will note that Journal names are presented alphabetically If the window is full use the or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the Journal needed PCU field The PCU field becomes active when selecting the Active Alarms Hist Alarm Event and PCU Summary commands 1 Click on the EA button to the right of the PCU field The Select PCU window will appear 2 Select the desired PCU from the Select PCU window which will list by name each PCU defined in the RealFlex system You will note that PCU names are presented alphabetically If the window Is full use the or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the PCU needed Page 226 of 249 M0 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Procedure field The Procedure field becomes active when selecting the Run Remote Procedure command 3 Click on the e button to the right of the Procedure field The Select Remote Procedure window will a
229. ibed below Each record consists of a number of elements The file must be built according to same rules outlined for meters in the previous section Each tnktbl entry specifies the numerical data and associated database fields needed to perform the calculation and each record also specifies one of the following calculation types 1 Spherical Butane Tank Net Volume Gross Volume CTL The CTL is calculated using the product relative density constant and the scanned product tank temperature as input to the GSA TP16 routine which has been modified to calculate only a TABLE 24 correction factor based on relative density and product temperature No vapor pressure correction is done at this time but the structure of the tnktbl is designed to include vapor pressure to allow for future expansion Tank_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Page 118 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 Menus 4 1 Main menu The Main menu offers the following commands RealFlex Summaries Provides the primary methods for accessing RealFlex summary screens For details please refer to Section 4 1 1 Data Summaries Provides the primary methods for accessing RealFlex Data summary screens For details please refer to Section 4 1 2 Demand Reports Provides the primary access to allow you to print standardized reports access to additional RealFlex Utilities and printed summaries reflecting system data a
230. ices The data processor selects the meter factor based on the product status The CTL is calculated from a relative density constant found in the mtrtbl entry for the product and the scanned analog product temperature by a Gas Processors Association GPA subroutine The subroutine which is described in GPA Technical Publication 16 has been modified to only do a TABLE 24 temperature correction based on relative density and temperature No vapor pressure correction is done at this time but the structure of the mtrtbl is designed to include vapor pressure to allow for future expansion The mtrtbl record structure for calculation type 5 variation 2 is as follows Meter_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Calculation type 5 Product_type_tag The tag name of the status database point containing the product type MF_Product1_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the meter factor for product 1 status 0 MF_Product2_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the meter factor for product 2 status 1 API Subroutine ASCII characters TP16 GSA Tech Pub 16 Product density constant Floating point number relative density Product_temperature_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product temperature Product vapor pressure Floating point number this entry is ignored Sample mtrtbl entry for calculation Type 5 variation 2 PRPANE_TOT GULF_PLAINS
231. ilar in appearance and operation to the Analog Control window Page 69 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Meter controls are available from both graphic displays and System PCU Summary screens Tag Control for Statuses Tag Control Tag RTU 1 D0 00 04 Description START PUMP 3 Please select new option and press Execute mea The Tag Control window facilitates sending control signals to the device associated with the status database point linked to the dynamic display To cause a value to be sent click on the required value then click on the Execute button After a field device control is issued the operator is notified either through an alarm or an event notification whether the device changes to the commanded state before control time out occurs Status controls are available from both graphic displays and System PCU Summary screens 2 3 2 2 For RealFlex look and feel Tag Control for Analogs D Analog Control nI 38 4 499997 l 0 000 g 000 ENE a 499997 The Analog Control window is used to transmit a numeric value to the remote unit associated with the analog database point There is no special alarm notification associated with controls sent to analog points however numerical displays of the value being controlled are displayed in white and a gt is appended to the display field until the associated control executed failed indication is confirmed by the I O driver
232. ime The Date and time of day the error message was logged shown in the format DD MM YYYY HH MM SS Message Displays the nature of the error or warning Display The name of the Display associated with the error or warning Point The name of the Tag Point associated with the error or warning File name The name of the File associated with the error or warning Symbol The name of the Symbol associated with the error or warning gt To view the Project Journal For Microsoft Windows look and feel From the Utilities menu select the Project Journal option If there is more than one Journal to choose from the Journal window appears listing all defined Journals available for the project sorted alphabetically by name Page 138 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Journal E o If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the buttons located in the toolbar will scroll the list left or right to the desired name You can also use the scroll bar if the required Journal is not visible To locate a specific name Click on the 7 button The Set Filter dialog box will appear Set Filter E Enter new patterr Enter a text string to search for x x For example if you wanted to locate all Journal with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and click on the OK button The Journal window will change to list only those Journals containing xyz i
233. in Menu The selections available from the Main menu provide the primary methods for accessing RealFlex summary screens Data summary screens Demand reports logon logoff selection Flex View version information and the ability to exit Flex View RealFlex Summaries The RealFlex Summaries selection contains the System PCU Communications Active Alarms and Historical Alarm Events Summary screens The System PCU selection allows the user to view all PCU s and points defined for the RealFlex system acknowledge alarms and send controls The Communications Summary screen displays the status of each PCU communicating with the remote devices The Active and Historical Alarm Event Summaries provide alarm event data display for all points in the system or sorted by PCU name Data Summaries The Data Summaries menu allows the user to view summaries of all Analog Meter Status Tank Manually Overwritten Alarm Disabled Control Tagged and Information Tagged points in the system Demand Reports The Demand Reports option allows you to print standardized reports access to additional RealFlex Utilities and printed summaries reflecting system data and to request a partial or complete report of the alarms The Utilities Menu This menu contains the Print Window Print Preview Print Alarm Page Report Scheduler Set Server Time Date Project Journal and Remote Modules Help functions The Print Window utility allows the user to print the entire screen for
234. in the sub menu then click on the Move ltem Up or Move Item Down buttons until the selected button command or separator is in the required position in the list gt Copy buttons or commands If you want to copy a button or a command to a different sub menu but apply different arguments 1 Click on the 5 Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy 2 Click on and highlight the button or command in the menu or sub menu to be copied then click on the Copy button or key Ctrl C 3 Click on the amp Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy where you want to paste the copied item 4 Click on the B Paste button or key Ctrl V The copied item will be added to the selected menu or sub menu lf required set the new arguments lf copying a button rename the button Page 212 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Delete buttons commands or separators 1 Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy 2 Click on and highlight the button command or separator to be deleted from the menu or sub menu then click on the delete button or key Delete If you want to remove the item and copy it to the Clipboard click on the cut button or key
235. in window and its displays Flex iew Options El Application Environment Sounds a Colors W Enable Flex Language support i Miscellaneous Use language setting for all products Enalish United States z Environment Product Info Use product specific language English United Kingdom ae Advanced gt gt fv Apply the settings for current Windows user only a M Enable RealFlexd look and feel for main window and displays i Main M s da General font for windows Change H User Functions done Settings Miscellaneous Zone Editor 2 aad Font for alarm banner and alarm event summaries Change El a Speen Display application background Only when maximized Main Menu caca too The Environment window is divided into two halves The top half allows you to choose and specify a product specific language for use within Flex View The bottom half allows you to define the User Interface Language setting Product specific language translations are produced using the Flex Language program and saved on your Windows PC For details please refer to the Flex Language program Help documentation Page 195 of 249 MD 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual gt To enable a Product specific language 1 Click on the Enable Flex Language support check box A tick will appear when enabled and the two options listed below will become active Click again to disable no tick
236. indow as shown below allows User IDs to be added changed or removed from the system and to allow certain Flex View functions to be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password for each user Using the Password Maintenance window up to two hundred 200 separate users can be given individually specified access to the various Flex View options and features that can be password protected To begin Password checking the user must initiate the User Logon Logoff sequence After entering a valid USER ID the user is said to be logged on and the passwords associated with that USER ID remains active until one user logs off or another user logs on even if the system is rebooted User logon activities are printed with events on the Alarm Printer gt To access the Password Maintenance window Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password See To set change user access level below for information on user access levels If access has been disabled users will only be able to view their assigned levels of access to certain Flex View functions Page 168 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual From the Configuration menu select the Password Maintenance option The Password Maintenance window will be displayed Password Maintenance hal xl E add user Y Remove user Change user E Change access A e DEMO ais DEMO USER R Se CRT relate utilities ty Send controls Server exi
237. ion dialog box will appear where you will be prompted to confirm deletion of the PCU by typing in the name of the PCU to be deleted then clicking on the OK button Confirm Action Warning PCU selected for deletion has database points associated with it They will be lost Confirm this by entering the name of the PCU to be deleted PCU name Cancel Upon confirmation all of the associated scan points will be deleted along with the PCU Note When the PCU is deleted all defined database points associated with the PCU will also be deleted In addition all Display Dynamics and any historical recording in effect for the deleted database points will be removed and are not recoverable 3 3 4 Importing Exporting PCU s Importing Exporting PCU s can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Importing Exporting PCU s options allow the importing and exporting of PCU data to a Microsoft Excel CSV file and are primarily used by system administrators to create a database or to edit large amounts of data within an existing database The system administrator may choose to use Excel to create their database Once the database has been created within Excel it can then be imported into Flex View via the Database Editor The Flex View Database Editor only allows for single point editing If you had say 5000 records all with one field to be changed it would be much qui
238. ion Processor The Action Processor is a RealFlex utility designed to automatically respond to changes in state of status points and out of limits alarm conditions in analog points Page 110 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Control type The information in this field specifies the type of control to pass to the I O driver Interpretation of the code depends upon the particular I O driver being used See your I O Driver manual and applicable data sheet for your hardware The following conventions are followed by some I O Drivers 0 Not controllable 1 Momentary output works with Operate Timer to close the relay based on the value given in the operate timer field 2 Latching output closes the relay 11 Momentary output with no digital input point RealFlex does not check for the change 12 Latching output with no digital input point RealFlex does not check for the change 99 Internal pseudopoint Operate timer 50 msec Represents a value that will be downloaded to a PLC RTU indicating how long to momentarily latch the corresponding relay Please consult the appropriate I O driver data sheet to determine if this function is supported by the I O driver you are utilizing Timeout timer 10 msec Number of 10 second intervals to wait for a point to reach the controlled state If the timer expires without a corresponding status change the control queue will close and a control time out alarm
239. is generated In the States section Description Six character textual description for each of the states a digital point can assume Application Point Device PLC RTU dependent e g ON OFF START STOP SET RESET for 1 bit ERROR CLOSED OPEN TRAVEL for 2 bit Color Color to display alarm event message and dynamic representations of the referenced status point when it is in the corresponding state Ctrl I D Represents either the relay number or the control point in the remote unit 1 255 Must be non zero for control output Refer to the I O driver documentation included with your scanner and applicable data sheet for your hardware gt To change the color in the States section Click on required button A pop up pallet of standard colors will be displayed Click on the required color The selected color will now be displayed on the button top 5 When you have completed all your entries or changes click on the Fi button in the top of the window to save your changes A Database Modification dialog box will appear displaying the progress for the addition modification of the Tag in the RealFlex database Page 111 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 5 5 Tank Point Definition 3 5 5 1 Tank Tag properties Adding or deleting Tags can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Tank Tag Properties window is used to provide
240. is greater smaller than the deadband for the I O Driver you may be losing data you wish to save or attempting to save more data than you are actually collecting from the field device The Lifetime entry consists of two fields The first field specifies the numerical count that will apply to the second field which allows specification of Days Weeks Months or Years The two fields define the amount of time for collection The Lifetime field allows specification of a maximum of 999 days 260 weeks 60 months or 5 years The State signifies whether data associated with the point is currently in historical collection If On historical data collection will begin for the defined point If Off no historical data will be collected If a Meter type was selected the Meter line option boxes will become active This allows selection of the type of meter data to be collected The options are Net Hour Day Month and Year All meter types can be added during the add process but must be edited separately After all fields have been assigned click on the Add button The record will be saved and a message Point PCU name Tag name added successfully will appear Click on the OK button to return to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window 4 3 6 2 To delete a historical point 1 In the Historical Data Point Maintenance window select database point s to be deleted From the Action toolbar click on the ES butto
241. isable alarm generation for this point check box to remove the tick then click on the Execute button RealFlex4 look and feel To Disable Click on the DISABLED button To Enable Click on the ENABLED button Once a selection has been made the user will automatically be returned to the System PCU Summary or graphic display from which the Poke Point menu was accessed To cancel the Alarm Enable Disable process click on the x or S button in the title bar of the window Once an alarm has been disabled the associated value of the point will display with a yellow A Each time an alarm enable or disable option is selected an entry is made in the Historical Alarm Event Summary unless the operator pulls the pin and cancels the process 2 3 2 Dynamic Display Control Realtime Controls A Control Point is a dynamically updated element or field that is associated with a controllable device When you click on one of these points a window will appear displaying the PCU Tag name and current value of the point Control points can be located on the graphic display screen or on the System PCU Summary screen Control points are created during system implementation and can be created for pseudopoints points not directly associated with actual physical devices as well as database points associated with controllable devices When a control is sent to a pseudopoint the database value is changed with no signals being sent to I O devices
242. it A E id RA ad AAA 142 Fonts Setting for Pict and DyN layerS occcccccccccccoonnccnnncconononnncnnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnonoss 203 Setting for RealFlex4 look and feel occccccccooccnncccnnccononononncnonnnnonononcnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnononnnnnnnos 194 Fonts window Configuration Options Menu ccccccccccnnccnncccncnnnonncnnnnnononannnnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnss 203 Freetext DYNAMO li di aa A aaa 52 Frequency Tor alatint Sounder ties ladera 188 G Gaude DIN ead hoa hil ead ats ee reteset enacts a eat 52 H Fating execution oia kind 28 Page 240 of 249 ii 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Hardware Key Flex VieW product registration ooccccooncnnccoconcncoconcnnnnoconoonanoncnnanonnononcnnnonarnnonanennnns 197 ICID FIEX A A 232 ee aS ae rene A eee eee O 139 221 Ann an a e cance itu e chvee sale austen nstnedet beds 112 Fe ees ela era rhe O A A cctaeec tts AAE E nah ied 44 96 A O E aedaevate II O 44 Hide ICONS in Flex View MENUS cccccesececcseseeeceasscecceuseecceeeecseseeeceaeeecsaaseeeseseessageeesseneeessseaseeenes 13 Unavailable commands IN MENUS cccccseeseeceeeeeeceeeceaeeeeecaeuseeeeeeseseceeesuaaeeeesseaaeeeeessaaseeeessaasess 191 Virtual SCKEGNS A E a id 16 A O E o OO E O O II 44 96 a a A E 44 PAISTORIG Aa EVENTS ct ndo cede otto coca 68 Fuistoricalcarchived ata Adital ia inicie sets 154 O 154 EDONG AJIA pomada r
243. k on the _ button The Import CSV file dialog box will appear 2 Locate the file to be imported then click on the Open button The Files of type will always be CSV File csv A window will appear displaying the import progress Page 160 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Please wait Processing tags E Cancel After the data points have been imported you will be returned to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window 4 3 6 5 To view historical data The contents of the historical collection database can be viewed through the use of the View function Select the database point you wish to view by either right clicking on the PCU or the Type field or by clicking on and highlighting the database point you want to view then from the Action toolbar click on the a button When either of these methods is used the following window will be displayed The title bar will display the PCU and tag name RTU_1 D1_ 00 00 1708 2007 01 039 2005 0170972003 0170972003 01709 2003 0170972003 0170972003 01709 2003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 0170972003 01709572003 End of historical data Total points count 24 A 5000 0001 0040 E 3407546 E 37 09 3172 133 11 218 Tadao 115 156 13 37 16 3906 13 37 18 6440 13 37 20 421 13 37 22 234 13 37 23 969
244. l 4 3 12 1 Application window Configuration Options menu The Application window as shown below allows you to change the Application start up actions whether tooltips should be displayed or not whether to allow the operator to minimize resize and move the main window and to select the Report Viewer Flex iew Options Application Application Sounds i naa M Open last project at startup Tooltips gt Miscellaneous M Show for display Links Ennan Froject updating pa 3 Product Info pon do oo E O E E E a O r Sow har display Wales Et sr Update all components silently Tag descriptions po aii PEU and tag names Sores on 5 a Main Window H Main Menu C Auto User Functions M Allow to minimize e fone Settings MW Show in the Displays dialog Iw Allow to resize and move Zone Editor Advanced Report Wiewer iexplore exe E El User Options Main Menu caca emp The Application window is divided into three sections Project updating Main Window and Tooltips a pop up definition There are also two other options which are discussed below Open last project at startup option To automatically open the last project used when Flex View is started click on the Open last project at startup check box A tick will appear when activated If this box is not checked on starting Flex View you will have to manually open a project via the Configuration
245. l using computer memory and Central Processing Unit CPU time To prevent system overload avoid excessive use of this feature For Microsoft Windows look and feel To minimize a window Click on the E button in the right hand side of the Displays Title Bar Use this command to reduce the window to an icon similar to the one shown below This icon can be moved anywhere on the screen TR_BH_67 EIM EA gt To maximize or Restore a window Click on the icon and select Maximize or Restore from the pop up menu or click on the ol or Al button When Maximized the window will fill the Flex View Application window When Restored the window will return to the size and location it had before it was minimized A minimized window can also be restored by placing the pointer on the icon and clicking twice in rapid succession i e double clicking Page 32 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual For RealFlex4 look and feel To minimize a window Click on the El button in the upper right hand corner of the Display window Use this command to reduce the window to an icon similar to the one shown below This icon can be moved anywhere on the screen OG Overview i To maximize or Restore a window Click on the icon and select Maximize or Restore from the pop up menu or click on the Ej or button When Maximized the window will fill the Flex View Application window When Restored the wi
246. lay name required Page 230 of 249 MA 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual For RealFlex look and feel gt To select a graphic display 1 Click on the Displays menu button The Select Display window appears listing all defined graphic displays available for the project sorted alphabetically by name This menu serves as an opening menu for the realtime display process SELECT DISPLAY alo OVERY IEW SAMPLES WATER1 WATERZ If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the Al e buttons located in the upper left corner of the window will scroll the list one page up or down to the desired name Note The Keypad arrow keys do not allow you to scroll through pages in this menu To locate a specific name Click on the asterisk button A pop up window will appear Enter neu pattern ir Enter a text string to search for For example if you wanted to locate all displays with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and press Enter The Select Display window will change to list only those displays containing xyz in the name You may also choose to simply type the name or first letters of a name from the keyboard in the field at the top of the Select Display window A box will appear around the closest matching name gt To select a display for viewing Click on the display name required Note If no selections are made from the Sele
247. lbar click on the Y button The Filter dialog box will appear Page 156 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Filter PCL E Type ALL ll Tag i Clear Cancel 2 To filter by PCU name in the PCU field enter the PCU name Wildcards may be used or click on the button and select required PCU from the drop down list To filter by database type click on the x button to the right of the Type field and select required type from the drop down list To filter by tag name in the Tag field enter the tag name Wildcards may be used or click on the LU button and select required Tag from the drop down list 3 Once all selections have been made click on the OK button This will return you to the Historical Data Point Maintenance window and will display all historical database definitions that match the selected criteria To clear all selections and reset the form to show all denoted by an asterisk in the PCU and Tag fields and an ALL in the Type field click the on Clear button To exit without making any changes click the on Cancel button 4 3 6 1 To add a historical point 1 From the Action toolbar click on the El button The Add Point Maintenance dialog box will appear Add Point Maintenance PCL aru y Type METER H Tag MmT oo y Deadband fioo Lifetime State On Meter Nef Hour Day Month Year Cancel Page 157 of 249 A 50
248. lex Server See Clock mode field below Status Summary Open status summary Tank Summary Open tank summary User Logon Logoff Perform user logon or logoff 2 From the list click on the command required The name of the selected command will appear in the Command field and a description of the command will be added alongside Description Depending on the command selected additional fields may also become active Information on how to set these fields are described below After all the fields have been completed a default caption title will be entered in the Menu item caption field 3 If required edit the caption in the Menu item caption field by overwriting the default caption 4 After completing all fields click on the OK button You will be returned to the Main Menu or User Functions window where the name of the selected application command batch file etc will be added to the button or sub menu Arguments field The Arguments field becomes active when selecting the Run Local Program and Run Remote Procedure commands You can restrict access to the command by applying arguments 1 Click on the gt button to the right of the Arguments field A pop up menu will appear IP Address of Node 1 IP Address of Node 2 IP Address of Current Mode Project Directory Logged User Mame Password Main Node Number Standby Mode Humber 2 Click on the required option You will be retu
249. m the Report Scheduler window click on and highlight Properties the report to be edited then click on the button The Scheduled Report Properties window will be displayed Scheduled Report Properties Schedule Enabled for scheduling a Time base Loca PC Interval Yearly Start time Report User defined report DailpF lows bl Predefined report Flex Report Output i Print report on the default printer W Save report file s to folder C Program Piles DA TAC Projects Demo Alpha E E Append date of running to the name of report file Day of month Month Janua T Miscellaneous M Send report by E mail Subject Fles View report REPORT from CONSOLE a gt Settings Iw Create report in CS format cel The Scheduled Report Properties window is divided into four sections Report Schedule Output and Miscellaneous Report section 1 Choose the type of report by clicking on the appropriate option box Options are User defined report Predefined report and Flex Report 2 Click on the E button of the Report field and select required report from the drop down list Schedule section Enabled for scheduling This option allows you to enable disable the scheduling of the report Click on the check box to toggle between enabled and disabled A tick will appear when enabled and the report will be printed at the scheduled time s
250. m the drop down list select the layout you want to change 2 Redefine your display layout 3 From the Desktop Layout window click on the gt Show control buttons button 4 Click on the i Save current layout button The Save Desktop Layout dialog box will appear Page 21 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Save Desktop Layout Save the current desktop layout as The name of the layout you wanted to change should be displayed in the Save the current desktop layout as field If you want to overwrite a different layout click on the J button and from the drop down list select the layout you want to overwrite 5 Click on the OK button A prompt will appear asking for your confirmation Click on the OK button to overwrite the existing layout or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation 1 4 5 To select a saved Display Layout From the Desktop Layout window click on the x button to the right of the Name field and from the drop down list select required layout Page 22 of 249 p Ms 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 5 Communications status with RealFlex server The button on the Flex View application toolbar provides you with a visual indication for the connection status with the RealFlex server Through this button you can also See who else is logged onto the same project See which other user has access to the same zones as you Send messages to logged
251. mary process is invoked via the Main menu A pop up menu is displayed to allow selection of the desired data type summary Data type summaries are Analog Meter Status Tank Manual Overwrite Alarm Disabled Control Tagged Information Tagged For all Data Summary screens the PageUp and PageDown keys or the on screen Page Up and Page Down buttons can be used to scroll through the pages Alarms may also be acknowledged from the Analog Status Meter and Tank summary screens by page To acknowledge all alarms on the page click on the Ack Page button and select Yes to confirm acknowledgement You can capture an image of the currently open Summary by sending it directly to the Printer using the Print Window option fro m the Utilities menu or you can copy the whole summary or the displayed page to the Clipboard as plain text You can then paste the contents of the Clipboard into another application e g WordPad Excel etc Right click on the open summary and select Copy Page or Copy All from the pop up menu Page 72 of 249 he f 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 4 2 Historical Alarm Event The Historical Event Summary display provides the operator with an easy to use mechanism to review alarms and events that have occurred during recent operations E amp Historical Event Summary for RTU_1 OR x fr Page Down Page Up E Options als SHE 20 656 EY AIL 1 DELIVERY PRESSURE ALARM GENERATION EMABLED EY ATU
252. n field you can rearrange the order of the network connections in the list The address position in the list represents the order in which connections will be tried The main purpose for multiple addresses is to accommodate network redundancy so if you cannot connect to RealFlex using the first IP address Flex View will try the second IP address and so on 1 2 Select Node 1 or Node 2 as required In the Network interface configuration section click on and highlight the network connection to be rearranged Click on the 3 buttons to move the connection up or down the list until the connection is in the required position Select other connections that require repositioning and repeat Step 3 above until they are in their required positions Page 200 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To allow automatic restoration of lost connections 1 Click on the check box to the left of Automatically restore a connection A tick will appear when activated 2 Enter atime interval in the trying every XX seconds field Either double click on and highlight the existing time and type in the new one or use the spinner buttons i to change the time May be set from 0 to 999 seconds default 10 seconds After all entries have been made to the Project window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes 4
253. n You will be prompted to confirm the deleting the database point s with a OK Cancel selection Click on the OK button to continue or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation Note If a point is deleted all associated historical information is also deleted If you confirm deletion of a point and the associated historical data there is no recovery method for retrieving associated historical data Page 158 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 6 3 To edit a historical point The only fields accessible while in Edit mode are Deadbana Lifetime and State 1 From the Historical Data Point Maintenance window click on and highlight database point to be edited 2 From the Action toolbar click on the Ey button The Edit Point Maintenance dialog box will appear Edit Point Maintenance PLU ATU y Type METER Tag MT_o0 02 D eadband Lifetime fi ve a a State f On C Off Meter Meth Aou TA Gen Month E Year Cancel 3 Edit fields as required Note If the time in the Lifetime field is decreased all historical information prior to the new time span designation will be lost For example if the lifetime of a point is one year and is changed to one day all information prior to one day will be deleted Once the lifetime is shortened historical data prior to the new lifetime is immediately removed and is unrecoverable 4 After you have edited required fields
254. n the name The and last nine search patterns are saved and can be recalled by clicking on the El button and selecting required search pattern from the drop down list gt To select a Journal for viewing Click on the Journal name required For RealFlex look and feel From the Utilities menu select the Project Journal option If there is more than one Journal to choose from the Journal window appears listing all defined Journals available for the project sorted alphabetically by name JOURNAL jej De Page 139 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the F buttons located in the upper left corner of the window will scroll the list one page up or down to the desired name Note The Keypad arrow keys do not allow you to scroll through pages in this menu To locate a specific name Click on the asterisk button A pop up window will appear Enter new pattern ir Enter a text string to search for For example if you wanted to locate all Journals with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and press Enter The Journal window will change to list only those Journals containing xyz in the name You may also choose to simply type the name or first letters of a name from the keyboard in the field at the top of the Journal window A box will appear around the closest matching name gt T
255. n the x button to display a calendar as shown in the example below Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 2 1 2 3 8 9 10 15 MEA 17 22 23 24 29 30 31 E E 7 2 Click on the A or arrows to scroll through the months OR Select required month by clicking on the name of the Month shown at the top of the calendar A pop up list showing all months will be displayed Click on the required month in the list 3 Select required year by clicking on the Year shown at the top of the calendar Spinner buttons will appear allowing you to select the required year 4 With the required month displayed select required day by clicking on the day in the calendar Page 35 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual gt To seta Time Method 1 Click on and highlight the portion of the time in the time field and type in the required time Shown in the format HH MM SS Method 2 E Click on and highlight the portion of the time in the time field and use the spinner buttons i to select the required time Page 36 of 249 ii I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 8 User Logon Logoff When User ID and password security has been implemented for your Flex View application system operators completing their work shift or otherwise leaving their console unattended should Log off from the RealFlex server Similarly operators just starting a work shift or returning to an unattended console should Log on The
256. nd to request a partial or complete report of the alarms For details please refer to Section 4 1 3 User Login Logoff Allows you to Log On or Log Off your RealFlex application For details please refer to Section 4 1 4 About Flex View Used to display Flex View program information For details please refer to Section 4 1 5 Exit Flex View Allows you to exit the Flex View program For details please refer to Section 4 1 6 4 1 1 RealFlex Summaries RealFlex Summary Screens provides the Data Type Summary utility to allow viewing of all system database points of a given type on a multi page display The PageUp and PageDown keys and the on screen buttons can be used to scroll through the pages The points defined for the given type are shown listed alphabetically by tag name and grouped by PCU association Values and states depicted represent a current state snapshot at the time the summary was requested and thus will not be updated to reflect realtime changes As is applicable alarm conditions will be indicated While in realtime display mode the Data Summary process is invoked via the Main menu A pop up menu window is displayed to allow selection of the desired data type summary While viewing a summary use the Page Up and Page Down on screen buttons to scroll through additional pages The RealFlex Summaries menu offers the following commands System PCU Allows you to view all PCU s and points defined for the Flex View syst
257. ndow will return to the size and location it had before it was minimized A minimized window can also be reopened by placing the pointer on the icon and clicking twice in rapid succession i e double clicking 1 7 9 Adjusting the width of the columns Many of the Microsoft Windows type dialog boxes have columns of data For example the Database Editor and Report Scheduler In these dialog boxes you can manually adjust the width of the columns 1 Position the pointer on the edge of a column The pointer becomes a double pointed arrow with vertical bar as shown below Type it escription ANALOG ANALOG INPUT O ANALOG ANALOG INPUT 1 2 Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the column edge until it is the desired width then release the button 1 7 10 Sorting data Many of the Microsoft Windows type dialog boxes have columns of data For example the Database Editor and Report Scheduler In these dialog boxes you can rearrange the rows of the list based on the values in the list by sorting When you sort Flex View rearranges the rows based on the contents of a column You can sort data in a column in ascending 1 to 9 Ato Z or descending 9 to 1 Z to A order 1 Click on a column caption button as shown in the example below Page 33 of 249 p Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 00 ANALOG 2 41 0001 ANALOG lal 00 o ANALOG 2 41 0003 ANALOG Tag name k The data in th
258. ned report Options are Previous Will provide a report for the time period set for the report working backwards from either the current time or from the time set in the Report at time execution section Current Will provide a report for the time period set for the report for either the current time or for the time set in the Report at time execution section Span Will provide a report for the time period set for the report working backwards from either the current time or from the time set in the Report at time execution section Setting time of execution This section is only active when selecting User defined report or FlexReport The Report at time execution section is used to define the start date and time for the period to be covered For example when selecting a User defined report and the time set is not changed then it will have no effect If the Time span is set to Previous or Current e g for a Daily report choosing the Previous option will print 24 values for the previous day Choosing the Current option will print values from midnight to current hour But if you change the time set to yesterday then this date dictates when previous starts Page 121 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Click on the Report at time execution check box a tick will appear when activated gt To set the date and time Please refer to Section 1 7 13 Setting Date and Time fields
259. ned to the Backup Project window where the path and file name will now be entered in the Save as field In the Path for restore field the default path for the restoration of the project is automatically entered This is the path where the project is currently located and will be remembered and entered in the Restore path field of the Restore Project window You may change this path for a directory on your hard drive floppy disc or CD drive Click on the button on the right of this field the Browse for Folder dialog box will appear where you can select the path required Click on the Backup button Details of the operation will be displayed in the Archive operation log area After successfully backing up the project the message Project backup is completed will appear Click on the OK button to proceed gt To restore a backup project The Restore function allows you to restore a backup Project file to your C Program Files Datac Projects directory or to a floppy disc or CD 1 From the Open Project window click on the More gt gt button to display the Project management section Click on the Restore button The Restore Project window will appear Page 145 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Restore Project Path settings File name C Program Files OA TAC Flex Views BACKUP Restore path C Program Files DatacsProjects Demolublins Default restore path
260. ng to one of the following classes no alarm event alarm urgent or critical Analog and tank alarms are automatically categorized as urgent for HI LO violations critical for HIHI LOLO violations and alarm for ROC and instrument failure occurrences All classes of alarm processing generate printed logs to the system printer with the exception of no alarm Server unavailable OK ordinary urgent and critical alarms trigger a unique sequence of audible beeps through the computer speaker as each alarm is logged These audible alarms continue until silenced and or acknowledged and can be recognized as to criticality of alarm by discerning the sequence of beeps which are as follows Server unavailable short very fast beeps Can be enabled disabled OK long very slow beeps ordinary long slow beeps urgent medium duration beeps critical short fast beeps While in realtime display mode flashing alarms can be quickly and easily acknowledged or the audible tone merely silenced without acknowledging alarms Additionally the operator can immediately display a summary of all unacknowledged alarms for the PCU that caused the most recent alarm Alarm processing can be traced via multi page alarm summary displays and or reports as well as via the alarm lines on the alarm banner These operational features allow quick reference to scan points that are currently in the active alarm state provide constant recall of alarms and events that have oc
261. ng the required type from the drop down list ANALOG METER STATUS or TANK 3 Select the Tag name by clicking on the field or E button and selecting the required Tag name from the drop down list or use the names FF buttons to scroll through the available Tag 3 3 1 Database Editor List of project PCU window To access the Database Editor Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system Database Editor Miil x List of project PEU recu editing a ay fe PS ve Telemetry editing t Import Export 5 SA Ez a mj RTU 2 64 32 RTU 3 65 32 HRT 4 64 32 ETS FCU SCAN 64 32 E SYSTEM 3 O Total PCU count Total point count 661 A332 5 365 M 162 T 2 MOTE The PCU editing and Import Export toolbars are only visible for Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The significance of each column in the display is Name The name of the PCU Address This represents the PCU address for the associated channel This number is a decimal representation maximum 65535 of the address encoded in the physical remote unit and included in I O message exchan
262. nncnnononannnnncnnnnos 221 Password changing after lOgON cccccccocnccncccccocconccononncnnnnononnnnonnnnnrnnnnnnnnncnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnennnanness 39 Password Maintenance Configuration Menu ccccocconcccnnnccccnccnnnncnnnnonononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnennnnnnnonennnnons 167 172 Password never expires Enhanced Security cccccoconccnccccconccnncnonanoncnononnconnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnrnnnnnnanennnnnnnns 182 Passwords ACCESS for USENS cecceccecceeceeceeceeeeeceeceeceecueeneeneeneeneeseeeeeeeeneeneeseeseeseeeeeseeseeenees 41 167 172 Grealing Strong pass WO Saa do lala 183 Efemerides 39 Paste Summary information from the Clipboard cccccccccccoccnccnnncccccnnonnncnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnonenanennnns 72 119 PEU Address tte dido dietas asias 84 PCI NSW ache hla ted de pera herd at ae a tea tls Aha teeta nett te 84 gre Ta aCe Me aU ga Of aaa a Me eT Trav ROU EN ROE RE Te Pee ee 84 A O O eoanulidadt nto setaadias 84 DUNCAN a 84 A O honed Meroe ane ania Syeda ed le aati an nen yaa petal 84 LK A O On eer Re Tee 214 ECU DNA O A CaN Pee tee a ee 52 NaMe eae kas een aes eters E antoy tated sw arece A E NE 84 FRO CONS vostro A 84 RODICA E E eee iiavos 82 84 o ARR met ett ne etn at En Da wn oe eR NE CS r ee er 81 82 System Summary CISDIAY a eat oia 46 Wasi aaa e 91 POU TAG SWiChH ACIVE AA S ni A a 74 POR ORF O A sade declan adda aula sear alu E iene 57 Picture text op SCS Se IMG ION Sr A fod TNE 203 A A saved
263. nnected to the RealFlex server 2 The Assigned zones section lists all zones defined in the Configuration Options Zone Editor window You may select all zones or a selected set of zones A tick in the check box to the left of the zone name indicates that it has been selected To select All click on the button Conversely to de select all click on the button To choose individual zones click on the check box to the left of the required zone s to toggle between selected and unselected To invert the selection i e change all selected to unselected and all unselected to selected click on the El button 3 Inthe Options section select required option s Choices are Select as Control Zone Allows the user to execute controls within the assigned zone s Select only one zone at a time from Main Menu Allows the user to switch between assigned zones When selecting this option the following message will appear Flex View For switching between assigned zones a command of Apply Zone type must be created in the main meny Page 214 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual This message reminds you that a User Menu button or a sub menu to an existing User menu button must be created in the Configuration Options User Main Menu window to enable the user to select the assigned zones The Menu button or sub menu should be configured to include A
264. nnnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnonoss 229 Displays Update Timestamp resettinQ ccccooonncnncccnonnconcnononnoncnnnanennnnnnnnncnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnnss 219 Duplicate PCU s Database Editor ccccccccooccnnnccnnnncnonnnonenononononononennnnnononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnnnnnnnnnns 84 Dyn layer font Setting ooocccoconnonocccnncoccnnoncnnannncononnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnonnnnnnannnnnonannnnenannanss 203 Dynamic Display Control ccccccccccssssseeeeeeeeeaeeseececeeeesseeeesseeeeeeeesseaeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeessssaaesseeeeeees 62 68 settingionis tor healrlexd mMode coito A E E EE NE 203 O aa A E T E E E T E ande 52 E Edt Alarm sounder requenGy ssnin a tess faved eee a e e 188 Alarm Sounder tembo a a a a A N 188 Analog tag POMiS dal cialis 96 Commands for menu DUMONS iii ii a iba 204 208 Database id ii tas 62 Flex Report Mesina AS aa 163 Histoticalatehive data cod e ee noaenes 154 PAE Si la 198 Ment DUNONG sn dba 204 208 Meter LAG DON Sitioco letra 100 POUS Database Eire ida lia 82 84 SCAN DON Sud slo it id olaa 95 Senequied repor ri did otto 129 Status tag POIS ec dd Ut 109 Tags Database Edi isis lili lala 83 Taniestrabondg table e e o di e e ee 115 TAGPO e dista ciaas 112 TElSMEINV SONOS iii aid 82 92 User IDAS o e e de 167 172 USES WI e OS 172 User ZOMG Scans 212 A A A A uate taeneaaeee 214 Edit Historical Data window Historical Editor oocccconncncoconnnnonon
265. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 2 439 4 Greating Strong Passwords a a aida 2 AS O PARTO GO MIG dci cis 2 Al Desktop Ay OUNS vta idad 2 O tacei eae cae Oe aah tected a tases a e Dusen tes aide loss eulana AE 2 4 3 12 1 Application window Configuration Options MENU cccccccscssseeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeseeeesesaaeees 2 4 3 12 2 Sounds window Configuration Options MENU occccncccccconnccnnnnccnnnonncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnonononnnennnnnnnnnnnns 2 4 3 12 3 Colors window Configuration Options Menu ooccccnnccccccconncnnnncnonononnnnnonononnnnnnnnnononnnnnennnnnnnnnonos 2 4 3 12 4 Miscellaneous window Configuration OptionS MeNU ooooncncnnnccccnconncnnnnccnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnos 2 4 3 12 5 Environment window Configuration OptioNS Menu cccccsseecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeees 2 4 3 12 6 Product Info window Configuration Options MENU ooooncccnnnccccccnnnccnnnconononnnnnnnnonononnnennnnnnnnnnnos 2 4 3 12 7 Project window Configuration Options MENU oooccccncccccccnncccnnncconononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 2 Page 5 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 8 Alarms window Configuration Options MENU oocccccncccccccnnncnnncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnans 2 4 3 12 9 Fonts window Configuration Options Menu ooooccccnnccccnnconncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 2 4 3 1
266. nnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnoninos 28 33 Columns Count Vinuk Screens cissiastia ela coloco A 16 Command Properties Widow sidad ana iaa 204 208 221 Communication state to RealFlex Server ariin iua oiin E AA ATE a A 13 Communications ENCISO canion sia a E N E EA 47 Fallo Display INICIO ati aa add 44 Numberotd atar aida 47 NOMDErOFNOTEDIES ara ee a 47 NUMbDE OTE MES a Erte Se mR ON NO ane me SR SO eee 47 Number OF ValiC responses ri a 47 A a a a Te 47 SAUS WEAS A IE 23 SUMMA US as 47 Total number ol scans TEQUES cod 47 Configuration File Editor ConfiguratiOn MENU oocccccnccccccononccnnnnnnnnononennnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnennnnnonananens 153 Edit elenelSCtnOS diia 92 Gomnmiguration menu COM Ma laica 141 neck FOr UDS ica 151 Contigua OA File EMO IA E AA AE NA IAEA 153 SOMMECE 10 MS SO Vi NAAA SA AA 151 Database Edi Id SN ASA 81 DESKOP E OU Sin EA I EA AAA tabi EIA ERA A a 20 IS CONNECT AA A a E AA SAA ARAS AS AA E 151 RISONA t O O oesi E a a a dial amena lilas 154 So sen a E aT a aaae aa a aS 142 DU OTS nsa e a E a a a a Ea ecamae atone 185 Password MamntenancCe cirio a a A A EAE Ei A 167 172 PIM CONO ieamsa aa aE A A a E cnc lies 184 REDON Genera lO snips stes N a aaa a a aA 163 Send Flex Report File to the Server renan aena aa e aa 166 GOnfGUPALION Options Me Ususario ia 185 AOV ANC OO WING Wirssusssesn ansiosas cs 219 PUVA VANS AVION sonenn AN 200 PAD IONC AUG Fir WING O Weed jc 186 SOS WAN Weoo or acia 190 ENVIO M
267. nnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnononenanennnss 186 Page 239 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Playing of a sound when user message IS FECEIVED ccccseeececaeeeeeccseeeecsegeeeeeueeeeseeeeesaeeeeessaeees 191 SCHECUIED TE DONS nt ias 130 User Name Banne csi dineechvon tebe te Lanebuls hcck eesatisedeee aiehaattatesacteletn 191 Wi SONS CS dais 191 EN GINCSS MAG UA Sua dd id 49 96 Enhanced security SYStOM cccccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeseseaseeeeessesseeeesseaeseeesasaeeeeeesnanseeeees 167 172 Environment window Configuration Options MeNU oocccnnncccncnnnccnnnncncnnnonncnnnnnnnononancnnnnnnnononanennnnnonoss 194 Errors Project Journal ccccccssssecccccesesecccaesseceeccaeuseceeccuaueceeessaaseceesseaueeceesseaaeeeeessaaeeeesssaaeeeesssaaass 137 A O sousder saavaevaiawarniessuhvanatwnerdusdantteeiaaed E vatenctietemnesae 96 Type Analog AGS ies A A AAA AA 96 Value Analog tags cccccssecccccececcseeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeesaeeessaeeeeseeeeeseueeessaeeessaueeesseaseeeesaueeesssceeeesaaneees 96 EX CSG SV WSS anat 89 DMA hats O lones T T E E O TA E E O anutbatne oo hiata can 126 EXPONMOa CoV TNC raia A list A S E R 89 154 F El Mel S NOn CU anaes rene uecanne dd 232 F1 User logon shortcut RealFlex look and feel ooooncccccccconccnnccononccononononnnncononncnnnnonanncnnnnos 37 39 F2 User logoff shortcut RealFlex look and feel coccccconcconccccoononn
268. nnnnnoncnnnonnnnconanennnnanrnnnonanonconanenoss 154 Edit Point Maintenance window Historical EdItOr ccooonccccoconcncoconnnononnnnconanonconancnnononcnncnnnnnnns 154 Edit tag properties Analg ui ai 96 UNS OOPS a a he senone a Passat conduct aetetenesiceasee 100 EAU Shenae o o A inden cae iat 109 e ree eee A ee ee ee eee ee 112 E mail Addresses for sending Scheduled Reports ccccoconccnncccccnncnncccnoconnconnnncnnnononanennnnnnnanennnonanenns 134 FAD DIG ATOM rsacuinsssistuiccbowetinaaveeeiuidlansatuue deautadaneteluletversbataantsblnie budds 197 HE AU AS cates since ene A O eee A etc 126 197 A 130 nn o Pr dugdsoars ge ccasa se soman teste uecuneeacscaut ne 197 E mail Settings window Scheduled reportS cccccoooccnnnccnccccnononccnnnnonononnnnnennnnnononannnnnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnnss 130 Enable Disable Alarm banner cccccccccceseeeeeeecsaeeeceecueeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeseeeaeeeesseauseeeessaaeseeessaaseeeeeessaaees 200 lA MIMI PI RE o ECO O 129 A A snes tioars aicdeiteeesdnanesassachecuadnbacs E 188 AGAN Get the POE Un A nes tane tana gacsecead saeiteetuasman N wesnutseee 62 Automatic IOCKING OF Ins applICca lO Nacida 191 GUISOF contol Dy KE YOO AO tenacidad oidos 191 D SKOP Layouts OrUSCIS asado 191 DESKIOD Lay OUTS WIN O Wear dd 191 Node SEWN E AO PR o UE E E CO E E A E 198 Operator to Minimize Main WINKOW i 186 Operator to resize and MOVE MAIN WINKOW oooccccnncccccccnnnccnnnnconenonnnnnnnnnnononann
269. nnononncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnannnnnnnnos 220 A ee ere I eee tee A 20 Saving a TOG OM erotica disc aaa e delirio doler deeesceueals 220 O seneen aa a E A 20 Dialog DOXeS s Address BOOK resosi E RN araa Raa aA 134 SA aa e a AAS eTA 20 Del Seve Date Tie asra aa aa r a a r a EN o iana 221 DialUp COMMS CHOM ossee r a a e EAE ES ra E EE alicia 146 198 Disable Alim Dane enen a N 200 AO A A 167 172 182 A 188 GUISO COMO DY KEY DO ANC scucseodas ries diosa 191 Users ENManGeG SCC UIANY basaron pie esas 172 Disconnecting from the RealFlex Server ccoconccccconncncoconococonnnnconononnononnnnononnnnonnanonnnnannnnnonnnnennnnnnnnss 151 Display ATT EVON S ar a 62 AC ojo AS A 190 DSTAUIT Colors MISC aia iia 190 DESKlOp Layos ii ida 20 DI A II II E 62 Al A A esas naGhapinatidasendiinauvasenas 214 A A A E E 44 Layouts avg testo inci di ii lada 220 A A A ae enete 50 52 MOVIDO att atodos 28 29 Poke Meter DOIN ura di ad id 62 OD Mle SV IO Wena aia aida 231 FAS SIZ acid 28 29 Sel Sener Date TMe WING Wii A A is 221 NV HUTA A e ice ane eone aenee 16 Page 238 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual VISU Al MA Ica Sari Did 44 BA O 28 50 72 229 Gopyving tone Clipboard dida 50 Desktop AY OUIS irc 20 A yq a e ce haca tial eect dee chats tants 129 A Fe WOW APA EU a A a E SATT 129 Displays Menu Select dOiSplayS ooccccocconnnccnnnccncnonanoconnnnnnnnnnnnnenononononannnnnnnnnnnnnnan
270. nononcnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnonnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnoss 139 Report SCHeECUIeL 025 lt c0ccccceecessdeeceescsccessaceceeesscccesseeceeeesecceseeseccessccessseeeesencsecessaeeseeesscceasereeeneesnnes 129 A e O 13 Set server Time Dale ensaladera 27 V VIEW ACIVe Alarms SUMMAN nussin sein ton oi td 74 COMMUNICATIONS SUMMA N 47 ML so Se leat Bee T Come oe tans i bene al a ale E 72 Page 248 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Database PUMA a 81 FISIOtICal Dala POMEWIAd Westin add a a 154 FUISTONCA Evon SUMA cia 73 Logged OU iio 23 PCUMIST Daisies io 81 System PCU SUMMALPY ccccccccsessccceeeeceeeessececeeceseeeuseeeceeeeessueussceeesessaauseeceeeeessaeaaeeeeeesessaaasseseeeeeees 46 Tag list in Database EditOF cooonnccnccccconccnnccononcnnncnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnncnnnoss 81 TAG DIO DCMS e a eaa a a A A 81 Virtual Screens WINKOW cccccccccsseseeeceeeeeceaaeceeeeeeeeaeaeeseceeeeeessaeesuseeeeeeesaeausesceeeeesssaeaaeeeeeeeessssaaseeeeeeees 16 Enable Disable tiiccc 2 7 ts scada 191 LO EEE E E E AE II E EEE A AS EEE a E ENO EEE EE E EA 112 W Walmstart OIE ab 91 PU a a tdo al Na 91 Warnings Project ourense ai Edo de 137 Wave ala Sounds rn di de tod dede 188 Wep Page Dina Cai a nl Ce 52 Width ocolUMNS Ad JUSTA di nec 28 33 Y earnyaccumula ton Meter Sarai AA AA ATT AE A AAA N 100 Yesterday accumulation Meter tags ii A secede Anata
271. not applicable when meter type 6 is used Type 99 An internal pseudopoint This meter type does not maintain the HOURLY DAILY MONTHLY and YEARLY data fields Only the LAST GOOD and CURRENT GROSS are updated Note The following fields cannot be edited from this window they are only provided for information purposes Current net Total accumulated net See description of Meter type above Current gross Value for internal accumulator register Not necessarily the same as the hard meter reading See description of Meter type above Yearly Year to date accumulation Similar to Current net but cleared yearly Page 102 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Monthly Month to date accumulation Similar to Current net but cleared monthly Daily Today s current accumulation Similar to Current net but cleared daily Yesterday Yesterday s accumulation Hourly This hour s current accumulation Similar to Current net but cleared hourly Last hour Last hour s accumulation Last good Last valid raw meter reading 5 When you have completed all your entries or changes click on the Fi button in the top of the window to save your changes A Database Modification dialog box will appear displaying the progress for the addition modification of the Tag in the RealFlex database 3 5 3 2 API volume corrections for meters Processing of meter data with METER TYPE 5 is similar to processing fo
272. nt The first page of the Active Alarm Summary display is accessed by clicking on the Main menu button selecting RealFlex Summaries and then selecting Active Alarms Page 74 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual The summary is automatically generated by RealFlex and allows quick operational reference to alarms within the system Thus the operator who must leave the control center to perform other duties can easily review critical system information upon his her return By default this multi page summary display contains a reverse chronologically ordered list of alarm log information for the latest 127 points remaining in alarm This display is updated in a push down fashion so the first line on Page 1 reflects the latest alarm occurrence the second line reflects the one before that and so on The operator moves from page to page by pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys or clicking on the Page Up and Page Down on screen buttons Paging of the display is circular That is if the page down button is selected while viewing the last page the user will be moved to the first page of the display For a Microsoft Windows look and feel display you can change the chronological order so that the first line on Page 1 reflects the oldest alarm occurrence To change the order click on the Time column caption An up arrow to the right of this caption indicates that the data has been sorted so that the oldest alarm occurrence i
273. nter option button if you have more than one printer connected to your PC and want to change from the default printer If you selected the Choose printer option the Browse Printer button will become active Click on the Browse Printer button The Print dialog box will appear where you may specify the destination printer and other printer setup options Alarm Printer Properties window Print mode section 2 Select the print mode required by either clicking on the Line by line printing option button this will print an alarm line as it appears Most suitable for printers with continuous feed paper OR Clicking on the Page printing option button this will only output print when it has a complete page of alarms to print Most suitable for printers which have pages e g A4 paper If you selected the Page printing option the Font button will become active Click on the Font button The Font dialog box will appear where you may specify the type of font and its properties After you have defined the alarm printer properties click on the Apply button to save your changes or Cancel to close window and not save changes To apply zone filtering 1 Select the type of zone filtering required The choices are No zone filtering No filtering is applied all alarms will be printed irrespective of who is logged in and which zone is used Apply active zone Only alarms relevant to the zone of the logged on
274. o all the users an individual user or a selected number of users In the To field an asterisk is displayed to signify that the message will be sent to all currently logged on users If you want to send a message to an individual user or a selected number of users click on the E Address book button to display the Select Recipients window Select Recipients Connected consoles Message recipiente Conzole Name ES CONSOLE T Cancel 3 Inthe Select Recipients window a list of all other currently logged on users are shown in the Connected consoles field Click on a user and click on the button The selected name will appear in the Message recipients field as shown below Select Recipients Connected consoles Message recipients ES CONSOLE 2 ES CONSOLES Conzole Name ES CONSOLE 44 ake kb Cancel 4 To select all users click in the gt button To remove users from the Message recipients field use the or buttons 5 Click on the OK button to accept or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation You will be returned to the Send Message window where the selected users will be displayed in the To field 6 Inthe Send Message window type in a topic in the Subject field then type in your message in the field below The Cut Copy and Paste buttons can be used in the normal way to edit your text message 7 To send your completed message
275. o select a Journal for viewing Click on the Journal name required 4 2 6 Remote Modules Help Utilities menu The Remote Modules Help command from the Utilities menu provides access to the on line Help files on the RealFlex QNX server These files provide Help topics associated with the RealFlex QNX server The Remote Modules Help system uses HTML to format and display information Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can access the remote help files gt To access a Remote Help file 1 From the Utilities menu select the Remote Modules Help option The Remote Modules Help window will appear displaying a list of all Help files available on the RealFlex QNX server ae v meutrina_2 11_en Fwh If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the buttons located in the toolbar will scroll the list left or right to the desired name You can also use the scroll bar if the required file is not visible Page 140 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual To locate a specific name Click on the 7 button The Set Filter dialog box will appear Set Filter E Enter new patterr H Cancel Enter a text string to search for For example if you wanted to locate all files with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and click on the OK button The Remote Modules Help window will change to list only those files containing xyz in th
276. o use the scroll bar if the required report name is not visible To locate a specific name 1 Click on the 7 button The Set Filter dialog box will appear Set Filter E Enter new patter 2 Enter a text string to search for For example if you wanted to locate all reports with xyz in the name you would enter xyz and click on the OK button The Select Flex Report File window will change to list only those reports containing xyz in the name Current state of Reports In the Select Flex Report File window a symbol to the left of the report name signifies the current state of the report Symbols are as follows E Report is as registered on the RealFlex server I Report is a draft or has been edited but not yet registered on the RealFlex server For details on how to send files to the RealFlex server please refer to Section 4 3 8 Send Flex Report File to the Server For RealFlex look and feel From the Configuration menu click on the Report Generator option The Select Flex Report File window appears displaying the lt Create New Report gt option and listing all reports available for the project sorted alphabetically by name Page 165 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual SELECT FLEX REPORT FILE iii F 3E x Create Neu Report gt Communication xl Historical xls NewReport xls Realtime xls Realtime xls xls summaryRTUi x lt l syst Sum RTU1 xl
277. oduct must be defined in the Product Editor or received directly from the field device to enable proper use of the Product_ID manual overwrite To define a product for a tank database point right click on the desired tank point in the System PCU Summary and select PRODUCT_ID from the pop up window A menu will appear displaying all applicable defined product data Select the proper product information and click on Update Changes to apply the information Once chosen the tank dynamic data will appear in the selected color as defined in the Product Editor 2 3 1 3 Display Alarm Events The Display Alarm Events selection will display all alarms and events for the selected point as recorded in the Historical Alarm Event Summary This window has no controls associated with it and is a capture of data at the time it was accessed 2 3 1 4 Display Dynamic Trend Analog and Status points only Used to display a dynamically updated graph showing the database point s numerical value plotted against time When you select this option a sub menu appears giving you the choice of opening the trend in a new window or if you already have other trend windows open you can open the new trend within any existing window See Section 2 2 7 Trend Dynamic Data for a description of the trend display nodes and point descriptions The Point description line can be hidden by clicking on the XI button to the left of the line 2 3 1 5 Display Poke Meter points only
278. ogon Logoff dialog box is displayed User Logon Logotft E No one curently logged on for this node E ogm Close User ID Enter User ID 3 Enter your user ID in the Enter User ID field and press Return User ID s are not echoed to the screen while being entered Page 37 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual For RealFlex4 look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Logon Logoff option The LOG MENU pop up is displayed fi LOG MENU Fi LOGON F2 LOGOFF 2 From the LOG MENU select LOGON or press F1 The USER ID pop up is displayed ej USER ID ENTER USER ID 3 Enter your user ID in the ENTER USER ID field and press Return User ID s are not echoed to the screen while being entered Flex View will make contact with the RealFlex server to retrieve your User Profile If no error message appears the logon was successful The passwords associated with the logged on user remains active until that user logs off or another user logs on even if the system is rebooted See also Shared zones Section 1 8 3 and Password protection Section 1 8 4 1 8 1 2 To log off from the RealFlex server For Microsoft Windows look and feel 1 From the Main menu select the User Login Logoff option The User Logon Logoff pop up is displayed User Logon Logoff E4 User demo 12 curently logged on E Log Ltt Close 2 Click on the Log Off
279. on when someone attempts to access a password protected feature the following User ID window will appear instead of the Password prompt User ID No one is curently logged in Enter user ID Microsoft Windows look and feel Page 41 of 249 y A 5000 0001 0040 E ej USER ID N ONE 15 CURRENTLY LOGGED IN ENTER USER ID RealFlex4 look and feel Flex View with Enhanced security system Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When password protection is in effect and someone who is logged on attempts to access a password protected feature he or she will be prompted to enter their User password A different password may be defined for each user If password protection is in effect and no one is logged on when someone attempts to access a password protected feature the following User ID window will appear instead of the Password prompt User ID Mo one ts curently logged in Enter user ID Enter password Microsoft Windows look and feel ej USER ID Mo one is currently logged in ENTER USER ID ENTER PASSWORD RealFlex4 look and feel A 5000 000 1 0040 E Page 42 of 249 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Realtime Monitoring and Control The topics listed below discuss the monitoring and control capabilities and how to customize the windows used by Flex View Alarm Event Status Notification see Section 2 1 Control Summaries see Section 2 2 Dynamic Display Control see Se
280. onalized menus and sub menus which are automatically saved for that user ID when logging off Instructions below show you how to Page 205 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Create a new button 1 To create a new button for the active Flex View project i e this button will only appear for a particular project ensure the required project is open then select the Main Menu option under Project OR To create a new buiton for a user ensure the required user is logged on then select the Main Menu option under User Options A Main Menu window similar to the one displayed above will be displayed If user defined buttons already exist a list of these buttons will be displayed in the Editing menu buttons field Click on the Insert new button button The Insert Menu Button window will appear Insert Menu Button E Please enter a caption for the item Lancel Type in the name for the new button This name will appear on the button top Click on the OK button You will be returned to the Main Menu where the name of the button will be displayed in the Editing menu buttons field gt Add sub menu s to a Menu button If required you can define sub menus for a menu button da gt 1 Click on and highlight the menu button and click on the 5 Go into Submenu button The Editing menu buttons field will be replaced by a blank Edit menu button name field
281. onfiguration menu does not appear or is grayed out then the Check for update automatically check box in the Application window of the Configuration Options menu has not been activated no tick in check box Page 152 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual gt To check for updates 1 From the Configuration menu click on the Check for Updates option Flex View will automatically interrogate the RealFlex server requesting information on any system updates If the Update all components silently check box in the Application window of the Configuration Options menu has been activated tick in check box an Updating Project window will appear displaying the progress of Project components that have changed on the RealFlex server being updated on your PC Updating Project Getting Realflez Project Update Information Extracting Reales Project Updates If the Update all components silently check box in the Application window of the Configuration Options menu has not been activated no tick in check box a Project Update Notification window will appear displaying a list of components which have changed on the RealFlex server since the last update Project Update Notification The following components Were changed in the project on the remote server To update project on your computer press Update button Aueiary Project tles 10 28 03 18 00 01 Project Displays 10 31 03 15 0
282. only during testing or commissioning gt To enable disable audible alarm until all alarms have been acknowledged Click on the Audible alarm until all alarms acknowledged check box A tick will appear when enabled Click again to disable no tick gt To change the sounder settings The default sounds used for the audible alarms are generated sounds set as shown in the table below Alarm type Tempo ms Frequency Hz OK alarms 550 500 Ordinary alarms 450 ETS Urgent alarms 350 700 Critical alarms 250 800 Server unavailable alarm a50 g00 See Note below Page 189 of 249 M0 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual You can change the tones used for each alarm type by editing the tempo and frequency A Test sound button is provided so you can hear the newly generated tone 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Edit sound settings for field and select required alarm type from the drop down list 2 Edit the Tempo and Frequency fields as required 3 Click on the Test sound button to review the sound generated Click on the Stop button to stop hearing the sound If required set the sounds for other alarm types by repeating the above procedure As an alternative to generated sounds you can use pre recorded Wave sounds files with an wav extension 1 Click on the El button to the right of the Edit sound settings for field and select required alarm type from the drop down list
283. ored valve s state changed As with the symbol type the color of the animation display will reflect the current state of the database point and the display will flash if an unacknowledged alarm state exists for the database point WINDOW The Window dynamic display element is used to transform a portion of the existing format into a dynamic element in which the color is updated with the database colors for changes in state DESCRIPTION This mask will display an extended description that can better describe a display 2 2 6 4 Tank Points A scanned tank data point is actually a set of data generated by special tank monitoring hardware and software that is not present in most systems The various subtypes of tank display elements are described as follows TANK SYMBOL Selection of the TANK SYMBOL display subtype will allow definition of an open boxed area within which the current level of the tank will be displayed visually as a vertical bar graph or chart If a color has been assigned to a tank tag name via the Product Editor the status value will display in the defined color when in normal range If there is no association made via the Product Editor the status value will display in black When alarm limits are reached the status will reflect the type of alarm and the associated color as defined in the Database Editor TEMPERATURE This mask will display the temperature of the reference tank In order for the values to display L am
284. ou can tailor the way the trend lines appear You can either display lines as a dotted or normal line and you can hide or display the trend limit lines Line Trend Smooth Trend The Trend Menu selection will display the style not currently selected In other words if a Line trend is currently displayed the Trend Menu will show the Smooth Trend option if Smooth trend is currently displayed the menu will show the Line Trend option The trend display style can be changed at any time When the user chooses to change the display style the trend is automatically reset Line Trend When a trend is accessed from the Display menu it is automatically displayed as a Line Trend This means that the last value received from the field is carried forward as a horizontal line until a new value is received For example if the previous value for a point was 27 00 and no new values were received from the field for 5 minutes the trend would display a straight line at 27 00 until the next new value is received If the next value for this point was 33 00 the trend would display 27 00 for a 5 minute span and then draw a vertical line up to 33 00 Smooth Trend A smooth trend simply displays the same trend in a different way much as a chart recorder would show changes in value For example if the previous value is 27 00 and the next new value is 33 00 a diagonal line would be drawn between the two points Page 59 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex
285. ove through the trend display with the mouse During cursor mode you can issue controls or view other graphic displays if desired Zoom Options The Zoom Options menu selection allows you to affect an expanded view of a single segment of a trend graph i e to zoom in use the mouse to specify the time interval to be included in the exploded view To do this first choose one of the three options Zoom Time Zoom Scale or Zoom Both The Zoom Time option is the default mode and implies that only the time length of the trend is relevant Alternatively the Zoom Scale option implies that the scale portion of the trend is most relevant and Zoom Both takes both the time and scale into account A Page 58 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual In order to zoom in on a selected area press and hold down the Ctrl key the pointer will change to a magnifying glass Place the pointer within the plotting area at the top left edge of the portion of the display you want included in the expanded graph Then press and hold down the select button and move the mouse to the bottom right corner A box will form as you do this When the right edge of the box is at the right edge of the display portion to be expanded release the button If the Zoom Time option is selected then the length of the box along the time axis is significant in the trend calculation If the option Zoom Scale is selected then the height of the box along the scale axis
286. ow either double click on the required status point or click on and highlight required status point then click on the The Tag Properties window will appear Type STATUS PCL RTU Tagname DI_00_03 4 gt E Tag description Short DEL VALVE STATUS Extended i oo States Current value Description Color Ctrl ID Point offset a THROTL oh Aus address Subtype le DPEN If Start bit CLOSE lie Nurm bits z FAULT Ip Alarm class Normal state Operate timer 50 mecs lo Alarm action Timeout timer 10 secs lo Control Type Page 109 of 249 MA 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 When adding a new Tag enter a Tag name Tag description and values for each parameter as required When editing an existing Tag edit fields as required by overwriting the existing value for each parameter The Tag Properties window may also be accessed for editing via the Edit Database option of the Dynamic Display Control Poke Points menu Tag properties can only be edited by Flex View users with appropriate user level access The significance of each field in the display is Tag description Twenty character Short and forty five character Extended free format description of the status point Point descriptions may be entered in capital or lower case letters Current value Current value of the scanned status point This field cannot be edited from this
287. p J Tank Gauging interface equipment must be used This value will always display in green LEVEL Selection of the LEVEL display subtype will display FT representing feet inches fractions of inches If a color has been assigned to a tank tag name via the Product Editor the status value will display in the defined color when in normal range If there is no association made via the Product Editor the status value will display in black When alarm limits are reached the status will reflect the type of alarm and the associated color as defined in the Database Editor Page 53 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual PRODUCT VOLUME This mask will display the product volume of the referenced tank If L amp J Tank Gauging interface equipment is used this value will be pulled from the field device If a tank strapping table has been defined for any other tank database type the value will be extrapolated from the tank strapping table values If a color has been assigned to a tank tag name via the Product Editor the status value will display in the defined color when in normal range If there is no association made via the Product Editor the status value will display in black When alarm limits are reached the status will reflect the type of alarm and the associated color as defined in the Database Editor GRAVITY This mask will display the gravity as registered by L amp J Tank Gauging interface equipment This value will alwa
288. pe is to reflect the current state of the datapoint in a way that is more effective than displaying only the name of the state in the database For instance if there are twenty valves in a system all with the possible states OPEN and CLOSED the implementor could use VALUE displays to reflect V 1 OPEN V 1 CLOSED V 2 OPEN V 2 CLOSED etc With VALUE displays the entire text string changes color with the state of the datapoint and flashes when an alarm occurs A subtype of Value dynamics provide the display of the units as defined in the Database Editor In operation the units will appear in the color appropriate to the current value of the datapoint in question This display type can be used to label another display of the same datapoint for example a VALUE or BAR dynamic or it can be used by itself to serve as an alarm indicator TEXT Analog text dynamic displays place on the screen a different text string for each of up to 10 values the datapoint assumes and each string may be displayed in a different color VAR TEXT The Var Text display type is similar to the Text display type described above but is used where more than ten messages are needed or where longer messages are needed As with the Text display type the value of the associated analog datapoint is used to determine which message if any will be displayed BAR A bar type dynamic display element consists of a bar graph representing an analog database point s current v
289. ppear which will list by name each QNX procedure defined in the RealFlex system You will note that procedure names are presented alphabetically If the window is full use the or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the procedure needed Select the desired procedure from the Select Remote Procedure window Choices are Start RF RealFlex creates a command that will start RealFlex from Flex View Stop RF RealFlex creates a command that will stop RealFlex from Flex View Restart RF RealFlex creates a command that will restart RealFlex from Flex View RF DB init RealFlex initializes the database on the local machine AutoUpdate RealFlex runs the script file AutoUpdate from the RealFlex QNX system which updates Flex View with any changes made to the database on the RealFlex QNX system side since the last AutoUpdate was run Crontab init A file on RealFlex QNX PC that stores scheduled tasks Crontab Init reads this text file and implements the schedules found inside this file Complete the Arguments field as described above Program field The Program field becomes active when selecting the Run Local Program command Click on the El button to the right of the Program field A Browse dialog box will appear Click on the x button to the right of the Files of type field and select from the pop up list either 2 Execute Files exe Command Files com Batch Files bat o
290. pply Zone commands for each of the assigned zones Note If a Menu button or sub menu has already been configured for the user and you are changing the zone accessing rights you will need to edit the list of zones for the existing Menu button or sub menu Display system historical events in the Historical Alarm Event Summary All historical events will be displayed in the Historical Alarm Event Summary A tick in the check box to the left of the option indicates that it has been selected 4 Click on the Apply button After the user zone has been set whenever that user logs onto the RealFlex server again the zone will default to the one defined 4 3 12 13 Zone Editor window Configuration Options menu MOTE Configuration of the Zone Editor window can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The Zone Editor window as shown below allows you to define operational zoning to tag level with display and control options Flex Yiew Options Application Zone Editor e Sounds Colors Edit zone NewZone Lreate Delete Miscellaneous 7 A I Enable filtering search Tags W Enable zoning Auto Select Product Info Er Project List of PCL s Ea Alarms FLES WIN C BH G7 a AATU l BH_G7_04 dlls RTU 2 BH G 31 H User Functions CIATU_3 BH_G7_32 5 Br CJRTU4 BH_G7_33 Erer LJATU_S BH_G7_34 E User Options O SYSTEM O Br E
291. quired repeat steps 2 to 8 above to add additional User Functions to the menu list You may want to separate groups of options in the menu list by inserting a line Click on the Insert Separator button In the appropriate position in the command list of the Edit menu button sub menu name field lt SEPARATOR gt will be displayed gt Edit commands for buttons or sub menus 1 Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy 2 Click on the command to be edited then click on the Ep Command Properties button The Command Properties window will be displayed where you can edit the command properties 3 After you have edited required command click on the OK button You will be returned to the User Functions window Rename a button or sub menu name 1 Click on the Go into Submenu or Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy 2 Click on and highlight the button or sub menu to be renamed and click on the Al Rename button or key F2 3 Rename the selected button or sub menu gt Rearrange buttons or items in a menu or sub menu list 1 Click on the Go into Submenu or E Return to Parent Menu buttons until you are at the required level in the buttons menu hierarchy 2 Click on and highlight the button command or separator to be moved
292. r Tags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU For details of the display please refer to Section 3 3 2 Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window topic To view the Tag properties window for a particular point From the Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window either double click on the required point or select and highlight the required point then click on the button The Tag Properties window will appear for the selected point Each database type has a customized Tag Properties window used for definition of unique tag names point descriptions and other pertinent information describing the operational characteristics of the database point The database types supported by Flex View are Analog Status Meter and Tank From the currently open Tag Properties window the fields in the top of the window see below can be used to select and view any of the available points on the system This is useful if you have many Tag properties to edit ll Tag Properties Type ANALOG FEU RTU Tagname A0010 Jarr pjo ee gt To select required point from the Tag properties window 1 Select the PCU by clicking on the field or hd button and selecting the required PCU from the drop down list Page 81 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Select the Type by clicking on the field or El button and selecti
293. r All Files as required 3 Look through the directories on your PC and select the required application command batch file etc then select Open You will be returned to the Command Properties window where the name of the selected application command batch file etc will be added to the Program field 4 Complete the Arguments field as described above Project field The Project field becomes active when selecting the Open Project command 1 2 Click on the button to the right of the Project field The Open Project window will appear Select required Project form the Open Project window Page 227 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Report File field The Report file field becomes active when selecting the Open Flex Report File command 1 Click on the e button to the right of the Report file field The Select Flex Report File window will appear which will list by name each Report defined in the RealFlex system You will note that Report names are presented alphabetically If the window is full use the or all buttons located in the upper left corner of the window to find the Report needed 2 Select the desired Report from the Select Flex Report File window Zone field The Zone field becomes active when selecting the Apply Zone command Note The Apply Zone command is used when the Select only one zone at a time from Main Menu option is selected in th
294. r cannot change the assigned password This option is usually selected only for user accounts that are used by more than one person Password never expires When active the password will never expire and overrides the Password lifetime setting in the Security Settings dialog box User is disabled When active the selected user account is disabled The built in Administrator account should not be disabled User is locked out When active the account is locked out which means the user will be unable to log on If the account is currently locked out this check box is selected and available You can clear this check box to unlock the account If the account is not locked out the check box is cleared and shaded You cannot use this option to lock an account The only way an account can be locked is if the user tries to log on more than the number of logon attempts specified in the Security Settings dialog box If you want to prevent use of an account disable it A user whose account has been disabled will not be able to log on until a member of the Administrators group enables the account 4 3 9 4 Creating Strong Passwords Good computer security includes the use of strong passwords for your system and user logon For a password to be strong and hard to break it should Be at least seven characters long Contain characters from each of the following three groups Description Letters uppercase and lowercase Numerals 0 1 2 3 4
295. r controls or manual overwrites to be available for the point Please note If EU type 0 and MIN MAX EU values 0 analog instrument failure checking is disabled EU Type cannot be left at 0 if the point is used in a Trend dynamic display or if the point is defined as controllable This value in engineering units corresponds to the MIN RAW value in counts Max EU Maximum engineering units value for point range scale or high end value of instrument range Decimal value 999999 0 gt 9999999 0 Value used for EU conversion instrument under range alarming and TREND PID BAR GRAPH EU data scale This value is defined for controls or manual overwrites to be available for the point Please note If EU type 0 and MIN MAX EU values 0 analog instrument failure checking is disabled EU Type cannot be left at 0 if the point is used in a Trend dynamic display or if the point is defined as controllable This value in engineering units corresponds to the MAX RAW value in counts ROC type Define rate of change ROC processing as follows 0 ROC alarm processing is DISABLED 1 ROC alarming based on inter scan delta change in conjunction with ROC LIMIT and ROC INHIBIT parameters Page 98 of 249 he 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual ROC inhibit Decimal value max 255 specifying time interval in seconds during which rate of change ROC processing will be disabled after posting an initial ROC alarm for the ref
296. r enters the meter factor by hand into unscanned analog database points pseudopoints and creates a status database point to hold the product type The product type can be entered by hand during realtime in which case the status point should be unscanned or it can be received from the field if your hardware is so designed The meter factor selected by the data processing is multiplied by the gross barrels to get net barrels A Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Page 104 of 249 3 a Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual The mtrtbl record structure for calculation Type 2 is as follows Meter_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Calculation type 2 Product_tag bi name of status point containing ID of current product status 0 1 State_0_MF_tag Tag name of analog point containing MF for Product 1 Status 0 State_1_MF_tag Tag name of analog point containing MF for Product 2 Status 1 Sample mtrtbl entry for a meter using calculation Type 2 METER 4 FIELD 3 RTU 2 MIX_BUT_RMF 12 NGAS_RMF Temperature Compensated Meters with two meter factors MF selected according to product type on the basis of a scanned densitometer reading MF f product Net Gross MF For this subtype the meter factor is a function of product density only Each product has a different meter factor The system implementor enters the meter factors by hand into unscanned analog database points pseudopoints and creates an analog data
297. r must logoff option is active in the Security Settings dialog box See Section 4 3 9 2 the currently logged on user must logoff by typing his her own User ID and password before another user can logon 1 8 3 Shared zones After you have logged on and another user is already logged onto the system and shares the control of one or more of your assigned zones a message similar to the one shown below will be displayed informing you of those users and the zones they control Flex View Attention one Water ls already controlled by user s DEMO DEMO USER The User Name Banner if active will also display a red background when another user shares the control of your assigned zones Refer to the Communications status with RealFlex server topic for additional information about shared zones with others 1 8 4 Password protection Flex View with Standard security system When password protection Is in effect and someone who is logged on attempts to access a password protected feature he or she will be prompted to enter a password A different password may be defined for each password protected feature and for each user For example user Joe may have to enter the password dibble to access the Database editor and bumper to access the CRT Builder while Jane may have to enter strive to access the Database editor and nirvana to access the CRT Builder If password protection is in effect and no one is logged
298. r the details for an existing report will be modified 4 2 4 2 Address Book window The Address Book window is used to select E mail addresses for the sending of scheduled reports The examples shown below are for a user using Microsoft Outlook Express gt To access the Address Book window From the E Mail Settings dialog box click on the E button in the Recipients field The Address Book window will appear Page 135 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Address Book EI EI Type name or select from list Find Main Identity s Contacts lee Recipients ce ourits Administration EsJEngineering ES Superdisor Zone 1 F5 Supervisor Zone 2 Na Mer Contact Properties 4 OR Cancel On the left hand side of this window there are three fields with two buttons below The top field is a Find field that allows you to find people in the Address Book or Active Directory or people and businesses on the Internet Clicking on the Find button will display the Microsoft Outlook Express Find People window For information on how to use this window please refer to the Microsoft Outlook Express Help documentation The middle field allows you to select the Identity folder or Contact group Click on the x button and select required folder from the drop down list The bottom field lists all contact names for the selected Identity folder New Contact button
299. r those with METER TYPE 1 except that API volume correction calculations are applied This works as follows When a reading from a PLC RTU is received for a type 5 meter the previous reading from the LAST GOOD field is subtracted from the new reading to determine the delta Then the calculation specified in file realflex data mtrtbl for the specific datapoint is used to determine the factor to be applied to the delta This factor is placed in the FACTOR database field in the Database Editor then processing continues as though the datapoint were a Type 1 meter point In other words the values in the CURRENT NET YEARLY MONTHLY DAILY YESTERDAY HOURLY and LAST HOUR fields are all corrected values and the values in the CURRENT GROSS and LAST GOOD fields are raw values Every Type 5 meter point must have a separate record in the mtrtbl file located in subdirectory realflex data api to specify how its correction factor is to be calculated The different types of calculations and the records required to produce them are described below Each record consists of a number of elements The file must be built according to the following rules Each record element is entered on a separate line Each record element begins in column one No blank lines are allowed within a record No blank lines are allowed at the beginning of the table To enhance readability lines may be separated using a semi colon All database points for ea
300. raft folder is empty will be displayed If there are draft reports available for sending the Select Flex Report File window will appear listing all draft reports that are not yet registered on the RealFlex server sorted alphabetically by name For Microsoft Windows look and feel Select Flex Report File 7 ey MewReport xls 7 Syst_Sum_ RTU1 xls If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the buttons located in the toolbar will scroll the list left or right to the desired name You can also use the scroll bar if the required report name is not visible For RealFlex look and feel SELECT FLEX REPORT FILE A E E Al Files MewReport xls Realtime xls If all selections are not shown and the window is full clicking on the al buttons located in the upper left corner of the window will scroll the list one page up or down to the desired report Page 167 of 249 MD 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 Click on required report name or click on All Files if you want to send all the reports The Draft Files Modification window will appear displaying the progress of the report s being sent to the RealFlex server Any connection problems or errors are reported When the Flex Report file s have been successfully registered on the RealFlex server a El symbol will be displayed to the left of the report name in the Microsoft Windows look and feel Select Flex R
301. ration Flex View El IF you change user ID it means that you delete old user and create new one All setting for old user will be lost Do you want to continue Y Cancel Page 171 of 249 MD 5000 0001 0040 E 4 Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to change the User ID in the RealFlex database You will be returned to the Password Maintenance window where the new user ID and name will have replaced the existing name in the list If required change user access properties for the Flex View options as shown below gt To set change user access level 1 2 In the hierarchy of Flex View functions double click on the required function or click on and fe Change access highlight required function then click on the button the Change Access for dialog box will appear Change Access for Database builder C Need password C Access disabled Click For All button if you want apply one access type Foor ll for all functions Apply Close Select required option by clicking on the appropriate option box Three choices are available Access without password Unrestricted access to the user Need password To make a feature available to the user by the entry of a password but unavailable to others who might be present while he she is logged on Access disabled To make a feature unavailable to the user When a menu option is
302. recipients for the report In the Mail Account Settings section complete the following fields Users will need to access their mail software to obtain required information When using Microsoft Outlook Express this information can be found by selecting Tools then Accounts and from the Mail tab of the Internet Accounts dialog box select required mail account then click on the Properties button SMTP Server Enter the name or IP address for the Outgoing Mail server For Microsoft Outlook Express this is the name displayed in the Properties dialog box Server tab Outgoing mail SMTP field SMTP Port Port 25 is the standard SMTP port number Sender e mail Enter the User Information E mail Address i e the address of the person sending the e mail For Microsoft Outlook Express this is the name displayed in the Properties dialog box General tab E mail address field Page 134 of 249 p Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Authorization required Some E mail systems require a User ID and a Password for sending mail but most don t most only require this information for incoming mail If authorization is required for Sending Mail click on the Authorization required check box tick in check box The two fields below will become active User ID Enter required User ID for Outgoing mail Password Enter required password for Outgoing mail Passwords are not echoed to the screen while being en
303. rical alarms Events and zoning information to the Flex View PC Any connection problems or errors are reported 4 3 2 Connect to the Server gt To connect to the RealFlex server From the Configuration menu select the Connect to the Server option The Connecting to the Server dialog box will appear and Flex View will attempt to connect to the Node 1 IP address When the connection is successful the database is updated by the RealFlex server downloading its active alarms Historical alarms Events and zoning information to the Flex View PC Any connection problems or errors are reported 4 3 3 Disconnect To disconnect from the RealFlex server Note For connections to a RealFlex server access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance From the Configuration menu select the Disconnect option A prompt will appear asking for your confirmation Click on the Yes button to disconnect from the server or click on the No button to abort the operation On selecting Yes you will be disconnected from the RealFlex server All reports alarm listings Communications active alarm and historical event summaries will be frozen at the time of disconnection 4 3 4 Check for Updates The Check for Updates option allows you to manually check for updates on the RealFlex system Note If the Check for Updates option in the C
304. rical data collection is not in effect for the database points being plotted As additional data comes in it will be added to the graph until eventually the trace will cover the entire time span Trends displayed in realtime will not save plotted information once the display is closed and reopened 2 2 7 1 Trend Display Modes When you right click within the axes of a trend one of the following menus will appear Cursor Mode Cursor Mode CURSOR MODE CURSOR MODE oom Options Zoom Options 200M OPTIONS PF 200M OPTIONS PF Trend Options Trend Options TREND OPTIONS P TREND OPTIONS F Line Trend Smooth Trend LINE TREND SMOOTH TREND Set Time Spar Set Time Span SET TIME SPAN SET TIME SPAN Reset Trend Reset Trend RESET TREND RESET TREND Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel These menus offer the following options Cursor Mode Selecting the Cursor Mode option will bring up a window displaying data similar to that shown below Cursor Mode WATER Z Date and time LI ee CAPACITY Ho Data RIU 1 TANK 1 CAPACITY Ho Data Microsoft Windows look and feel RealFlex4 look and feel A triangular symbol with a vertical dotted line will appear over the trend Click on this symbol and using the mouse move left or right through the trend display The first line of the Cursor Mode window shows the date and time The following fields show the tag name and its value of the sample The time and values will update as you m
305. rinter The Demand Reports window will automatically close unless the tick is removed from the Close this dialog after successful operation check box 4 1 3 2 Selective Alarm Print The Selective Alarm Print window is used to request a partial or complete report of the alarms gt To access the Selective Alarm Print window Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance Page 122 of 249 Y Mp 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 From the Main menu select Demand Reports and then select Selective Alarm Print from the sub menu The Selective Alarm Print window will appear Selective Alarm Print E3 Start time End time e077 2003 00 00 00 28 07 2003 23 09 59 Events List of PCL Acknowledge FL ESw IN Alarm RTU 1 Event ATU_2 Critical ATU_3 T ATU 4 ml RATUS Returned to Hormal cVCTEM System events TEST Point Description i W Match case Presets Output to Display Reset Save ds Delete Status i Close this dialog after successful operation don 2 Complete all fields as appropriate O Printer The significance of each field in the display is Start time End time The Start time and End time fields are used to set the time of capture for the report The default is one 24 hour period of the current day
306. rned to the Command Properties window where the name of the option in the form optionname will be added to the Arguments field 3 If required add further options chaining to the Argument by repeating steps 1 and 2 above Separate each argument in the Arguments field with a space The meaning of the Argument options is as follows IP Address Node 1 Restrict access to the Node 1 IP Address defined in the Configuration Options Project window Page 224 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual IP Address Node 2 Restrict access to the Node 2 IP Address defined in the Configuration Options Project window IP Address of Current Node Restrict access to the current IP Address Project Directory This is the directory of the currently selected project It allows you to have a directory which is related to the project you are currently using Logged User Name Restrict access to the currently logged user Password Allows you to define a password Clicking on this option will display the Insert Password Parameter dialog box Insert Password Parameter Please type a password to insert 0O BET Enter a password then click on the OK button The password will not be echoed to the screen while being entered When you enter or change a password write it down and keep it in a secure place and tell only the designated user the password Main Node Number Restrict access to
307. ru J BSE C Oil System W Display system historical events in gt Zone Settings C SGC the Historical AlarmE vent ene Eater C water System Summary Adwanced ONE 4 E User Options O gt Main Menu Page 213 of 249 A l 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can set the Default zone or define change the user zone settings In the example shown below we have a Railway track that has been divided into three zones A B and C These zones would have been defined via the Configuration Options Zone Editor window For this Railway track we now want to assign User A as the controller of Zone A User B controller of Zone B and User C controller of Zone C We also want to give User D the supervisory control of the whole track fone A fone B fone L id User A pi LiserB p User Ooy a User De Using the Zone Settings window four different user zone settings will need to be defined For Users A B and C you will need to assign control for their allocated zone For User D you will need to assign control over all three zones gt To define user zone settings 1 Click on the El button of the Edit settings for user field and select required user User ID from the drop down list Note The Default zone setting is used when no one is logged onto the RealFlex server or when the PC is in local mode i e when not co
308. ry Continued on next page Page 222 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Continued from previous page Option Description Apply specified zone See Zone field below Show Desktop Layouts window Quit the application Exit Flex View Quit the application Hist Alarm Event Open historical alarm event summary See PCU field below Open Display Open specified display See Display field below Open Flex Report File Open specified Flex Report file See Report file field below Open specified project See Project field below Edit application project and logged users options Printer Config Select and configure default printer Project Journal Project Journal See Journal field below Remote Modules Help Open remote modules help See Help file field below Report Scheduler Open Report Scheduler Run Local Program Run application on this computer See Program and Arguments fields below Run Remote Procedure Run procedure on QNX server See Procedure and Arguments fields below Selective Alarm Print Print selective alarms events Continued on next page Page 223 of 249 SA 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Continued from previous page Option Description S Send Flex Report File to the server Send specified Flex Report file to the server Set Server Time Date Set Server Time Date Allows a Flex View user to set the Date and Time on the RealF
309. s at the top A down arrow indicates that the data has been sorted so that the latest alarm occurrence is at the top If you click on the Options on screen button a pop up menu will be displayed By selecting one of the options the user may change the way data is displayed Show For All PCU all alarm points for all PCU s will be displayed Show For Selected PCU allows you to view alarms for a selected PCU On selecting this option a window listing all available PCU s will be displayed Click on the required PCU PCU Tag Switch will display the Tag name instead of the PCU name Alarms may also be acknowledged from this screen either singly or by page To acknowledge all alarms on the page click on the Ack Page button and select Yes to confirm acknowledgement To acknowledge a single alarm click on the alarm line and select Yes to confirm acknowledgement 2 4 4 Summary properties window gt To move or size a Summary display 1 Right click on the open summary and select Properties from the pop up menu The Summary Properties window will appear summary Properties Window size pels width al 639 Height 207 27 S Window position pels Left side 5 H Top side 124 E Save Close Reset to default 2 Using the spinner buttons you can change the summaries position in the screen or its size Note As you click on the spinner buttons the display being altered will actively chang
310. s in English units then this refers to the precision of the data to be entered in the table The two allowable responses are 8 which signifies that a volume is to be entered for every 8th of an inch and 16 which signifies that a volume is to be entered for every 16th of an inch gt To create a new strapping table 1 From the Tag Properties window click on the Edit strapping table button Flex View will attempt to recover an existing strapping table but as a table has not yet been defined the following message will be displayed Flex View UL New table was created 2 Click on the OK button The new Strap Table dialog box for the selected point will appear Page 115 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Y Strap Table TEST_71_ 00 01 strp Ma ES iy Edit Level tty Select Level Inches Fractions Volume ae paaa When the Strapping Table dialog box is first accessed all of the values in the Volume fields will be 0 0 The only editable field in this window is the Volume entry The Volume field represents the volume of the tank at the selected level All other information is provided to inform the user of the name of the strapping table being edited the current level and the fraction selected The buttons on the Strap Table dialog box are Edit Level Allows you to edit the volume for an entry on an existing table or to set the volume in a new table
311. s sche acces rial 100 Last nouraccuamulation Mete TAGS iii 100 Level CONVErSION type Fanta Sii A A A Ad 112 TAIANA dd 115 Lifetime Historical archive Dala viii A a 154 Lmt Tank lags uan alada add 112 A O A 57 Line by line al ari PUNUNG A A ed N 200 LINKS DISPARA Mash acheter alte oe aaleattiraa id 50 LIST Displays Zone Catita A a iO aal 214 AAA A eatin bate edcea aaa eed deceit ed sanoudnenaucee 214 List of project PCU window Database Editor cccccccccccoonnccnnnncccnnonnncnnnonononanncnnnnnonononannennnnnonnnanans 82 A veoatle EE A AAAA EA AE E A AEE E A A 112 Page 241 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual USNs cer haa ciate sce te ech chard e A 96 112 a on y A sess aaciacla tn cehecehtat cattle eres 44 96 Lock Unlock Flex VieW application ccccssssceccccsssseeecceeuseceeccseusececeeuueeeeccseaeeeecsseageeeessseaeeesensseaaes 191 Toolbar layout Flex View application WiINGOW cccccccsssseceeceseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseaeeeeseueeeeeeaeaess 13 Vit SCTE CMS WINGOW a a a 16 Locked out users Enhanced security ccccccooocncnncccccccnncnononnonnononnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnonannennnnnnnns 182 Lockout duration Enhanced Security coccoooonncnnccccooncnnnconoanoncnonnnnnnnonononnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 172 Lockout users Enhanced security occooonncnncccconncnnccononncononononnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnennnnnnnns
312. se coca 200 PUNUNG ecoacnan oaa a a a a 129 Processing Analog Tags or A A a ER AAA N avaues 96 SOU PRE QUESO AI AA aad IA eee 188 OUNAE SUN A NS AA esse SA A 188 Sounder Silence DUO EA AO E EE A eee 13 Sounder TEMO esas abe dei aes e ose deena aa eee eee ee 188 Alariraclon s Analog AACS uri 96 e 109 Alarm panner Background colo eiii osos 190 Page 234 of 249 Ma 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual FOUN SS TUNING init 194 Alarm Glass ACIS alas suicida in 49 o nen acidaus e E 109 Alam Event Status Notifica lO ati nda 44 NE VEINS WINDOW raea P e E O 62 Historical Event summary cccccseeeeecseeeeeeceeseeecaeeeecaeeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeessaeeeeseaeeeessaeeeessegeesseeseeessaeeeeeeas 73 Alarms Acknowledge all unacknowledged Alarms oocccccccccccnncccncncconccononnconnnnnnnnconnonannnnnononanncnnnnnnnos 49 Acknowledgement unacknowledged Alarms sccccccccseeeeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeessaueeeeeessaaeeeessuagseessaeaess 74 Alarms window Configuration Options M Nu cccccccssssseecceeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseuaaeeeeeeeeseaas 200 Allow Cursor Control Dy keyboard ooocccccccccccccconcccnccnoccnonnccnnnnononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennennss 191 Minimizing Of Main Window cccccccccccssseeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeessaueeeseaeeeeseaeceeseaueeessaeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeesseneeseas 186 Resizing and moving of Main WIN Weiss ica 186 Alle 4e EXI HEX WICW SAON class necia acaso E
313. se is logged onto the project and send receive messages to from logged on users 16 01 02 15 06 07 Displays current date and time When not connected to the RealFlex server time displayed will be as set on your PC clock When connected to the RealFlex server time displayed will be the time of the RealFlex server i e local time To move a toolbar ooh Ensure the toolbar layout is unlocked See To lock or unlock the toolbar layout below Position the pointer over the toolbar as shown below Press and hold the left hand mouse button while you drag the toolbar to a suitable location or into a second or third toolbar row Release the mouse button to drop the toolbar to its new location It will remain in this new place until you move it again To resize a toolbar Move the pointer over the toolbar move handle until it changes to a double headed arrow and then drag the edge of the toolbar To lock or unlock the toolbar layout Right click anywhere inside the Flex View toolbar to display a pop up menu To Lock Click on the Lock Layout of the Bar option A check mark appears next to the menu item To Unlock Click on the Lock Layout of the Bar option The check mark is removed next to the menu item In the Flex View application window a unlocked toolbar layout will display a move handle on the left hand side of each toolbar gt To show or hide Icons in the drop down menus When you click on the Main
314. se the left hand mouse button without moving the pointer This action is used to select an object or perform an action Double click Press and release the left hand mouse button twice in quick succession Drag Press the left hand mouse button without releasing it and then move the pointer This action tracks the position of the mouse pointer The action ends when the mouse button is released Press Press the left hand mouse button without releasing it This action is generally used to select an object for action Release Release the mouse button after pressing it This action is generally used to conclude an action initiated by a press or a drag Page 8 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 1 Flex View Operations Overview Flex View is a highly efficient system for Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA applications for a wide range of realtime environments Flex View is an Operator Workstation for the RealFlex SCADA system Flex View runs on a Microsoft Windows PC located anywhere in the world requiring only a TCP IP connection to the RealFlex QNX server Flex View s user friendly interface includes dynamically updated displays audible and visible alarms printed reports and straightforward control mechanisms Both implementation and operation of the SCADA system are centered on the Flex View Application Window By default the Flex View Application window and its displays take on the appear
315. seed Vand cast elavedecv dba coed N 52 Playing of a sound when user message IS received c ooooocccccoocccoccconnncconcnonnnnconononncconononnnncnncnonannrnnennnnas 191 ROMtDESCAPUIOA MGIC Soros lociones lens 57 POMboOnsel Analog TAGS tisiscolidletcataivcndasniansiahut lic doi lid dildo i n 96 Meter tad S resides isidro peca leido italia 100 A veges a ose doieases ei a a a 109 Page 243 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Tanta Sai Ai 112 Point valles chain dde 57 A ee ee eee eee ee A 62 POSIION Ol GISDIAY Sia A ida 231 Predelined k 10 9 cee ltda ee ee 120 129 Predefined reports Scheduled reports ccccccccccocconnnccnccconononncnonononononanncnnnnnonnnanncnnnnononnnnannnnnnnnnnnnns 130 Presets report Selective Alarm PriNt ooonncccnnnccccoconnnccnnnccnonoonnncnnnononononnnnnnnnnnononannnnnnnnonnnnnannenennnnnss 122 PMA ALA DAG uri AA A AS A cdi 129 A O 200 id ioscan i aT cna a aE E eiS 129 Scheduled reportS ceseeeeeccccceccceeeeseeceeeeeeeeaeuseeeceeesseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeceeeesssueaseeeeeeeesseaseeeeeeeeeesssaaaaesss 130 Selecive AlS ea aa de ATE E E 122 A A E a a E E 129 FHS COMING UPAUIOM rana da S 184 Prodao ND MUMBO ereraa lan A E E 197 Product Info window Configuration Options menu ccccccccccncncnnnnccnoncnonncnnnonononannnnnnnnonononanncnnnnninonans 197 Product Regist Nada ad 197 FOC tAd A a er PRR Rae Re eee ee eee eee ere 142 O 142 MPorina tom Re allison 146
316. selected PCU click right mouse and select Telemetry Editor from the pop up menu An Operation In Progress window will appear while Flex View makes contact with the RealFlex server to retrieve the channels description file driver configuration file and channel driver setting information If a driver has not been specified in the driver chn file for the selected channel then the message No driver was specified for x channel will be displayed You can specify a driver in the driver chn file using the Configuration File Editor option from the Configuration menu If no Error Logs appear the Telemetry Editor Driver scanner name window PCU PCU name tab will be displayed Page 92 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Telemetry Editor Driver ScannerSMs PCU RTU_1 Channel 1 Phone number Security Code 4 For the PCU edit the Value fields for each Label as required Labels and their default values are as defined in the scanner name pcu cfg file provided by the scanner developer 5 Click on the Channel channel number tab Page 93 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Telemetry Editor Driver ScannerSMs PCU RATU_ Channel 1 Baud Rate Data bits Parity 47 command Timeout mec Pin code Pin code delay Log file name seghio Reason RSSI voltage Analogi RunTimel Digitali Digital Digital3 Digital Digitals Digital Mo parity 2000 1
317. ser Name field enter the name for the user maximum of twenty 20 characters including spaces This is usually the name of the employee to whom the user ID is assigned Click on the Apply button You will be returned to the Password Maintenance window where the new user ID and name will have been added to the list If required set user access properties for the Flex View options as shown below To remove a user Click on and highlight the user name to be deleted then click on the X Remove user button A message Are you sure you want to permanently delete user User name will appear Click on the OK button to confirm deletion of the User ID or click on the Cancel button to abort the operation If you try to remove your own logged on user ID the following message will be displayed Password Maintenance User it currently logged on 1 Cannot delete user until logoff To change a user ID Click on and highlight the user name to be changed then click on the button The Change User dialog box will be displayed User ID DEMO User Name DEMO USER Apply Close Change the User ID and User Name by typing over the existing names in the User ID and User Name fields Click on the Apply button If you changed the User ID the following dialog box will appear asking you for confirmation Click on the OK button to continue with changing the User ID or click on the Cancel button to abort the ope
318. ssword file Access disabled Historical data maintenance Access disabled amp Set datetime Access disabled Report generator Access disabled Manual overwrite Access disabled Alarm disable Access disabled E Exit Flesview Access disabled Group Name CA Description Maintenance gue Page 181 of 249 Y 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual This window displays a list of Flex View functions See table below that can be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password When a new group is added these functions are initially set to Access disabled In this list a symbol is placed to the left of the function to signify its current access level The significance of these symbols are gt D Access without password Password required Access disabled 2 Click on the function for which you want to change the access rights then click on the EI button which appears to the right and from the drop down list select required option Three choices are available Access without password Unrestricted access to the user Need password To make a function available to the user by the entry of the users password but unavailable to others who might be present while he she is logged on Access disabled To make a function unavailable to the user When a menu function is disabled the user will not be able to see this function or it may be grayed out in the Flex View menus When a Dynamic Displa
319. t Project name Central region Sener address ez 127 0 0 1 Project directory C Program Files SOA TACA Projectes Central region Cancel 14 Check the information displayed is correct e Project name Server address es and Project directory then click on the Import button Flex View will make a connection to the RealFlex server and proceed to import the existing project If no one is currently logged on a User ID dialog box will appear User ID Mo one is curently logged tn Enter user ID Enter your user ID in the Enter User ID field and press Return User ID s are not echoed to the screen while being entered A Password dialog box will then appear Enter password Enter your password in the Enter password field and press Return Passwords are not echoed to the screen while being entered As the project is being imported progress or problems are reported by the displaying of messages Respond to these messages as required Wait until this process has completed and the following message is displayed Page 151 of 249 MD 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Flex iew 1 Project successfully imported Click on the OK button The Connecting to the Server dialog box will appear and Flex View will attempt to connect to the Node 1 IP address When the connection is successful the database is updated by the RealFlex server downloading its active alarms Histo
320. t 88 User Functions gt Demand reports Rg Edit scratch pad ey Edit password File a Historical data maintenance sea Set date time a Report generator Manual overwrite RY Alarm disable EE Exit Flexview E ELECTRICITY Electricity System 4 a 4 LIGHTHOUSE LightHouse System A OIL OIL System ID DEMO Name DEMO USER A This window displays a list of users with an expandable collapsible hierarchy of Flex View functions See table below that can be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password When a new user is added these functions are initially set to Access disabled In the hierarchy list of users click on the symbol to the left of the user name to show the list of Flex View functions In this list a symbol is placed to the left of the function to signify its current access level The significance of these symbols are rey Access without password ga Password required Access disabled When you first call up the Password Maintenance window the program will prompt you for a user ID to select or to create a new user Page 169 of 249 A 7 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Flex View functions Function Controls access to Database builder The Database Editor option from the Configuration menu CRT related utilities The Send Flex Report File to the Server option from the Configuration menu Send controls Sending Controls to a controllable device
321. t as 2 Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Num bits Number of bits comprising the status point 1 bit for two state point or 2 bits for four state point Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Alarm class Classification of alarm for the status point Critical Urgent Alarm Event or No Alarm The Alarm Class may be chosen by left clicking on the Alarm Class field or drop down arrow and selecting the desired alarm from the list Note specifying a type No alarm will disable alarm generation on this point Normal state Normal state value of status point i e O or 1 for 1 bit status 0 1 2 or 3 for 2 bit status A normal state of 0 will define the first state listed in the States Description field as the Normal state When a status point attains this condition a return to normal is assumed and any associated alarms will be removed from the active alarm list and replaced with a return to normal message This is also the state that a status point is set to when RealFlex is shutdown and restarted with the warmstart option Alarm action Decimal number 0 3 5 255 which identifies the Action Processor data file record s defining a status output control to be issued automatically upon this status point s attainment of a predefined state 0 indicates no action An entry in the Alarm action field requires a file written for use with the Act
322. t the message Project restore is completed will appear Click on the OK button to proceed To import a project For details on how to import a project please refer to Section 4 3 1 1 Importing Projects 4 3 1 1 Importing Projects The Import option from the Open Project window will only become active after you have disconnected from a Project or when Flex View is started without any projects e when Flex View has been installed on a PC for the first time Selecting this option will allow you to create a new project on your PC from an existing project file that has been originated on a RealFlex6 QNX machine The Import option is only used to Import projects from a RealFlex6 QNX machine To import and convert projects from a RealFlex4 QNX machine please use the Flex Converter application program During the creation process Flex View initializes the project files on the RealFlex6 QNX machine The initialized project files are then imported onto the hard drive of your PC To Import a Project 1 From the Configuration menu select the Open Project option The Open Project window will be displayed listing all the projects available on your system 2 Click on the More gt gt button The Open Project window will expand to display a Project management section and six buttons 3 Click on the Import button The Import Project Wizard Project Information window will appear Page 147 of 249 y Z 5000
323. t an existing strapping table From the Tag Properties window click on the Edit strapping table button The existing Strap Table dialog box will appear Select the entry you wish to edit by clicking on and highlighting the appropriate line When the correct entry is selected click on the Edit Level discussed above button and modify the information as Note If a metric table was specified level conversion type 4 in the Tank Tag properties window and is changed to English level conversion type 2 or 3 the tank strapping table must be deleted and recreated to reflect the change in unit of measure specification This also applies if the original selection was level conversion type 2 or 3 and is subsequently changed to 4 gt To delete a strapping table 1 From the Tag Properties window click on the Edit strapping table button The existing Strap Table dialog box will appear Click on the _X Delete Table button You will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the strapping table with a Yes No selection After selecting Yes the strapping table will be removed To exit the Strap Table dialog box and return to the Database Editor window click on the E button lf any changes have been made to the existing table and have not already been saved you will be prompted to save the strapping table before exiting Page 117 of 249 MD 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 5 5 3 API volume correction
324. te User Function Ed te z one Settings z Zone Editor E Advanced l User Options Main Menu gt gt E xO eE cancel amv Note You must be connected to the RealFlex server before you can set this option for the Project Instructions below show you how to gt Create a new button 1 To create a new button for the active Flex View project i e this button will only appear for a particular project ensure the required project is open then select the User Functions option under Project A User Functions window similar to the one displayed above will be displayed If user defined buttons already exist a list of these buttons will be displayed in the Editing menu buttons field Insert new button button The Insert Menu Button window will appear Page 209 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E 2 Click on the L Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Insert Menu Button E4 Please enter a caption for the item Lancel 3 Type in the name for the new button This name will appear on the button top 4 Click on the OK button You will be returned to the User Functions window where the name of the button will be displayed in the Editing menu buttons field gt Add sub menus to a Menu button If required you can define sub menus for a menu button 1 Click on and highlight the menu button and click on the iS Go into Submenu button The Editing menu buttons field will be replaced
325. ter For details please refer to Section 4 3 10 Options Allows a user to change the Flex View Application program start up actions and configuration options For details please refer to Section 4 3 12 Page 142 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 1 Open Project If you have a number of separate RealFlex systems Projects in your plant Flex View allows you to access any one of those projects over the TCP IP network The Open Project option from the Configuration menu allows you to open add remove rename backup restore and import projects To open a project 1 2 From the Configuration menu select the Open Project option The Open Project window will be displayed listing all the projects available on your system Open Project List of registered projects Upen DemoDublina Lancel More gt gt Click on and highlight the required project then click on the Open button To add a project to the list Note To add a project the project directory and its associated files must already be available on your PC in the Program Files Datac Projects directory 1 2 From the Open Project window click on the More gt gt button The Open Project window will expand to display a Project management section and six buttons Project management Add to list Remove from list Rename Import Restore Backup Click on the Add to list button A
326. ter portion of the tank product level in inches centimeters Page 113 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual In the Limits section HI fields Feet Meters Decimal value max 99 feet or 32 meters which constitutes a high alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value reaches the high limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Inches Centi Decimal value max 11 inches or 99 centimeters which constitutes the fractional foot meter portion of the high alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value reaches the high limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Alarm Color Color to display alarm message and dynamic value representation of the referenced tank level when a high alarm condition is reported LOW fields Feet Meters Decimal value max 99 feet or 32 meters which constitutes a low alarm limit for product level in the tank When the actual value reaches the low limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Inches Centi Decimal value max 11 inches or 99 centimeters which constitutes the fractional foot meter portion of the low alarm limit for product level in the referenced tank When the actual value reaches the low limit value set for this point the point will go into alarm Alarm Color Color to display alarm message and dynamic value representation of the referenced t
327. tered 5 Inthe Recipients section click on the En button Flex View uses MAPI to connect to the currently installed E mail Software and request the Address Book containing a list of possible recipients From the Address Book select required E mail address es then click on the OK button For details please refer to Section 4 2 4 2 If you are not using E mail Software then the address book will probably be empty and the user will have to manually type in the email addresses of the recipients Each address should be separated by a semi colon After selecting addresses from the Address Book you will be returned to the E mail Settings dialog box where the selected E mail address es will be displayed in the Recipients field Each address will be separated by a semi colon 6 Inthe E mail Settings dialog box click on the OK button to return to the Scheduled Report Properties window Miscellaneous section The Miscellaneous option is only active when selecting the User Defined Report option in the Report section Create report in CSV format Click on this check box to create the report in CSV format A tick will appear when active A report created in the CSV format can be opened in Microsoft Excel In Excel the information can be analysed more easily After you have set the report properties click on the OK button You will be returned to the Report Scheduler window where the new report will now be listed o
328. the application window to a Flexview icon at the bottom of your screen Note If the E button is grayed out in the Title Bar of the Flex View application window then the Allow to minimize check box in the Main Window section of the Application window see Section 4 3 12 1 has not been activated and the operator will not be able to minimize the main Flex View window Page 31 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual For RealFlex4 look and feel Click on the El button in the upper right hand corner of the application window Use this command to reduce the application window to a E Flexview icon at the bottom of your screen Note If the Bl button is not visible in the upper right hand corner of the Flex View application window then the Allow to minimize check box in the Main Window section of the Application window see Section 4 3 12 1 has not been activated and the operator will not be able to minimize the main Flex View window To maximize the Main Flex View window Click on the Se FleeView icon at the bottom of your screen or right click on the icon and select Maximize from the pop up menu 1 7 8 Minimizing and maximizing Displays and other windows A Flex View display and the operation executing within it can often be set aside while another window is being viewed then rapidly redisplayed when it is needed Note When a Display is minimized the activity executing within it is stil
329. the pop up menu i e Day Week Month or Year Changing the lifetime of a point from a day to a year will not generate a year s worth of data However changing the Lifetime from a year to a day will erase all data older than a day The Lifetime field allows specification of a maximum of 999 days 260 weeks 60 months or 5 years Note Once the lifetime is shortened historical data prior to the new lifetime is immediately removed and is unrecoverable Deadband The associated filter for the point i e the value reported to historical collection must change by more than this amount in order to be saved in the historical data set For Analog points the entry is used as a minimum change in percentage of full EU scale For Meter points the entry is used as a minimum raw count change For Status points the Deadband field is not applicable as all changes of state are recorded To change the Deadband of a point position the pointer over the Deadband field to be edited then right click This will open the Edit Point Maintenance dialog box allowing you to change the deadband value of the field Status bar The Status bar at the bottom of the window displays the total number of points currently defined in the Historical Maintenance listing gt To filter the display The Filter option allows viewing of a subset of Historical datapoint definitions sorted by PCU Name database type and or Tagname 1 From the Filter too
330. ties menu allows you to print a copy of the active Display or Summary This command presents a Print dialog box where you may specify the destination printer the range of pages to be printed the number of copies and other printer setup options 4 2 2 Print Preview Use this command to display the active Display or Summary as it would appear when printed When you choose this command the main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which a single page will be displayed in their printed format The buttons in the print preview toolbar shown below offers you options to move back and forth through the pages zoom in and out of pages initiate a print job close the print preview window Print Preview toolbar Brings up the Print dialog box to start a print job Take a closer look at the printed page See note below Take a larger look at the printed page See note below e Preview the previous printed page Previ E review the next printed page A Exits the Print Preview and returns you to the previous Flex View window Note When you position the pointer over the display image the pointer turns into a magnifying glass Clicking the left mouse button reduces or enlarges the view The new view is centered wherever you Click 4 2 3 Print Alarm Page The Print Alarm Page option allows you to print the contents of the Alarm page Note If the Print Alarm Page option in the Utilities menu does not appe
331. tion 1 4 Page 185 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 Options Selecting Options from the Configuration menu will allow you to change the Flex View Application program start up actions and configuration options To access the Options menu From the Configuration menu select the Options option By default the Application window is always displayed when first entering Options An expandable collapsible hierarchy of options is displayed down the left hand side of this window MOTE Options listed below that are marked with an asterisks are only visible to Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access Application Sounds Colors Miscellaneous Environment Product Info Project Alarms Fonts Main Menu User Functions Zone Settings Zone Editor Advanced User Options Main Menu Note The Project options are only available after you have opened a project The User options are only available after you have logged onto the system To select an option Move the pointer over the required option in the hierarchy The pointer will change to a hand and the selected option will be underlined and change to blue click to select The appropriate options window will be displayed Note Some options may be password protected or may not be accessible to the operator Page 186 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manua
332. tions Action Window Help a AE ae 214 T AA 8 battamps_ps3 csl original mo Battamne El SER ER coldstart REALELEX TASK STARI UP FIL Y WORE node number on which to run task PRI priority at which to run task 4 hi Pty device number of Console on which to FLAGS create option for task 1 8 do WAIT 1 gt wait until task completes ic WA Ln 6 Col 22 QNK Node l Main 4 For instructions on how to use the Flex CFE application please refer to the Flex CFE Help file A Page 154 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 6 Historical Editor Historical data point editing can only be carried out by Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access The RealFlex Historical Maintenance utility allows collection of historical data point information based on data values collected from the field or stored in pseudopoints The collection of data is activated at system startup The historical data collection subsystem will automatically begin the collection process upon activation of historical recording for database points placed in the Historical Maintenance utility The Historical Editor option of the Configuration menu allows for the addition modification deletion exportation or importation of database points for historical recording as well as providing a summary of points currently in the historical record mode The Historical Data Point
333. to the Password Maintenance window where the symbol to the left of the Flex View function will have changed to reflect your choice To exit the Password Maintenance window click on the x button in the top right hand corner of the window 4 3 9 2 Password Maintenance Enhanced security The Password Maintenance window as shown below allows User groups and User ID s to be added changed or removed from the system and to allow certain Flex View functions to be selectively enabled disabled or secured by a password for each group Using the Password Maintenance window up to thirty two 32 separate user groups can be given individually specified access to the various Flex View functions and features that can be password protected The number of users that can be assigned to user groups is unlimited To begin Password checking the user must initiate the User Logon Logoff sequence After entering a valid User ID and password the user is said to be logged on and the password associated with that User ID remains active until one user logs off or another user logs on even if the system is rebooted User logon activities are printed with events on the Alarm Printer The Flex View enhanced security system offers the following security features Group accounts Users must have certain user rights and permissions to perform tasks from within Flex View Group accounts help you efficiently assign those user rights and permissions to users Fle
334. ton After all changes have been made to the Colors window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes 4 3 12 4 Miscellaneous window Configuration Options menu In the Miscellaneous window as shown below you can enable disable automatic locking of the application for the current user after a defined period of time logging off to unlock a locked application User Name Banner Virtual screens Desktop Layouts the hiding of unavailable commands in menus moving the cursor by means of the keyboard sound to be played whenever a user message is received Flex iew Options Miscellaneous Applceaton locking _ _ Q_ Q_ __ _ M Automatically lock application after this period in minutes 30 Environment ae a oder taka M Allow logging off to unlock application El Project Features Alarms Enable User Name Banner i Fong M Enable Virtual Screens Main Menu User Functions iW Enable Desktop Layouts z Zone Settings Show Desktop Layouts window Zone Editor Hide unavailable commands in the main mer arance M Enable cursor control by keyboard H User Options Main Menu i Play sound when a user message received 7 caca emp The Miscellaneous window is divided into two sections Application locking and Features Application locking section To automatically lock the application after
335. ton to close window and not save changes Page 219 of 249 M0 7 5000 000 1 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 14 Advanced window Configuration Options menu The Advanced window as shown below allows you to reset the timestamp timings For some unexplained reason Flex View may not bring in all the changes for a project You can change the date and time in this window so that all changes since the selected date will be imported to Flex View For example if you change the date to 20 June 2001 all the changes since that date will be imported brought across Note You cannot set a date greater than the current date Flex iew Options Application Advanced es Sounds l o ca Pleaze do not edit the properties below unless itis absolutely necessary Miscellaneous fa Environment Time of Project Creation GMT 20 Aug 2003 11 47 03 E ica Info Displays Update Timestamp GMT 11 Dec 2003 14 55 42 Projec E alarms Database Update Timestamp GMT 11 Dec 2003 13 16 07 C 3 Fonts Aux Files Update Timestamp GMT 06 Oct 2003 14 03 35 a Main Menu rE Symbols Update Timestamp GMT 03 Dec 2003 14 34 02 Zone Settings Reports Update Timestamp GMT 11 Dec 2003 16 20 15 E Zone Editor o L Advanced Reset timestamps of ticked components l User Options to the following time Local 20 08 2003 12 47 03 Main Menu caos en gt To reset the timestamps 1 Click on the
336. ts a pseudopoint output only value and is only updated when a control is issued for that database point Refer to I O driver documentation and associated point type data sheet for more specific information Page 80 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 3 3 Database Editor The Database Editor option from the Configuration menu allows a user to access and edit the Database of the currently open Project MOTE Flex View users with a Development licence and appropriate user level access can Add Delete and Edit PCU s and their associated Tag properties Flex View user with a Runtime licence and appropriate user level access can access and edit certain fields in the Database Editor Fields that cannot be edited are associated with I O driver point information and are grayed out To access the Database Editor Note Access to the Database Editor may be disabled or protected by a password For information on user access levels please refer to Section 4 3 9 Password Maintenance From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system For details of the display please refer to Section 3 3 1 Database Editor List of project PCU window To view the database points for a particular PCU From the Database Editor List of project PCU window double click on the required PCU The Database Edito
337. ts and dynamic displays please refer to the Fonts window topic Miscellaneous section This section allows you to change the font used in the Alarm Banner and Alarm Event Summaries and to define the way the Desktop background as defined in the Colors option window will be displayed gt Font for alarm banner and alarm event summaries Click on the Change button to the right of the Font for alarm banner and alarm event summaries field and choose required font from the Font dialog box gt Displaying application background Click on the El button to the right of the Display application background field and choose required option from the drop down list Choices are Never The Desktop background will not be displayed Only when maximized The Desktop background will only be displayed when the Flex View application window is maximized Always The Desktop background will always be displayed After all changes have been made to the Environment window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes Page 197 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 6 Product Info window Configuration Options menu The Product Info window as shown below displays the product information and all its components including information about the hardware and its operating system From the Product Info
338. ulated by using a corrected gravity and the scanned product temperature as inputs to API subroutine TAB6B identified for this calculation type as subroutine 2 The corrected gravity is calculated from the observed gravity and temperature of the product by API subroutine TAB5B The mtrtbl record structure for calculation Type 4 variation 1 is as follows Meter_tag Database point name tag RTU_tag Database RTU name tag Calculation type 4 Meter_factor_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s meter factor tag analog API Subrutine No 2 Gravity_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s API Corrected Gravity Temperature_tag The tag name of the analog database point containing the product s observed temperature Sample mtrtbl entry for a meter using calculation Type 4 variation 1 12 NAT GAS HTF_CRUDE 4 12 NGAS MF 2 311 C_GRVTY 12 NGAS TEMP b Variation 2 using GPA Technical Publication 16 subroutine The system implementor manually enters the meter factor into an analog pseudopoint and creates a scanned analog point for the product temperature The CTL is calculated from a relative density constant for the product found in the mtrtbl entry and the scanned analog product temperature by a Gas Processors Association GPA subroutine The subroutine which is described in GPA Technical Publication 16 has been modified to only do a TABLE 24 temperature
339. un its status the time it was last ran and the result of the last run To schedule a report 1 2 Click on the Create button The Scheduled Report Properties window will appear In the Scheduled Report Properties window set the properties for the report For details please refer to Section 4 2 4 1 Other scheduled reports may be added to the list by repeating the above procedure To delete a scheduled report from the list 1 Click on and highlight required report to be deleted Click on the XK Remove button A window is displayed asking you for confirmation Click on the Yes button to remove the report or click on the No button to abort the operation To edit the properties of an existing report Click on and highlight the report to be edited Click on the button The Scheduled Report Properties window will appear In the Scheduled Report Properties window modify the properties for the report For details please refer to Section 4 2 4 1 4 2 4 1 Scheduled Report Properties window The Scheduled Report Properties window is used to set the properties for scheduled reports gt To access the Scheduled Report Properties window A Page 130 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When adding a new report From the Report Scheduler window click on the J eae button Page 131 of 249 Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When editing an existing report Fro
340. urity SV SIGIMN reanna 167 EDITA Salsa E ee een ee eee 109 Stat Meal Plex proce Ud titi 221 Starting FICK VIEW PLOT anM accu zacee ae eshte alban cteatl E avd e E E a ea a 12 Startup acions SEUS ias 186 A AA E PAATE E EE S A E 44 72 SUS SGONNAN 62 68 EA IA A en A T DAEA tO T E E 52 109 A A E E AE AAEE AEE Dee ne E A EEST 95 A e a a E A T A A a etoraadan ead 109 Stop RealFlex ProceQqura aep n n dia ll tit dla 221 Strap Table window Tank Strapping table occccccccccccconncnnnccnonononcnnnnnnonononanncnnnnnonononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 115 o SO Sais aa ete ca ce enc ce ce Manse a ciate dan tices ate ael ane uaa a aces 183 DUDIV Oe Ala OG LAGS oi ie eds csaatet iat dis 96 MEA AAA caterer TT ower E E emer eT menor eer en rer ce meer ere rr eer cr ater 100 SEAS O sia 109 Page 246 of 249 A 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Laila Saad taxa E EEE E 112 SUMMANES RESIZING as 28 29 MOV ai 28 29 AA A Pe nln catalan haat tetas lo cece et 129 E a en eee eee ee re eee 129 properties WINDOW ccccssececceeseecceeececceseccceuseeecsaueeecseuseeessaseeeesaaececsseeessaueeeesaseeeseseeessageeessageeesseass 75 Summary properties WINdOW ccccccccoconnnccnnnccnnnonncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananenos 75 1 AR o Oe A A dnantuasanetnneensesacteanceet 52 Supervisory Control si A ic 9 Symbols Update Timestamp resetting cccocccnnccnnncccnonononncnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnncnonnnnnn
341. user are printed Apply selected zone Allows you to choose a pre defined zone If you chose to apply a selected zone the field below becomes active Click on the El button to the right of this field and from the drop down list select required zone To apply type filtering In the Type filtering section click on the check boxes to choose which alarm types you want to appear on the report A tick will appear when activated After you have made all required changes to the Alarms window click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes Page 203 of 249 Ds 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 3 12 9 Fonts window Configuration Options menu If you have setup Flex View with the RealFlex4 look and feel Base window and displays the Fonts window as shown below allow you to replace the fonts used in some of the displays for user selectable fonts Note To change the fonts used for the button tops and menu s in the Base window alarm banner and alarm event summaries please refer to the User Interface section of the Environment options window Section 4 3 12 5 Flex iew Options El Application Font 5 Sounds Colors il Font far pict layer Miscellaneous 2 Font A for dynamic layer Environment y Productinfo at Font 1 for dynamic layer Change El Project 4 Font for dynamic layer Change
342. ve your user profile click on the No button Note Your user profile includes the current display layout and any Desktop layouts saved via the Desktop Layout window gt To restore the default desktop layout at logoff Click on the Restore the default desktop layout at logoff check box to toggle between active and non active A tick will appear when active When active your current desktop layout will be replaced by the default desktop layout after you have logged off The Default desktop layout is accessible to all users and is defined using the Desktop Layout window After you have made your selection click on the Apply button followed by the OK button to save your changes or click on the Cancel button to close window and not save changes 4 3 12 16 Command Properties window The Command Properties window as shown below is used to insert or edit a command for a menu button or sub menu in the Main Menu windows via the Configuration Options menu Command Properties Command Description Menu item caption Carcel gt Adding commands 1 Click on the E button of the Command field the following drop down list of commands will appear Option Description About Flex View Display program information version number and copyright Active Alarms Open active alarm summary See PCU field below Alarm Disabled Summary Open alarm disabled summary Analog Summary Open analog summa
343. w will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 Select required tag s to be removed To select a single tag click on and highlight the tag To select a group of tags that are next to each other click on and highlight the first tag of the group hold down the Shift key then scroll down the list and select the last tag of the group To select individual tags which are not next to each other hold down the Ctrl key then select each tag as required Page 95 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 4 After you have selected the tags to be deleted click on the x button You will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the scan point s with a Yes No selection After selecting Yes the selected scan point s will be deleted from the database To edit a scan point for a particular PCU 1 From the Configuration menu select the Database Editor option The Database Editor List of project PCU window will appear listing all PCU s on the system 2 Double click on the PCU for which you want to add scan points The Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 Click on and highlight required tag to be edited then click on the En window will appear for the selected tag button The Tag Properties 4 Edit relevant fields as required The edited scan point may be written to the RealFlex database by clicking
344. will appear listing all currently defined tags for the selected PCU 3 From the Database Editor Tags for PCU name PCU window either double click on the required analog point or click on and highlight required analog point then click on the The Tag Properties window will appear Page 96 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Type ANALOG Peu RTU Tag name Al_00_04 J 44 gt om Tag description Short TANK 1 DEL FLO Extended x _ _ EU value 0 000000 Lirnits 60 00000 HIHI ee a ie D ml do m art LoLo 15 00000 EU type ROC type Raw value eig ROC inhibit blir raw 204 ROC lirit Max raw 1023 Alarm action Min EU 0 000000 Alarm deadband fi 0 Max EL 90 000001 Controllable r 4 When adding a new Tag enter a Tag name Tag description and values for each parameter as required When editing an existing Tag edit fields as required by overwriting the existing value for each parameter MOTE The Tag Properties window may also be accessed for editing via the Edit Database option of the Dynamic Display Control Poke Points menu Tag properties can only be edited by Flex View users with appropriate user level access The significance of each field in the display is Tag description Twenty character Short and forty five character Extended free format description of the analog point
345. window it is only provided for information purposes Point offset The value in this field tells the I O driver which item of data received from the PLC RTU is to be placed in this record Because the precise requirements depend upon the particular I O driver used to access the data for this point a general description of how to determine the point offset is not possible If this is a pseudopoint an unscanned point then 1 is entered in this field to tell the I O driver to ignore this datapoint A 2 value represents an output only value and is only updated when a control is issued for that database point Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Aux address This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Subtype This field is used for additional addressing or codes that may be required for some PLCs RTUs Refer to I O driver documentation and applicable data sheet for your hardware Start bit First significant bit in the status word for point being defined Definition is highly dependent upon the specific I O Driver in use Please consult the I O Driver documentation for appropriate details Status bits are numbered right to left beginning with zero and ending with 15 e g if the second two bits 2 4 3 represent a 2 bit valve status scan point designate the start bi
346. window so that a different portion of the contents may be viewed To scroll a line or column at a time click on one of the small triangles in the control button of the scroll bar To scroll a page at a time click on the bar itself To scroll to a specific portion of the display place the cursor on the slider in the middle of the bar press and hold down the select button on the mouse and drag the slider button along the scroll bar releasing the select button when the desired location is reached 1 7 6 Closing Displays and other windows For Microsoft Windows look and feel Click on the x Close button in the right hand side of the Title Bar Note Alternative methods of closing Displays and other windows are Right click on the Title Bar at the top of the window and select Close from the pop up menu Double click the windows Control menu button E With the window active key Alt F4 For RealFlex4 look and feel Click on the 5 Close button in the upper left hand corner of the window Note Alternative methods of closing Displays and other windows are Right click on the Title Bar at the top of the window and select Close from the pop up menu With the window active key Alt F4 1 7 7 Minimizing and maximizing the Main Flex View window To minimize the Main Flex View window For Microsoft Windows look and feel Click on the El button in the right hand side of the applications Title Bar Use this command to reduce
347. window you can register the Flex View application or if you have any comments or have any problems during the system execution you can send us an e mail with the Product information This will help us to define the reason for your problems and eliminate the errors Flex iew Options E Application Product Into Sounds f Colors Flex Mew version 3 1 Build 8 1 1 43 Miscellaneous Install directory EA Program Files DAT AC Flex Views Registration ID 35bF BLOT FAbB Bx2 FirmAsre dll version 8 1 0 1 elie allele iie DataCony dll version 6 1 0 5 ll Project ConnMgr dll version 8 1 0 4 e Alarms FlexUpd dll version 8 1 0 9 Fonts Lombt32 dll version 5 51 5 Main Menu MPLE42 dll version 6 00 9586 0 l l MSVCRT dll version 6 10 9844 0 User Functions MSYCP6O dll version 6 00 9168 0 Zone Settings Number of processors 1 Zone Editor Processor Intel A CeleronA CPU 1 70GHz at 1693 MHz hd ee Advanced Fl User Options Registration Web Server Main Menu OF Cancel Apply gt To Register the application This option is used when a user does not have the Flex View product enabled on the Hardware Key i e they have not purchased the product You must e mail Datac and provide the Registration ID Number displayed in the Product Registration window Datac will then supply you with a Product ID number by e mail When you receive the Product ID use the Product Registration window to enter the Product ID
348. x View comes with a built in Administrators group where users of that group have full access and control for password maintenance User groups should be added by the Administrator and operators User accounts should be added to the user groups Assigning users to user groups gives most users all of the user rights and permissions they need to perform their jobs Page 173 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual User accounts To use a computer that is running Flex View users must have a user account which consists of a unique User ID User name and password Flex View verifies your User ID and password when you logon to Flex View If your user account has been disabled locked out or deleted Flex View prevents you from accessing the SCADA system ensuring that only valid users have access to the SCADA system To access the Password Maintenance window Note Access to this option may be disabled or protected by a password See To set change user access level below for information on user access levels If access has been disabled users will only be able to view their assigned levels of access to certain Flex View functions and to change their own password From the Configuration menu select the Password Maintenance option If you are signed on as a member of the Administrator group or a user having full access rights to this option the following Password Maintenance window will be displayed mal amp E
349. y The system implementor specifies what the Display Link will look like It will normally be a text string but can be a single blank space or a special character and may be placed on top of a particular symbol to make it easier to identify Your system implementor should provide you with a means to identify the Display Links used in your system Page 50 of 249 y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual When you click on a Display Link and the new format is displayed the original format may or may not remain displayed The implementor may place as many Display Links on a single format as desired and a given format may be accessed from as many other formats as desired when Display Links are used There are numerous ways the system implementor might use Display Links in the creation of an easy to use and easy to understand system Page 51 of 249 he I 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual 2 2 6 Dynamic Display Types Each graphic display is made up of a background picture overlaid with dynamic display elements Display links and Superkeys Each dynamic display element is a textual and or graphical representation of the current status of a database point or a group of related database points Each Superkey is an on screen button that is used to start a user defined procedure The various types of dynamic display elements are described as follows 2 2 6 1 Analog Points VALUE The purpose of this display ty
350. y Control function is disabled the following message will be displayed when the user tries to access the function UL Unauthorized operation In order to maintain system security the System Administrator will need to disable access to the Edit password file function for all user groups but not for the Administrators group 3 Repeat Step 2 above for any other Flex View functions for which you wish to change the access rights 4 After changing required access options click on the Apply button or click on the Close button if you do not want to make any changes Flex View will communicate with the RealFlex server to change the access rights in the RealFlex database for the selected group Page 182 of 249 Y Ms 5000 0001 0040 E Flex View V3 1 Helo Manual Flex View functions Functions Controls access to Database builder The Database Editor option from the Configuration menu CRT related utilities The Send Flex Report File to the Server option from the Configuration menu Send controls Sending Controls to a controllable device User functions The User Functions window from the Configuration Options menu Demand reports The Demand Reports options from the Main menu Edit scratch pad Not used in Flex View The Password Maintenance option from the Configuration menu The Historical Editor option from the Configuration menu The Set Server Time Date option from the Utilities menu The
351. ys display in green FLOWRATE This mask will display the flowrate as registered by L amp J Tank Gauging interface equipment This value will always display in green AVAILABLE STORAGE This mask will display the available storage in the referenced tank If L amp J Tank Gauging interface this value will be pulled from the field device If a tank strapping table has been defined for any other tank database type the value will be extrapolated from the tank strapping table values If a color has been assigned to a tank tag name via the Product Editor the status value will display in the defined color when in normal range If there is no association made via the Product Editor the status value will display in black When alarm limits are reached the status will reflect the type of alarm and the associated color as defined in the Database Editor PRODUCT NAME This mask will be translated at display time to live data indicating the identification of the product within the tank If the Level Conversion type for the selected point indicates L amp J Tank Gauging interface this information will be pulled from the field via product code defined using the Product Editor and will display in the color defined therein If L amp J Tank Gauging interface is not being used this information may be user defined through the Product Editor selection from the Configuration If no designation has been made the field will be blank TANK TAG NAME This mask will

Flex.View V3.1 Help Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents